HomeMy WebLinkAboutCornell-Olin-Library-Terrace-Renewal_Project-Manual
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL
Project Manual & Specifications
April 24, 2019
Owner
Cornell University
Ithaca, NY 14853
Architect
Bell & Spina Architects
215 Wyoming Street
Syracuse, NY 13204
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1
Instructions to Bidders
Bid Form
General Conditions and Exhibits
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
Section 01 23 00 Alternates
Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options
Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings
Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management
Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules
Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety
Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements
Section 01 35 44 Spill Control
Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements
Section 01 42 00 References
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control
Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services
Section 01 45 33 Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities
Section 01 51 23 Heat During Construction
Section 01 57 13 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection
Section 01 71 23 Field Engineering
Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing
Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out
Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory
Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data
Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds
Section 01 78 39 Record Documents
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 2 – EXISITNG CONDITIONS
Section 02 31 26 Existing Hazardous Material Info
Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition
Section 02 82 13 Asbestos Abetment
Section 02 83 13 Lead Remediation
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
Section 03 01 00 Maintenance of Concrete
Section 03 01 33 FRP Reinforcing
Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
DIVISION 04 –MASONRY
Section 04 01 40 Stone Restoration
Section 04 42 00 Dimensioned Exterior Stone
DIVISION 05 - METALS
Section 05 05 13 Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal
Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel
Section 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings
DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND COMPOSITES
Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 01 50.19 Preparation for Re-Roofing
Section 07 52 16 (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 07 72 00 Roof Accessories
Section 07 76 16 Pedestal Paver System
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
Section 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers
DIVISION 23 – HVAC
Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC
Section 23 05 12 Submittals and Shop Drawings
Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Section 23 09 10 Fans
Section 23 31 13 Ducts and Accessories
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 10 General Electrical Requirements
Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical
Section 26 09 29 Lighting Control Devices
Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices
Section 26 41 00 Lightening Protection System
Section 26 50 00 Lighting
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORKS
Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving
DIVISION 31 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving
Section 32 91 13 Soil Preparation
Section 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses
Section 32 93 00 Plants
DRAWING LIST
General
G-001 Coversheet
G-101 Site Staging Plan & Notes
G-102 Code Data, Wind Uplift Design Criteria, And General Notes
Landscape
L-101 Paver Layout Plan
L-102 Asphalt Replacement Plan
Structural
S-001 Design Data and General Notes
S-100 Existing Partial Plans
S-101 Sections
Architectural
AD-101 Terrace Roof and Raised Podium Removal Plan & Notes
A-101 Proposed Roof Plan
A-102 Floor and Roof Plan – Additional Information
A-201 Elevations
A-202 Elevations
A-203 Elevations
A-204 Elevations
A-301 Existing Stair Plan & Sections
A-302 Proposed Stair Plan & Elevations
A-303 Typical Stair Section and Steel Support Details
A-304 Existing Raised Podium Plan & Section
A-305 Proposed Raised Podium
A-306 Guardrail and Handrail Plan, Sections And Details
A-307 Stair and Ramp Detail
A-501 Terrace Details
A-502 Terrace Details
A-503 Podium Details
A-504 Mid-Level Roof Details
A-505 Miscellaneous Details
A-506 Terrace Masonry Details
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 4
Mechanical
M-011 Mechanical Plan - Demo
M-101 Mechanical Plan – New
Electrical
E-001 Notes, Legend, Schedules
E-011 Electrical Demo Plan
E-101 Terrace Power Plan
E-201 Electrical Details
END OF DOCUMENT
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project: Olin Library Terrace Renewal
Owner: Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Architect: Bell & Spina Architects
215 Wyoming Street
Syracuse, New York 13204
1. PROPOSAL FORMS
a. Proposals shall be made only on the forms provided and all blank and underlined spaces
in the forms shall be fully filled in, in ink or typed; amount shall be fully stated both in writing and in
figures. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to execute such documents
on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificate included in the Bid Form shall be
completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name must be fully stated. Completed form shall be without
interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer.
2. RECAPITULATION OR PROPOSAL
a. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral,
telegraphic or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered.
3. METHOD OF SUBMISSION
a. Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Envelope shall be
addressed to:
Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Proposal for: Olin Hall Terrace Renewal
Submitted by:
(Bidder)
b. Proposals shall be delivered to the Owner at the address listed above not later than
2:00PM on May 28, 2019.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2
4. BID OPENING
a. Proposals will be opened publicly by the Owner in Room 102C, Humphreys Service
Building, Cornell University Campus, Ithaca, New York, at the hour and date listed in 3b. The Owner
reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and
time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto.
5. BIDDING DOCUMENTS
a. The Bidding Documents will consist of the following:
(1) Instructions to Bidders.
(2) Bid Form.
(3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements".
(4) Drawings and Specifications.
(5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals.
6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED
a. Contract Documents may be obtained from the Facilities Contracts website
(http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm ). For assistance, call 607-255-5343.
b. Printed sets of bid documents will be available at $50.00 per set without refund. No
partial sets will be issued. Electronic access to the bid documents including addendums may be obtained
for a non-refundable fee of $129.00 at the requestor’s option. All Contract Documents remain the
property of the Owner.
c. At the request of the successful bidder, Cornell will provide up to five (5) printed sets of
drawings and specifications.
7. START OF WORK
a. Work at the site shall be started within ten (10) calendar days from the date of issuance
of written authorization to proceed and shall be achieve substantial completion of the project no later
than November 29, 2019.
b. The construction schedule is critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and
equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
8. BONDS
a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with
"Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract
Price. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. Each of these Bonds are to be
in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3
b. Bid Bond. Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond in the amount of 10% of
the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded
to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the
Insurer shall be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 8a above.
9. AWARD OF CONTRACT
a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the
entire project. All labor, services, materials, supplies, etc. shall be provided in accordance with the
Contract.
b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and
responsible bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and
responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award.
c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any
informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors
Qualification Statement.
d. All Proposals shall be irrevocable until contract award, unless the bid is withdrawn.
e. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty
(60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to
by the Owner and Contractor.
10. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
a. Each Bidder shall visit the Site of the proposed work, fully acquaint and familiarize
himself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the operations to be carried on under the
proposed Contract, and make such investigation as he may see fit so that he shall fully understand the
facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work under the Contract.
b. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings,
Specifications and associated Bid Documents.
c. By submitting a Proposal, the Bidder covenants and affirms that he has carefully
examined the Drawings, Specifications, associated Bid Documents, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any,
and the Site, that he relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his own investigation he has
satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all
matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and that as a result of such
examination and investigation, he fully understands the conditions of bidding and that he will not make
any claim for, and waives any right to damage because of misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the
Bid Documents and the conditions of bidding.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4
11. DISCREPANCIES
a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications
and associated Bid Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the
Architect, who will send written instructions to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be
responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing, addressed to
the Architect. Inquiries received by the deadline established at the pre-bid conference will be given
consideration.
12. PRE-BID CONFERENCE
a. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 10:00AM, May 9, 2019, in Room 102C of
the Humphreys Service Building. The purpose of the conference will be to clarify the intent of the
Contract Documents if necessary. Results will be published in an Addendum.
13. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS
a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and
experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder
to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties
satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved
individually.
b. In the spaces provided in the Bid Form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he
proposes to perform directly with his own forces.
c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials
suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of
the Proposal.
d. In the Bid Form, there has been listed the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for
which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and
approval of principal subcontractors.
14. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS
a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and
all Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception, in the spaces provided.
b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection
therewith.
15. UNIT PRICES
a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all
Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception, in the spaces provided.
b. Unit Prices shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5
16. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
a. An abbreviated "Schedule of Values" for certain trades and/or subdivisions of the work
is required as part of the Bidder's Proposal in the Bid Form.
b. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the
amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's
work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. The complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted
prior to award of Contract.
17. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS
a. Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the bidding period shall be acknowledged in the
space provided in the Bid Form.
18. SUBSTITUTIONS
a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents.
b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of
work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract,
General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing the proposed substitutions and the
amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each such proposed substitution in the
spaces provided in the Bid Form. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the
materials and items specified by name or other particular reference.
19. SUB-SURFACE CONDITIONS
a. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar
information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the
Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character
and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no
guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended.
b. Each Bidder shall, by careful examination, inform himself as to the nature and location
of the work, the conformation of the ground, subsoil and ground water conditions, the character, quality
and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed
preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other
matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. The Bidder may, at his option,
conduct tests at his expense, including borings, by prior notification to the Owner. Each Bidder shall
make his own deductions of sub-surface conditions which may affect methods or cost of construction of
the work hereunder and he agrees that, if awarded the construction contract, he will make no claim for
damages or other compensation, except such as are provided for in the Contract Documents, should he
encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or anticipated
by him.
20. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION
a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from
payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6
21. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX
a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from
payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes.
22. TAX EXEMPT STATUS
a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect
to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request
that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations.
23. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES
a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt
purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt
articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract.
24. REQUIRED SUBMISSIONS
a. Provide with Bid Proposal:
(1) Acknowledgement of Addenda and/or Bulletins issued prior to bid opening
(2) Certificate as to Corporate Bidder
(3) List of Proposed Subcontractors
(4) Abbreviated Schedule of Values
(5) Alternate Proposals and Unit Prices
(6) Completion of Milestone Schedule, if applicable
(7) Bid Security
b. Within fourteen days after bid opening:
(1) MWBE Utilization Plan
(2) Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan
(3) Contractor’s Qualification Statement, if requested
c. Execution of Contract:
(1) Insurance Certificate
(2) Performance Bond
(3) Labor and Material Payment Bond
(4) Schedule of Work (bar chart)
(5) Federal Tax Identification Number
END OF SECTION
BID FORM BF-1
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York
BID FORM
Submitted by: Date
To: Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Gentlemen:
The undersigned,
(Name of Bidder)
a
(Type of Firm, State of Incorporation, if applicable)
of
(Address)
having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General,
Division 1 - "General Requirements"), and the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents
dated April, 24, 2019 prepared by Bell & Spina Architects, 215 Wyoming Street, Syracuse, New York
13204 as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material,
equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance
necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the
following considerations:
1. BASE BID
a. All work complete, for the sum of
($ )
for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and
SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS.
BID FORM BF-2
2. ALTERNATE PROPOSAL
a. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in
place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein as associated with the Base Bid in accordance
with the following Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the
Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications.
b. If the Bidder desires to indicate that the acceptance of any Alternate or Alternates will
result in neither an addition to nor a deduction from the value of the work, he shall enter the phrase "No
Change" in response to such Alternate or Alternates.
c. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or the Owner
and Contractor may agree to all of the following Alternate Proposals within sixty (60) calendar days
following the award of a construction contract or such other time as.
Alternate No. Description
ADD DEDUCT
ONE First Floor Window Ledge Roof $ $
3. MINORITY AND WOMEN’S BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (M/WBEs)
a. The undersigned shall, if awarded the Contract, endeavor to include both Minority and
Women Owned Business Enterprises participation and to demonstrate a “good faith effort” with respect
to these requirements. Goals shall be as follows:
• A goal of 18.7% for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied
as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of
materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs.
• A goal of 3.2% for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as
follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of
materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs.
BID FORM BF-3
4. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within
ten (10) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to achieve substantial
completion of the project no later than November 29, 2019.
b. The construction schedule is critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and
equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
5. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the
following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of work stated below subject to the following provisions:
(1) The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal
Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to
whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal
subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract.
b. Bidder shall list the names of at least one subcontractor for each Section or Subdivision
of the work listed below and shall limit the listing for each such Section or Subdivision to THREE (3)
names.
c. If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of
the work listed below, he shall enter the name of his firm for each such Section or Subdivision.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
CONCRETE
MASONRY
BID FORM BF-4
STRUCTURAL STEEL
METAL RAILINGS
CARPENTRY
ROOFING
HVAC
ELECTRICAL
SITEWORK/LANDSCAPING
_______________
BID FORM BF-5
6. PRINCIPAL SUBDIVISIONS OR ELEMENTS OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED
BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FORCES
a. If awarded a Contract, we will perform the following portions of the Work with forces
directly employed by the undersigned:
b. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor’s main Project Manager will be:
(include resume with bid)
The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any to whom they have a reasonable
objection.
c. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor’s main Superintendent will be:
(include resume with bid)
The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any to whom they have a reasonable
objection.
7. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress
Schedule" showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the
Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such
schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 15, 1.3, A.
8. BONDS
a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract to
execute and deliver to the Owner "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such form
as acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. Such bonds will be
furnished by
(Name of Surety)
b. Bonding Rate for Change Orders. %
c. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of $______________________ (10% of Bid
Amount) is attached to this Bid.
BID FORM BF-6
9. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the
request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values"
including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions
of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum.
b. To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid
the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below. Values for work
included under Alternate Proposals and to General Contractor's costs for General Conditions shall be
excluded.
Spec
Section Trades and/or Subdivision Value Included in Base Bid
Division 1 General Requirements
Division 2 Existing Conditions
Division 3 Concrete
Division 4 Masonry
Division 5 Metals
Division 6 Wood, Plastics and Composites
Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection
Division 8 Openings
Division 23 HVAC
Division 26 Electrical
Division 31 Earthwork
Division 32 Exterior Improvements
Total Bid $
BID FORM BF-7
10. SUBSTITUTIONS
a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without
substitutions.
b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the
exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing in
the space below the proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if
the substitution is accepted.
c. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution.
d. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be
required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by
the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications.
Item and Specification
Description of Reference Deduction from Base Bid
Substitution Section & Page No. Labor Material
BID FORM BF-8
11. ACCEPTANCE
a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall be irrevocable until contract award,
unless the bid is withdrawn. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or
all proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding process.
b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the
undersigned within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time thereafter
before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of
such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between Contractor and
Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted.
c. The undersigned further agrees to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds pursuant to
Section 7 herein upon execution of Agreement in e-Builder.
d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the
Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract
or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor.
e. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder
submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to
perform the work.
BID FORM BF-9
12. ADDENDUM RECEIPT
a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or
Specifications is acknowledged:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
(Bidder)
By:
Title:
Business Address:
Dated:
BID FORM BF-10
CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION
By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in
the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that
to the best of his knowledge and belief:
a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,
communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such
prices with any other bidder or with any competitor.
b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been
knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening,
directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor.
c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons,
partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition.
(Bidder)
By:
Title:
Dated:
BID FORM BF-11
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER
I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the
_____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for
General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on
behalf of the bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his
signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly
signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body.
(Secretary-Clerk)
(CORPORATE SEAL)
Dated:
Rev 03.2018
G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S
FOR
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
ITHACA, NEW YORK
i Rev 03.2018
GENERAL CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Section 1.01 Owner 1
Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans
and Drawings 1
Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1
ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR
Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2
Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2
Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2
Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3
Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3
Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4
Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4
Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4
Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5
Section 2.10 Meetings 5
Section 2.11 Related Work 5
Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5
Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5
Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6
Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6
ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6
Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6
Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7
Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7
Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7
Section 3.06 Acceptance 7
ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 Changes 8
Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11
Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12
ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION
Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12
ii Rev 03.2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION
Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13
Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13
Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13
ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES
Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14
ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS
Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15
ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION
Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16
Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17
Section 10.03 Emergencies 17
Section 10.04 Bonds 17
Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18
Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18
Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20
Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20
Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21
Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21
ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER
Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21
Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21
ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT
Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22
Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23
Section 12.03 Retention 24
Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24
Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25
Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26
iii Rev 03.2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION
Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26
ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE
Section 14.01 Guarantee 27
ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS
Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27
Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27
Section 15.03 Assignments 27
Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28
Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28
Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28
Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28
ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES
Section 16.01 Definitions 28
Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women
Business Enterprises 28
Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29
Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29
ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30
ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30
ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30
ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME
Section 20.01 Release of Information 31
Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31
Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31
ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF
ETHICAL CONDUCT 32
iv Rev 03.2018
EXHIBITS
A Change Order Documentation Instructions
Construction Contract Change Order Request
Construction Contract Change Order Summary
B Final Release
C Guarantee
D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan
Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan
Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report
E Labor Rate Breakdown
F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation
G Contractor Performance Evaluation
1 Rev 03.2018
ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Section 1.01 - Owner
A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University".
B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches,
test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether
furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor
shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract.
When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University.
C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract
relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality,
acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to
said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly
provided.
D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the
Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined
by the Owner.
E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal
notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various
provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to
which they refer.
Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings
The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a
manner approved by the Owner.
Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence
A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract
Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the
better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in
writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not
mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans,
shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both.
C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the
extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with
provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern.
2 Rev 03.2018
ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR
Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations
A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required
by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all
terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of
the Owner.
1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the
local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building
Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed
by Union labor.
B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant
and such temporary Work as may be required.
C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment,
machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or
regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or
distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor
shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to
the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is
affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under
the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the
Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no
additional cost to the Owner.
Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials
A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all
materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or
encumbrances.
B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner
shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise.
Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause
A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the
plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name,
catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal"
considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements,
Section 01 25 00.
3 Rev 03.2018
B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said
proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract,
or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and
details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect.
All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary
engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the
Contractor via the Change Order procedure.
Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling
A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity
specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into
the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose.
When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall
supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material
which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or
used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.
B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require
that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials
meet said standards.
C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test
materials as provided in the Contract.
D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other
particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit
in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract
is executed.
Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor
A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent
construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full
time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor
shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing.
B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor
shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent
satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's
approval.
C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of
any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner.
4 Rev 03.2018
Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions
A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract
consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions
as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract
Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made
available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the
Owner's receipt of bids.
B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the
site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract
Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information
made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the
site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are
disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner
will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially
differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall
make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall
be issued.
Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor
The Contractor represents and warrants:
A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to
perform the Work;
B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances,
orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work;
C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely
and satisfactorily constructed.
D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work
and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the
Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be
encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the
Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work.
The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents
and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the
difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work.
Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions
A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all
dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or
conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said
conflict to the Owner.
5 Rev 03.2018
B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements
prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to
meet field conditions.
C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location
of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or
spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner.
D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of
Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and
other affected Contractors and Subcontractors.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place.
F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in
additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs.
Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors
A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, up to ten (10) sets of
Contracts Documents and one (1) set of reproducible sepias.
B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the
Contractor at the cost of reproduction and mailing.
C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the
property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of the signed
Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work.
Section 2.10 - Meetings
The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by
the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
Section 2.11 - Related Work
The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of
said work to the Work under the Contract.
Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout
Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the
Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the
Work.
Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies
The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and
report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
6 Rev 03.2018
Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days
after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the
duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be
provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during
this project.
Section 2.15 – Daily Reports
The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell
University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a
minimum, contain the following information:
Name of Project
Project Number
Date of Report
Weather Conditions
Equipment on the site
Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor
Work/area and activity for each contractor
Overtime worked and planned work progress
Environmental problems and corrections
Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or
injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and
check out, occupancy, etc.
ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
Section 3.01 - Access to the Work
The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors
shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the
Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the
Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized
representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be
required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work.
Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing
If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public
authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the
Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner
may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such
inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided.
7 Rev 03.2018
Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work
A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and
examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner
that the work will not be delayed.
B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of
manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the
inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the
Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good,
replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or
damaged by said removal or replacement.
C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be
secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner.
Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing
All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in
accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for
uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or
concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner,
be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may
order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services
required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall
be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner,
and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in
accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If
said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of
reexamination and replacement.
Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work
If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged
materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in
accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an
amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable.
Section 3.06 - Acceptance
No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor
shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting
therefrom.
8 Rev 03.2018
ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 - Changes
A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the
general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders.
B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued
after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in
the Contract price or time of performance.
C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or
an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by
the Owner.
D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to
be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods:
1. By agreement with the Contractor.
2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved.
(i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the
Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance
with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any
portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than
25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as
applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
(ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be
algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit
Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and
deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and
then multiplied by the applicable markup.
(iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit
and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit,
all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as
layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and
inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field
and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes,
temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as-
built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit.
9 Rev 03.2018
3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of:
(i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance
required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent
directly employed at the Site.
(ii) Materials
(iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the
Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly
on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is
common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid
for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental
equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to
perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs.
4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in
Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu
of estimated costs.
E. Mark-up Percentages
1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly
by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal
to fifteen percent (15%) thereof.
2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is
performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding
a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said
Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional
sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs.
3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a
Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said
costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of
the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost
and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to
five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up
percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%).
4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments
due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall
not be subject to any Markup Percentage.
5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime
pay.
10 Rev 03.2018
6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further
clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the
Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the
change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage
include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office
overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents,
general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting;
purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other
administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop
drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto
insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits;
cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and
safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small
tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by
the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment
(power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750
7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the
markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders.
In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by
applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed
in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a
change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and
deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be
applied to the net amount
F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change
order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall
submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors
details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit
A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation.
G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation
specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any
damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work
to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights
to any other compensation for said damage or expense.
H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all
items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records
relating thereto.
11 Rev 03.2018
Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work
If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that
it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner
or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall:
A. Promptly comply with such order;
B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General
Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner,
within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra
work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work,
whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or
omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its
claim and request a determination thereof;
C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the
Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said
alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced,
whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect
occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its
claim;
D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books
of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank
deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and
transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons
in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person
designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract,
such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and
E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with
respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with
all instructions of the Owner and the Architect.
F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be
deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or
omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the
Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages
as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly
afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy
the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable
and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such
provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other
circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has
indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith.
G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in
any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be
due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove
compliance with the provisions of this Section.
12 Rev 03.2018
Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders
All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder
Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a
change order has been issued and approved as noted above.
ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION
Section 5.01 - Time of Completion
A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner
and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required
overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid.
B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the
Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract.
C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full
completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the
completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average
climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site.
D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in
which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion
established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it
becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of
the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas.
E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved
schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas.
F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner
determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension
are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost
for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to:
1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government
of the United States or the State of New York;
2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence
of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited
to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics,
quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe
weather.
13 Rev 03.2018
G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be
extended for:
1. all of the Work, or
2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order.
H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more
than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived.
ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION
Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause
In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any
Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon
the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall
briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements
satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall
terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner
may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and
Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the
event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials,
appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in
completing the Work.
Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner
The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said
termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the
extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which
said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall
act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the
Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination,
but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration
of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute
same to completion.
Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work
The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by
others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or
to become due the Contractor.
14 Rev 03.2018
ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES
Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure
A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to
perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any
action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall:
1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's
claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed
within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the
disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing
performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen
(15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the
Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract.
2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with
the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the
Owner.
3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed
matter.
4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a
dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days
after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement
which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to
a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the
Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The
Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such
determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the
Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply
with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed.
B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed
unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner.
C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods
described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions.
D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed
to be:
1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that
the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and
provisions of the Contract;
2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time
extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission.
15 Rev 03.2018
ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS
Section 8.01 - Subcontracting
A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed
Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award
any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the
Owner.
C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of
Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors.
D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts
relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar
as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same
power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor.
E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's
obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and
coordinate the Work of Subcontractors.
F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between
Subcontractors and the Owner.
ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION
Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors
A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the
Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate
contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or
separate Contractors.
B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations
or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear
the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of
other contractors.
C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other
contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship
on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the
Contractor's operations.
D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of
progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of
said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work.
16 Rev 03.2018
E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site
is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the
charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other
contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any
damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply
with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in
performance.
F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work
with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed:
1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the
Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and
2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and
all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the
Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the
Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions.
G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other
contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor
of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage.
H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage
through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse
said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from
all said claims.
ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention
A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of
persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all
applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for
the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and
for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or
operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods.
B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational
disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or
in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner
in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents
that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed
Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days
of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and
their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information
required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form.
17 Rev 03.2018
C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets
(OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring
any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective
equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for
review and approval, prior to their use on site.
1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label
shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's
name.
2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the
hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in
accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's
recommendations shall be used at all times.
3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell
University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of
waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University.
4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without
waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found
at:
https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/env/solid-waste/construction-demolition-waste/Pages/default.aspx
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision
of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss
in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's
Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury
is caused directly by the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all
materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage
thereto until Final Acceptance.
Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property
A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair
or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or
subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract.
Section 10.03 - Emergencies
A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the
Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent
manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify
the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken.
18 Rev 03.2018
Section 10.04 - Bonds
A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply
the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default.
Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor
A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the
Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses,
fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the
performance of the work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease,
death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from:
1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct,
violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its
subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone
for whose acts any of them may be liable, or
2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this
section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or
benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability
benefit or other employee benefit laws.
B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to honor its indemnification
obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost,
including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification
obligations.
C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor
the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The
enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular
claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the
provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or
claims of the type enumerated.
Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance
A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final
acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance:
1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the
requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be
applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not
less than $1,000,000.
19 Rev 03.2018
2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard
comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed
operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s
issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations
under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract
and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The
Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance,
and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include
cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary
coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less
than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall
be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as
follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater:
BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM)
$ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence
$ 5,000,000 Aggregate
3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection
with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and
hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being
used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license
plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single
limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of:
BODILY INJURY AND
PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY
$ 1,000,000 Each Person
$ 1,000,000 Each Accident
B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability,
including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits
as required under this section.
C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on
behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they
apply to subcontractors.
20 Rev 03.2018
D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the
insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates.
Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and
shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall
not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued
in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the
Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the
Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance
showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities
Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including
any and all exclusions to such policy.
E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled,
terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall
so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said
work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its
option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's
expense.
Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner
A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability
insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for
damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from
operations under this Contract.
21 Rev 03.2018
Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage
Insurance Hazards
A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance
policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an
amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the
contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all
subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the
insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty
(30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at
the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary
by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site
and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may
be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered
during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all
risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University
has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate
of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to
commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of
such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell
University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders
risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the
policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work
together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under
mutually acceptable terms.
B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with
the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or
nature.
D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and
subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property
of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract
incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited
to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents,
regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and
remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or
damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors
and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and
remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive
any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction
of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature.
22 Rev 03.2018
Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance
A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the
Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or
release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the
Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks.
Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights
A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of
action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist
irrespective of the Contract.
ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER
Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion
A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent
that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion
thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy
required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other
certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other
authority having jurisdiction.
Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance
A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work,
or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment
and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere
with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner.
B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems,
materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any
guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the
Contract.
C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which
shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner.
ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT
Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment
A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance
of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means
all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents.
23 Rev 03.2018
B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been
completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications
have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made
thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the
satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract.
C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses
in accord with the following procedure:
1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the
total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as
specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule,
as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the
Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments,
the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule.
2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a
meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and
materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted
by the Contractor in the requisition for payment.
(b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the
Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a
statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost
of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including
the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment
of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate
of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price.
(c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit,
executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and
correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or
delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress
payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of
certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the E-
Builder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the
Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other
indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid,
including final waivers of any liens.
3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and
approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application
for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection
therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar
days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the
payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor.
24 Rev 03.2018
4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by
the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that
the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge,
information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.
The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement
within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder.
Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed
to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site
inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has
reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings
or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what
purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the
Contract Sum.
Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment
A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract
approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for
permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the
work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment
are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell
University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to
the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for
delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible
for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save
money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project.
B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests.
C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials
and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits
Exhibit H and complies with the following:
1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on
the Application for Payment.
2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for
Payment.
3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the
Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell
University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage.
Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity
(temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an
environment.
25 Rev 03.2018
4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and
a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the
Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary
insurance on items in storage.
5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify
such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have
been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable
to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment.
6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice.
Packing lists will not be accepted.
D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior
to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of
the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials.
The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of
the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting
materials stored off-site to the site
E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment
not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and
equipment incorporated into the Work.
F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials,
and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial
payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University,
nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University.
Section 12.03 – Retention
A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and
materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part
security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall
be paid as indicated in Section 12.06.
B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application
thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding
claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an
acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project
is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well.
26 Rev 03.2018
Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments
A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or
nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the
Owner from loss on account of:
1. Defective work not remedied.
2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or
materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's
property.
3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of
the Contract Price then unpaid.
4. Damage to another Contractor.
5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor.
6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method
Network Schedule.
Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment
A. As-Built Documentation
1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current
reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded
in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction
differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. Final Documentation:
1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in
accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following
documents with the Owner.
a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other
extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications.
b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in
accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto.
c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section
01 78 39.
d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed.
e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General
Requirements Section 01 78 23.
27 Rev 03.2018
f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section
01 78 22.
2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or
Word Documents of all documentation.
Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release
A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is
substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to
be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed
list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements.
The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect.
B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect,
on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will
then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion.
C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the
work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed,
and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance
due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the
Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub-
subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the
best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and
inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable.
D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being
estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate.
E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a
general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the
Contractor.
ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION
Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption
A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including
sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed
Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools,
machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to
supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the
completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and
all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery,
equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials.
28 Rev 03.2018
B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or
other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said
certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation.
ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE
Section 14.01 - Guarantee
A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or
repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or
characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or
within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such
guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract,
and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such
defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be
damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance
of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding
B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various
components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit
a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon
completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on
the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E".
ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS
Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted
Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract
and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision
is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract
shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.
Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract
The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to
conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be
maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for
the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such
purposes.
Section 15.03 - Assignments
The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written
consent of the Owner.
29 Rev 03.2018
Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights
Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action
against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract.
Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner
A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner
except when such waiver is given in writing.
Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions
No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against
the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner
of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action
is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination.
Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative
The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with
respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render
approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress
of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative
(Jason Cragle) shall be recognized by the Contractor.
ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES
Section 16.01 – Definitions
The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business
enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section
310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended.
Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises
A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the
Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the
implementation of MBE and WBE goals. These requirements include equal employment
opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for
certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s
demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall
be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New
York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws.
B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every
Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon
each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement.
30 Rev 03.2018
C. For purposes of this procurement, the Owner has established goals as outlined in
the Bid Form for Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (“MBE”) and Women-Owned Business
Enterprises (“WBE”) participation.
1. The goal for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be
applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be
applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs.
2. The goal for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be
applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be
applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs.
D. For purposes of providing meaningful participation by MWBEs on the Contract
and achieving the Contract Goals established in paragraph C above, the Contractor should reference
the Directory of New York State Certified MWBEs found at the following internet address:
http://www.esd.ny.gov/mwbe.html.
E. Where MWBE goals have been established herein, the Contractor must document
“good faith efforts” to provide meaningful participation by MWBEs as sub-contractors or suppliers
in the performance of the Contract.
F. Where it appears that a Contractor is unable to comply with the MWBE
participation requirements, Contractor may submit in writing for the Owner’s consideration, the
reasons for Contractor’s inability to meet any or all of the participation requirements together with
an explanation of the efforts taken by the Contractor to obtain the stated MWBE participation.
Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan
A. The Contractor shall submit a MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the Owner’s review
prior within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed.
B. The Contractor shall use such Owner approved MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the
performance of MWBEs on the Contract pursuant to the prescribed MWBE goals established in
Article 16 hereof. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who
shall be responsible for implementing the MBE/WBE Utilization Plan of the Contractor and its
subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly,
reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These
reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce
Report attached hereto as Exhibit "D".
Section 16.04 Reports and Records
A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the
Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Plans. Electronic
versions are available in the E-Builder Resources Project or at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-
contractors-and-consultants.
1. MWBE Utilization Plan
2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report
31 Rev 03.2018
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of
the Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The
Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the
project labor and such report must document the progress made towards achievement of the MWBE
goals of the Contract. Such forms shall be uploaded monthly to E-Builder.
C. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the Owner
for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this Article. The
Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision will be binding
upon each subcontractor.
ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT
The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the
Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files
used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit
by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office
or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven
years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started
before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation,
claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be
similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting
the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all
subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project.
ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor
their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may
schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration.
The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”,
Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the
evaluation after completion by the Owner.
ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims
for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account
thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to
believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be
responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell
University.
32 Rev 03.2018
ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME
Section 20.01 - Release of Information
The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news
releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone
without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the
extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar
agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the
foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its
release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval
to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager.
Section 20.02 - Confidential Information
The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or
received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell
University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not
disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the
extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and
until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold
all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use
confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its
subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to
comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor,
requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend
in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell
University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made.
This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2)
is learned by the Contractor from third parties.
Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name
The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media,
or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the
specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative.
33 Rev 03.2018
ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT
Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student
employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of
ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of
which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes
treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with
or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and
firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not
personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or
gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items
not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature,
and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that
the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within
the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and
professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate
university personnel. You may file a report to on the web
https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell
University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077.
EXHIBIT "A"
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Construction Contract Change Order Forms
Instructions to Change Order Documentation
Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have
been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard
Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to
facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract
requirements.
These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective
cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and
shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request.
Direct Cost of the Work:
1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary
to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in
accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned
Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by
name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc.
Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory
personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried
personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor
2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to
perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic
yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc.
3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the
change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental
rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed.
Bond Premiums
The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as stated on their Bid Form at time
of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change.
Overhead & Profit
The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of
the proposed change in accordance with the Contract.
EXHIBIT "A"
EXHIBIT "A"
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
DATE:
PCO #
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 DIRECT COST OF WORK:
NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TO TAL
PERFORMING WORK COST
TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0
TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B"
FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS
Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name
Day of 20 By:
Title:
Date Contract Date
Project Contract Price
Address Net Extras and Deductions
City Adjusted Contract Price
County Amount Previously Paid
State Balance Due - Final Payment
The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor,
materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project
in accordance with the Contract.
In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $
being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release
the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon
improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the
Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor,
services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project.
The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows:
.
The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute
this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has
properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a
good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services
that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks,
expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the
date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or
incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and
supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice.
The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses
(including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the
below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors.
In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier
hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever
arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto.
The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed
are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect
for the period specified in said Contract.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "C"
GUARANTEE
Date:
In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell
University dated , we hereby guarantee
the as found in the specifications
for , Ithaca, New York to be free
(Project Title)
from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from
, the date of acceptance by the Owner.
(Date)
(COMPANY)
By:
Title:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
1
MWBE Utilization Plan
– Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed –
– Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project –
PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION
e-Builder Project No.
Project Name:
Contract Value:
Contractor Name and Address:
Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date:
% Goals MBE: 18.7% WBE: 3.2% Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email:
PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit)
Subcontractor Name, Address,
Contact, Email, MBE or WBE
(List your firm if also MBE or WBE)
Federal ID
Number
Dollar Value of
Contract or
Purchase Order
Description of Work or
Supplies
Subcontractor or
Supplier Start and
End Dates
(Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list)
Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title:
Signature: Date:
MWBE Contract
Percentages Summary
%
MBE Totals
WBE Totals
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
2
MWBE Utilization Plan
– Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed –
– Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project –
PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to
General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit.
Month/Year:
General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub-
Subcontractor, or Vendor Trade
Dollar Value of
SubContract or
Purchase Order
MBE,
WBE, or
N/A
% of Total
Contract
TOTALS 0 0
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II
SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE
SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS
Please print or type all information,
except where a signature is required.
PROJECT:
Name of Prime Contract Bidder:
Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number):
MBE and WBE
Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of
(Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination
EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc.
(Use additional sheet if necessary)
OFFICER OF FIRM:
Name and Title: Date:
Signature:
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III
EXHIBIT "E"
LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:TRADE:
EFFECTIVE DATE:
EXPIRATION DATE:
Base Hourly Rate:$
Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour
F.I.C.A.
Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
*Worker's Compensation
*Bodity Injury & Property Damage
Disability
TOTAL %
Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % =$
*
Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour
Vacation
Health & Welfare
Pension
Annuity
Education / Training
Industry
Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $
Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $
Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices:$
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
Signature of Authorized Representative:
Print Name:
Print Title:
I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance
with actual and true cost incurred.
Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience
modifications have been applied against manual rate.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "F”
STORED MATERIALS INVOICING
DOCUMENTATION
PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:SUBCONTRACTOR:
REASON FOR REQUEST:
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________DATE:
1 Material Identification
Description:
Quantity:
Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored:
2 Material Value
Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value.$
3 Certificate of Insurance
Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name
"Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials.
4 Transfer of Title
The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the
time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains
responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and
providing of all warranties.
Signed:
Date:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "G"
Contractor Performance
Evaluation
Project Information
Project Name:____________________________________________Date Of Evaluation___________________
Project Number___________________________Evaluators;
Project Team_____________________________
Campus_________________________________
Project Start Date_________________________Substantial Completion________________
Contractor______________________________________________Prequalification Status_________________
Original Contract Amount__________________________________Total Change Order Amount_____________
Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________Initial Evaluation_____
Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________Final Evaluation_____
Type Of Contract
Prime Contractor___Subcontractor___Construction Manager___
Project Comments/Description
Performance Evaluation
Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating.
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully Achieve Freq Exceeds Cons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
1 Quality of Workmanship
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work
a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications
b. Workmanship quality and accuracy
c. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity
d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition
e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel
Comments:
2 Scheduling/Productivity
Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and
meeting contract schedules and milestones
a. Project schedule quality and completeness
b. Controlling of project schedule
c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule
d. Material deliveries to support project schedule
e. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones
f. Productivity of work force
g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues.
Comments:
3 Subcontractor Management
Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating
subcontractors (if no subcontractors rate overall management performance)
Comments:
3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation
For contractor information only
a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully Achieve Freq Exceeds Cons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
4 MBE/WBE Participation
Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this
project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors
Comments:
5 Safety
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safety
a. Timely submission of site specific safety program
b. Knowledge of OSHA standards
c. Implementation of safety rules and regulations
d. Promotion and creation of safety awareness
e. Daily overall housekeeping
f. Safety record
g. Response to safety concerns
h. Awareness of public safety
Comments:
6 Contract Administration
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract
administration as per criteria below
a. Timely submission of complet and correct
documentation required for insurance and bond
b. Change order processing
c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings,
and change orders
d. Subcontractor payments made promptly
e. Timely submission of complete and correct payment
applications
f. Quality of paperwork
Comments:
7 Working Relationships
Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties
(Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.)
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully Achieve Freq Exceeds Cons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
8 Supervisory Personnel Rating
Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory
personnel and project management staff
Comments:
9 Contract Close-Out
Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project
a. Timely completion of all punchlist items
b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders
c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's,
As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety)
d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion
of any outstanding audit questions
Comments:
Summary Sheet
Project:___________________________________________
Contractor:________________________________________
Rating Per Weight
Performance Categories Category %Scoring
1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00%0
2 Scheduling 0 10.00%0
3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00%0
4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00%0
5 Safety 0 10.00%0
6 Contract Administration 0 10.00%0
7 Working Relationships 0 10.00%0
8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00%0
9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00%0
Over All Rating 0
Rating Reference
Fails to achieve expectation 1
Needs improvement 2
Fully achieves expectation 3
Frequently exceeds expectation 4
Consistently exceeds expectatio 5
OWNER COMMENTS:
OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings:
CONTRACTOR COMMENTS:
(To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APRIL 24, 2019
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
ITHACA, NEW YORK
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 TERRACE RENEWAL WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS ..................2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1
1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ..............................................................1
1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ..............................................................................2
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ..........................................................................2
1.5 PARKING ..........................................................................................................2
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................3
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION ............................4
1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS...................................................................4
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ........................5
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. ...................................5
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................6
1.12 WORKING HOURS ..........................................................................................7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................7
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES ....................................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS............................................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................1
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES ......................................................................1
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................2
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST .............................................................................................2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2
1.6 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................3
1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL ........................................................3
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS ............................................................................4
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS .............................................................................................6
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ..........................................................................7
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ..........................................................8
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................8
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................8
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................8
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ......................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .................................................................1
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................3
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) ......................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1
1.4 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................1
1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2
1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......................................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................1
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ...........................................................................1
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................2
1.5 SUBMISSIONS .................................................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ..........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3
3.1 DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................3
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ........................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
2.0 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................1
3.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1
4.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................1
4.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS ....................................................1
4.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .........................................................................1
4.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................1
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE.................................................1
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ...........................................................................................3
1.4 PRODUCT DATA .............................................................................................3
1.5 SAMPLES..........................................................................................................4
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS.......5
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................6
1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................9
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................10
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS ...............................................................................12
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................12
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES .................................................................................12
1.13 DISTRIBUT ION..............................................................................................13
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................................................................................13
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .....................................................................................13
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY ....................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ....................................1
1.3 AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS .......................................................................2
1.4 ASBESTOS........................................................................................................3
1.5 LEAD .................................................................................................................3
1.6 SITE VISITS ......................................................................................................3
1.7 CONFINED SPACE ..........................................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1
1.3 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................1
1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE .....................................2
1.6 SPOIL AND BORROW ....................................................................................2
1.7 NOISE AND VIBRATION ...............................................................................2
1.8 DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................2
1.9 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .....................................................3
1.10 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK ....................4
1.11 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS .......................................................4
1.12 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ........................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ..............................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................1
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES ..................................................................1
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES .............................................................................1
1.2 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1
1.3 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................1
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................1
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................2
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................2
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................4
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ..............................................................................4
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ..........................................................5
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................17
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................17
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................1
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS.......................................................2
1.4 TESTING ...........................................................................................................3
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3
SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ..........................................1
4.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
4.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
4.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY ........................................................1
4.3 LABORATORY DUTIES .................................................................................2
4.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY ...............3
4.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES .........................................................3
5.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
6.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND
PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................1
1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2
1.5 PAYMENT ........................................................................................................2
1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES .........................................................................2
1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................2
1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY ...............................................................................3
2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING ................................................................................3
2.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ........................................................................3
2.2 CONCRETE REPAIRS ..................................................................................5
2.3 FRP COMPOSITE REINFORCING ............................................................5
2.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL ..................................................................................7
SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR BUILDING STRUCTURES 10
3.0 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................19
3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS ...........................................................................19
4.0 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................19
4.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS ...........................................................................19
4.2 COMMUNICATION .......................................................................................20
4.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS .....................................................................21
4.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS............................................21
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ...........................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES.........................................................1
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ...............................................................1
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................3
2.5 SUPPORTS ........................................................................................................3
2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ........................................................................4
2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL ................................................................5
2.8 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION ..................................................5
2.9 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ..........................8
2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ...................................................8
2.11 FIELD OFFICES ...............................................................................................8
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................8
3.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................8
3.2 GENERAL .........................................................................................................9
3.3 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................9
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ...............................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ..........................1
2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ..................................................2
2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................2
2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .......................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3
3.1 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................3
SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION .................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 RESPONSIBILITY............................................................................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................1
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 57 13 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL .............................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1
1.3 PLAN AND IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...............1
1.4 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS .....................................................................1
1.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN COMPONENTS ................2
1.6 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ......................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ........................................................1
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE.........................................................................................1
1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE .................................................................................2
1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................3
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .......................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING .....................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 QUALIFICATION OF SURVEYOR ................................................................1
1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS .....................................................................1
1.4 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................2
1.5 RECORDS .........................................................................................................2
1.6 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING ...................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2
1.4 WARRANTIES .................................................................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................4
2.1 MATERIALS .....................................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4
3.1 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................4
3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................................................5
3.3 PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................5
3.4 CLEANING .......................................................................................................7
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .....................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ...........................................................................................3
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................3
1.5 ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION TRAILER REMOVAL .....................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................................1
1.2 ROOF SYSTEM INVENTORY ........................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................1
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................2
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES .............................................3
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ............................................4
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................6
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ..............................................6
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................7
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ...........................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2
1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................2
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................3
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED .............................................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................4
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS .................................................................................5
3.3 ROOF WARRANTY PACKAGE .....................................................................5
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS...................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES..................................1
1.3 RECORDING ....................................................................................................1
1.4 SUBMITTAL .....................................................................................................6
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................6
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................6
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00
Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
OLIN LIBRARY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work to be Done
1. Replacement of the terrace level roof and walkway pavers.
2. Removal of asbestos containing material.
3. Replacement of the stairs and railings leading down to Ho Plaza from terrace level
roof.
4. Installation of new guard rails along the terrace level roof.
5. Masonry wall repairs and replacement.
6. Exhaust fan replacement on terrace level roof.
7. Lighting replacement on terrace level roof.
8. Lightning protection on terrace level roof.
B. The Scope of the Work
1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the
furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the
Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining
all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning
entity.
2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but
which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be
included.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00
Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
OLIN LIBRARY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each
item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install
materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions
of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the
work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus,
machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter
specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any
portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the
requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished
without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity,
highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or
Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each
other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or
materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract.
1.2 TERRACE RENEWAL WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including
providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract
work with work performed under others contracts.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 11 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division
1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR
Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws
and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption
to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times.
C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic
will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio
communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane
of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the
Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges.
D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area.
E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that
construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required.
F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways,
roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to
all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the
movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials
and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or
approved by the Owner’s Representative.
G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to
roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on
permanent roadways due to the Work.
H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the
Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other
than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and
removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the
Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the
normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces.
J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize
damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel
lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site,
including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their
original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration
and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work.
K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed
by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval
of the Owner's Representative.
L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the
duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and
maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with
Transportation Services.
1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES
A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their
internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to
whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should
make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns,
emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal
operating standards.
B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take
advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to
become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the
following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised
that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There
will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need
to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist.
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION
A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the
time of construction.
1.5 PARKING
A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade
persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The
Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The
Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Jason Cragle) for additional information.
The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each
permit requested. This form may be found at
http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm.
C. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having
jurisdiction, as follows:
1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers,
and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated
parking area.
2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc.
3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the
construction site.
D. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers,
rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the
Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property
and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event
of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the
Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore.
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect
the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere
with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding.
B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building
services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased.
C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the
Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working
hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses.
D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities
or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative.
E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the
express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside
contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable
Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting
life safety or which are outside the project site limits.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more
than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all
buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety
(EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department.
G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests
shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative.
H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS
NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY.
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION
A. General
1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and
verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS.
2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes
in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment
locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain
approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and
interferences encountered.
3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit
drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes.
4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building
equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be
installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and
alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a
requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical
nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of
conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as
indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of
exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have
been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect.
B. Interference
1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with
removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and
safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent
attention.
1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS
A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of
construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design
equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs
in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions:
1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing
maintenance and service space required.
2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all
trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no
increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves,
fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised
layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections
by other trades.
3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss,
possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for
removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to
Contract Drawings and Specifications.
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC.
A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit
complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and
salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does
not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed.
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC.
A. Before Submitting Proposal
1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine
scope and relation to other work.
2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by
visiting site and/or building.
3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area
1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building.
2. Inspect all adjacent work.
C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement
1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying
Drawings.
2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged
misunderstanding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. Existing or Archived Drawings
1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format
only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be
considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The
Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing
current conditions.
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES
A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the
following dates and hours is required.
1. Stand-Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site):
a. Commencement Weekend
Saturday, May 25, 2019
Sunday, May 26, 2019
b. Reunion Weekend
Saturday, June 8, 2019
Sunday, June 9, 2019
2. Restricted Work Dates (delivery & demolition restrictions but otherwise work as
usual):
Friday, May 24, 2019 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work
outside fence stop at noon
Thursday, Friday June 6 - 7, 2019 Reunion guest arrivals- no work outside fence; no
demo or utility work inside fence
Friday, June 7, 2019 Reunion weekend- deliveries and work outside
fence stop at noon
3. Student and Campus Life
Residence Halls Open
August 23, 2019
No deliveries, no hauling materials into or out of the project site.
All work to be contained to the fenced area of the project site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00
Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-7
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.12 WORKING HOURS
A. Normal work hours are 7AM-3:30PM Monday-Friday except during above noted
restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that
could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any
conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed
request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue
a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be
granted.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 14 00**
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 23 00
Ithaca, New York ALTERNATES
OLIN LIBRARY ALTERNATES 01 23 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This Section describes the changes to be made under each Alternative.
B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods to
achieve the Work described herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for
certain items that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner
decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be
completed, or in the product, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents. Alternates shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses,
including bond costs, in connection therewith.
B. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to
ensure that Work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the
Project.
C. Notification: Immediately following Contract award, prepare and distribute to each party
involved, notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been
accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description
of negotiated modifications to alternates.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Include as part
of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items incidental to or
required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. ALTERNATE NO. 1 – First Floor Window Ledge Roof
Replace roof area at first floor window ledge. Refer to Drawing A-302, Detail 6 and Drawing
A-505, Details 2 and 3.
***END OF SECTION 01 23 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and
conditions for substitutions stated in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as
unavailability of product, or regulatory changes.
a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not
constitute unavailability of product.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project
or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items
that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered
new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make
or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request
Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation
method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles.
1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on
the Bid Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in
base bid
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a
complete list of products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number.
C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
1. Name and address of the manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even
if previously selected products were also options.
1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible
with other products and construction methods.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted
substitutions and approved comparable products.
1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL
A. Equivalents or Approvals - General
1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of
similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean
similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A
and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word
“products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”,
“equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more
products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted.
2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the
name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent
is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has
determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any
product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is
approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B
of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a
proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving,
at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed
product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the
Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper
that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved.
3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or
implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product
similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make
no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of
a product similar and equal to any named product.
4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages
by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect
to approve a product proposed by the Contractor.
5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only
from the Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding
1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after
bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the
Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer
and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the
proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot
obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of
the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of
the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner,
e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated
cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner
determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary
purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction
of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed
equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than
ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract.
2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product
proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign
of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all
new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the
Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product
proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity
and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work
from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall
provide the same at its own cost and expense.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard,
by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of
products and manufacturers named.
1. Products:
a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or
subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the
following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products,
provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable
products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include
paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase
“include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both
available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an
unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements
in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or
subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products
by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include
paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the
phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of
available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or
a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply
with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an
unnamed manufacturer's product.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named.
a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs
or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other
manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable
product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with
requirements.
- Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include
paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include
a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or
a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements.
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of
an unnamed manufacturer's product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or
equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or
manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Form as
required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no
substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Form as provided in the Instructions
to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will
be at the sole discretion of the Owner.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need
for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of
related submittals.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of
contract award.
C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with:
1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a
product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be
formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿
is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in
detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and
Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not
result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with
requirements stated in Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature; identify:
- Product description.
- Reference standards.
- Performance and test data.
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the
date of each installation.
3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing
any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-7
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project.
6. List any changes required in other work or projects.
7. Designate any required license fees or royalties.
8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials.
D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum.
E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a
formal request from the Contractor.
2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner.
G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed
substitution.
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will
be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record
noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by
name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an
unnamed product or manufacturer:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in
the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight,
size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product
specified.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses
and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
OLIN LIBRARY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-8
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that:
1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the
Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions,
quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be
installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product
Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents.
The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined
that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the
product specified.
4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the
Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in
all respects.
5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
may subsequently become apparent.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the
Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 25 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19
Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress
meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting.
a. To all participants in the meeting.
b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative(s)
2. Contractor(s)
3. Architect and its professional consultants
4. Major Subcontractors
5. Major suppliers
6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19
Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
2. Critical work sequencing
a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
4. Project Coordination
a. Designation of responsible personnel
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
f. Requests for Information
g. Daily Reports
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas
b. Owner's requirements
c. Job site personnel conduct
d. Building access and security
9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids
10. Temporary utilities
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19
Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
11. Safety and first-aid procedures
a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan
12. Security procedures
13. Housekeeping procedures
14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks
throughout the Construction period.
B. Attendance:
1. Architect
2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed
3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent
4. Owner's Representatives
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
7. Safety Representative
C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting
2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades
3. Review of work progress since previous meeting
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts
5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule
6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule
8. Revisions to Construction Schedule
9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period
10. Coordination of schedules
11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19
Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
12. Maintenance of quality standards
13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project
15. Other business
D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its
representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)
A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification
sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or
their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing &
inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would
include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control,
etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well
as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting.
B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of
issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 19***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50
Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-1
TERRACE RENEWAL (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project
Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project.
1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and
organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the
entire project team for the period of its use on the Project.
B. There are no fees to utilize this system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation.
B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that
allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All
project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored
and routed within the ePM system.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the
e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence
should be communicated through the e-PM system.
B. Training
1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the
system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or
otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time
and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s
proposal
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50
Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-2
TERRACE RENEWAL (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 24, 2019
C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal
computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM
Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to
provide the following equipment and software:
1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/down loading capability
2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production
3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and
quickly
4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera
5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software
D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to
be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and
other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s,
action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals,
submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and pre-
construction surveys.
1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW
A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate
with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within
the ePM system.
B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact
information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are
engaged on this project.
C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM
Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s
exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect.
Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and
the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI
electronically.
D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the
system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner.
E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall
be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked
to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond,
time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor
recommends.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50
Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-3
TERRACE RENEWAL (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 24, 2019
F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM
Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign
download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted
to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited.
G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00.
H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis.
I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports
required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to,
daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and
accident reports.
J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system,
field by date and type including but not limited to:
1. General Progress Photographs
2. RFI Issues
3. Non-Conforming Work
4. Special Events
5. As required by individual Specification Sections
K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the
project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in
both native and PDF formats.
L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits
and agency approvals that relate to the project.
M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other
stakeholders within the project team.
N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items
in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective
actions in the system.
O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM
system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and
logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and
manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders.
P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices
for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices
should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system.
Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown
structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50
Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-4
TERRACE RENEWAL (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 24, 2019
1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as
required to suit the project.
B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall
administrate and distribute all information contained therein.
C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on
the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation
in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 50***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16
Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
OLIN LIBRARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare
and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work,
with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work.
B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the
project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed.
C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner.
D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of
Values.
E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to
the submitted schedules.
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar
chart.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation.
2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions.
B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers.
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of
construction. Specifically list:
a. Site clearing
b. Site utilities
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16
Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
OLIN LIBRARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
c. Foundation work
d. Structural framing
e. Subcontractor work
f. Equipment installations
g. Finishes
h. Pre-Installation meetings
3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of
each month.
4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be
completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials
abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified.
B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the
Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be
based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is
ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to
review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays
in processing. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect.
3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to
the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the
Project's construction schedule.
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16
Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
OLIN LIBRARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after
award of Contract.
1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after
receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment.
C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement
of work.
D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Owner Job Site personnel
2. Subcontractors
3. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the
projections of the schedule.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33
Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
OLIN LIBRARY PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of
Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final
photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building.
2.0 SUBMITTALS
A. Progress Submittals
1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points
marked for location and direction of each photograph.
2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder
within five (5) days of taking photographs.
3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the
view.
3.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
4.0 EXECUTION
4.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and
surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction.
4.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work.
B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review.
C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any
infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key
Plan.
4.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work,
for submission as project record documents.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 33***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the
following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals
5. Coordination Drawings
6. Certification of Asbestos free products
7. Owner audio/visual
8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment
B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates
for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be
needed.
C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the
Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved
with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the
electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file
format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non-
electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic
management system as directed by a Cornell representative.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE
A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder
importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in
native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of
the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed
necessary by the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications,
listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the
Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and
other related documents.
C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information:
1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review)
2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor
review)
3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review)
4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual,
Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for
Contractor review)
5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the
submittal (by Architect for Contractor review)
6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional)
7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required)
9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required)
10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required)
12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required)
D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the
contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal
Procedures and Architect’s Duties below.
E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the
electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the
requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission
duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described
in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after
the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these
submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all
submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described
in section 01 32 16.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all
submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting
required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until
the required schedule or submittals are received.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled
draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop
Drawings.
3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop
Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,
patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements.
6. Submittal:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the
electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned
electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and
instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and
equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01
35 29.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will
result in rejection of the submission.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate
or mark through information that does not apply.
6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the
Work.
7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options
by Architect is required.
8. Submittals:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the
electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned
electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”.
1.5 SAMPLES
A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers
of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment
devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
C. Field samples and mock-ups:
1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect.
2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect.
5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original
condition.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with
material or product proposed.
1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer.
3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture.
4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in
material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show
approximate limits of variations.
5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted
for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range
of standard choices.
6. Submittals:
a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1)
set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project
Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for
electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the
submittal item electronically via the electronic project management.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports,
certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports.
B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require
professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause
such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose
registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop
Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to
rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals
performed by such design professionals.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from
independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or
installation of system or product.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by
manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or
instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
F. Submittals:
1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the
electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically
marked with action taken.
2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”.
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated
layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas;
drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but
not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler
system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show
mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to
scale. Provide electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF
formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices,
mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of
coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated
installation of work within the space available.
B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to
commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item.
C. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and
equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both
plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping
including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items
contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural
and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing
submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to,
corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other
areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete,
coordinated installation of work within the space available.
1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with
services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling
construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work
coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings.
2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings
where required to adequately represent the Work.
3. Include room names and numbers of each space.
4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by
multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information
and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-7
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit
signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural
Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and
Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the
Work in accordance with the design intent.
6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance
accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work.
7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all
mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed as
tight to underside of structure as possible.
8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural,
mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems,
security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions,
to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions,
services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of
materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to resolve
conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work.
Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s)
affected by the adjustments.
9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement
of components during the life of the installation.
10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to
concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.
11. Indicate required installation sequences.
12. Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically
note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted
equipment and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor
dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the
Contract.
13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted
devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers.
15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems,
mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment,
and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout
of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures
and other components and notify Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-8
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fully-
dimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment
requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other
services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other
items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor.
17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and
electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-
protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms.
Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for
access and maintenance.
18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings
required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where
Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and
structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling
heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by
Architect for structural penetrations.
19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom
elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing,
flanges, accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such
as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution
equipment.
20. Electrical Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical
and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture,
exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device
locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way,
generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of pull boxes and
junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems.
Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions,
clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable
trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines,
pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for
Work in those Sections.
23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall
sign and date coordination drawings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-9
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being
prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so
inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of
coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final
coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with
existing conditions and each portion of the Work.
D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any
given area of the building.
1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to
transmitting to the Architect.
B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor
variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and
Product Options.
C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and
verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and
coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact
Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and
approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened
with all costs to remediate the situation.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Compliance with the Contract Documents
2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades.
5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule.
7. All other provisions of the agreements.
E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an
authorization for additional work or additional cost.
F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change
in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work.
G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval
of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-10
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor
finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled.
J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such
submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of
inadvertent review of unspecified submittals.
K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper
construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not
be indicated on the review shop drawings.
L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section
01 35 39
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with
the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed
to by all entities involved.
4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of
performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of
each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods
required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with
subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is
determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow
ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the
Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work,
and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened.
An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2,
3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware
Schedules.
6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review.
7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal.
8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare
submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-11
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in
processing by the Architect.
10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals
Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work
thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense.
B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's
stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification
of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the
information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract
Documents.
4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful
description.
5. Include the following information on submittal documentation:
a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as
appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product.
b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps
f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract
Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.
6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on
previous submittals.
7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must
specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor.
C. Submittal Transmittal:
1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless
otherwise noted or directed.
2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package
sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-12
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual.
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this
Section.
B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following:
1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been
found and Work may proceed.
2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which
have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly.
3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including
purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare
new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if
necessary to obtain different action mark.
4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing,
fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new
submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if
necessary to obtain different action mark.
5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor
should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to
revise and resubmit.
6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error,
duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need
to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-13
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including
Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect.
a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action.
b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with
Contract Documents.
C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action.
D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action.
E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
1.13 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the
electronic project management system to:
1. Job site file
2. Record Documents file
3. Subcontractors
4. Installers
5. Suppliers
6. Manufacturers
7. Fabricators
8. Architect
9. Owner
B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with
construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 33 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29
Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 4, 2019
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The
requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors
involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local,
state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the
requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in
no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such
requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN
A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell
University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should
address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope
of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template
below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at:
https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/osh/occupational-safety/contractor-safety/Pages/default.aspx
1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples
demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific
information, controls and requirements.
2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be
returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay
of project and/or denial of the payment.
3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment.
B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement
of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must
submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP
template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining
phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or
milestone.
1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with
the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety
and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract
College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29
Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 4, 2019
C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are
required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is
responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work.
D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained
throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements
not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP.
E. Definitions:
1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the
contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for
University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive
of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General
Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply.
2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
• The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an
installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code).
• The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the
administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building
Code-§202.2).
3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell
University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be
contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu
4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert.
1.3 AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS
A. The preferred method for Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs) boom storage is fully
retracted and fully lowered to the ground.
B. In some circumstances booms may need to be stored in the air because of vandalism
concerns, minimal size of storage location, etc.
1. If this is case, the area under the elevated boom must be blocked or arranged
such that prevents people from walking, standing, working or parking vehicles
underneath.
2. When booms are stored in the air consult the extended weather forecast. Booms
should not be stored in the air during predicted high winds, or severe storms.
AWPs become unstable at winds or gusts greater than 25 mph and must be fully
lowered to prevent a tip-over.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29
Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 4, 2019
1.4 ASBESTOS
A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos.
At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed
certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are
100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material
Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University
may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed
product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall
be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions.
B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken
within the building.
C. Removal and disposal of asbestos containing material shall be performed by the Contractor
in accordance with Division 2 specifications.
1.5 LEAD
A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance
with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the
presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the
Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is
site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA
standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address
the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants
and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based
paint.
1.6 SITE VISITS
A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be
construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of
any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them
responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access,
visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person.
1.7 CONFINED SPACE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance
with OSHA requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29
Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
95 Perry Street, Suite 300
Buffalo, New York 14203
p: 716.206.5100
f: 716.206.5199
w: www.watts-ae.com
a r c h i t e c t u r e |e n g i n e e r i n g |e n v i r o n m e n t a l
Excellence in all we do.
May 17, 2018
Mr. Dale Houseknecht
Asbestos Project Coordinator
Project Services Group
Cornell University
119A Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, New York 14853
RE:RE:RE:RE: Olin LibraryOlin LibraryOlin LibraryOlin Library –––– Facility Code Facility Code Facility Code Facility Code 2047204720472047
Terrace RenewalTerrace RenewalTerrace RenewalTerrace Renewal ProjectProjectProjectProject
Work Order Work Order Work Order Work Order 10780025107800251078002510780025
Targeted Targeted Targeted Targeted Asbestos Asbestos Asbestos Asbestos Testing Testing Testing Testing Letter ReportLetter ReportLetter ReportLetter Report
Dear Mr. Houseknecht:
Watts Architecture & Engineering (Watts) was retained by Cornell University Facilities Management to perform
testing for asbestos-containing materials (ACM) that may be disturbed as part of the Olin Library Terrace
Renewal project at Olin Library and the stairs to Ho Plaza located at 161 Ho Plaza on the Cornell University
campus in Ithaca, New York. The project will include replacement of the low roof on the Olin Library terrace;
repairs to the stars to Ho Plaza; and renovations to guard rails; possible repairs to retaining walls; and light
posts on the terrace.
This letter report contains Watts’ observations and the results of analytical testing of bulk samples collected by
Watts’ personnel. The field work was conducted on May 11, 2018. The field work included the following:
• A visual site inspection to identify suspect ACM within project limits.
• Collection and laboratory analysis for asbestos content of samples from identified suspect materials.
• Documentation of sample locations on a sample location drawing and a chain-of-custody form; and
• Photographs.
ASBESTOSASBESTOSASBESTOSASBESTOS----CONTAINING MATERIALSCONTAINING MATERIALSCONTAINING MATERIALSCONTAINING MATERIALS
The inspection included the collection of thirty-seven (37) bulk samples to represent homogeneous materials
identified as suspect asbestos-containing material (ACM). ACM is defined as any material containing more
than one percent (1%) of asbestos.
Based on the laboratory analysis and visual observations, the following ACM has been identified that will be
disturbed by the Olin Library Terrace Renewal project:
• Exterior Exterior Exterior Exterior door door door door frame frame frame frame caulkcaulkcaulkcaulk, Olin Library second floor northwest e, Olin Library second floor northwest e, Olin Library second floor northwest e, Olin Library second floor northwest elevationlevationlevationlevation.... The caulk was observed at
the perimeter of the northwest door leading to the plaza as a bead approximately 1/8” wide. The
door frame was approximately seven feet long, with a perimeter approximately 168” with 0.15 square
foot of caulk. The caulk was considered to be non-friable and observed to be in fair condition.
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 2 of 11
• ExteriorExteriorExteriorExterior ccccaulk aulk aulk aulk along the perimeter of exterior metal palong the perimeter of exterior metal palong the perimeter of exterior metal palong the perimeter of exterior metal panels anels anels anels on the Olin Library second fon the Olin Library second fon the Olin Library second fon the Olin Library second floorloorloorloor.... The caulk
was observed around the perimeter of each metal panel above the gravel terrace level. The caulk
was a bead approximately 1/8” wide. Each panel was approximately seven feet long with the caulk
on the edges with approximately 168” (0.15 square foot) of caulk per panel. There are approximately
30 panels on the second floor level (11 panels on the north and south elevations and four panels on
the west and east elevations) with a total of approximately 4.5 square feet of caulk on the exterior.
The exterior caulk around the second floor panels was considered to be non-friable and was observed
to be in fair condition.
NONNONNONNON----ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALSASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALSASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALSASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
The following materials that may be disturbed by the Olin Library Terrace Renewal project, steps to Ho Plaza
and observed on the Olin Library exterior were sampled by Watts’ personnel and were determined to be non-
ACM:
• Plaza level white membrane beneath gravel ballast and on 2.5” of foam insulation.
• Geotextile fabric on the plaza level white membrane and beneath gravel ballast and pavers.
• Black tar and fabric vapor barrier on the plaza concrete deck and beneath foam insulation.
• Caulk at the base of guard rails on the plaza and raised terrace north of Olin Library.
• Caulk at the base of light poles on the plaza and by the raised terrace north of Olin Library.
• White caulk on the stairs to the raised terrace north of Olin Library.
• Black coating on the concrete base to the raised terrace north of Olin Library.
• White caulk on the concrete base to the raised terrace north of Olin Library.
• Black membrane on the sides of the raised terrace north of Olin Library.
• Soft gray caulk on metal panels adjacent to the Olin Library second floor northwest door to plaza.
• Soft white caulk on the top of metal counterflashing at the base of stairs west of the raised terrace on
the plaza north of Olin Library.
• Black tar at the base of the stair bottom treads west side stairs to Ho Plaza.
• Black tar and fabric waterproofing on the Olin Library foundation beneath stairs to Ho Plaza.
• Light gray capstone caulk on retaining walls plaza level by the north raised terrace.
• Soft black caulk along the base of copper flashing at the base of the Olin Library second floor level
at the plaza level.
• White caulk on copper flashing along the base of the Olin Library second floor level abutting pavers
on the plaza level.
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 3 of 11
This section includes information on all suspect ACM sampled including the following: the homogeneous
materials identified, their corresponding sample numbers, analytical results and whether or not they are ACM.
Material Material Material Material
DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription Sample LocationSample LocationSample LocationSample Location TypeTypeTypeType Sample NumberSample NumberSample NumberSample Number
Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos) ACMACMACMACM
PLMPLMPLMPLM TEMTEMTEMTEM Y/NY/NY/NY/N
White
Membrane
Beneath Gravel
Ballast and On
2.5” Foam
Insulation
Core 1 Northeast
Gravel Area East of
North Raised Terrace
Core 2 Northeast
Gravel Area Southeast
of North Raised Terrace
M
1801417-01
1801417-02
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Geotextile
Fabric on
White
Membrane
Core 1 Northeast
Gravel Area East of
North Raised Terrace
Beneath Gravel Ballast
Core 3 Beneath
Concrete Pavers East
Sidewalk to Raised
Terrace North of Library
M
1801417-03
1801417-04
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Black Tar and
Fabric Vapor
Barrier on
Concrete Deck
and Beneath
Foam
Insulation
Core 1 Northeast
Gravel Area East of
North Raised Terrace
Core 2 Northeast
Gravel Area Southeast
of North Raised Terrace
Core 3 Beneath
Concrete Pavers East
Sidewalk to Raised
Terrace North of Library
M
1801417-05
1801417-06
1801417-07
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Gray Caulk at
Base of Guard
Rails
North Guard Rail East
of the North Raised
Terrace
South Guard Rail East
of the North Raised
Terrace
M
1801417-08
1801417-09
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Caulk at the
Base of Light
Poles
Light Pole Northeast of
East Stairs North Raised
Terrace
Light Pole Northwest of
West Stairs to North
Raised Terrace
M
1801417-10
1801417-11
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 4 of 11
Material Material Material Material
DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription Sample LocationSample LocationSample LocationSample Location TypeTypeTypeType Sample NumberSample NumberSample NumberSample Number
Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos) ACMACMACMACM
PLMPLMPLMPLM TEMTEMTEMTEM Y/NY/NY/NY/N
White Caulk on
the North
Terrace Stairs
Bottom of East Stairs to
the North Raised
Terrace
Between Pavers on the
Top of the North Raised
Terrace North of Library
M
1801417-12
1801417-13
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Black Coating
on the
Concrete Base
of the North
Raised Terrace
South Side of the North
Raised Terrace, Center
Area by a PVC Drain
South Side of the North
Raised Terrace,
Southwest Corner Area
M
1801417-14
1801417-15
NAD
ND
ND
ND
N
White Caulk on
the Concrete
Base of the
North Raised
Terrace
South Side of the North
Raised Terrace, Center
Area by a PVC Drain
South Side of the North
Raised Terrace,
Southwest Corner Area
M
1801417-16
1801417-17
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Black
Membrane on
the Sides of the
North Raised
Terrace
Base of East Stairs to
the North Raised
Terrace Northeast
Corner North of Library
South Center Side of the
North Raised Terrace
North of Library
M
1801417-18
1801417-19
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Hard Yellow Hard Yellow Hard Yellow Hard Yellow
Exterior Door Exterior Door Exterior Door Exterior Door
Frame CaulkFrame CaulkFrame CaulkFrame Caulk
Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second
Floor North Side Floor North Side Floor North Side Floor North Side
Northwest Door Northwest Door Northwest Door Northwest Door
Between Door Frame Between Door Frame Between Door Frame Between Door Frame
and Metal Panel West and Metal Panel West and Metal Panel West and Metal Panel West
SideSideSideSide
Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second
Floor North Side Floor North Side Floor North Side Floor North Side
Northwest Door Northwest Door Northwest Door Northwest Door
Between Door FrameBetween Door FrameBetween Door FrameBetween Door Frame
and Metal Panel East and Metal Panel East and Metal Panel East and Metal Panel East
SideSideSideSide
MMMM
1801417180141718014171801417----20202020
1801417180141718014171801417----21212121
1.5% Chrysotile1.5% Chrysotile1.5% Chrysotile1.5% Chrysotile
NA/PSNA/PSNA/PSNA/PS
NANANANA
NANANANA
YYYY
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 5 of 11
Material Material Material Material
DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription Sample LocationSample LocationSample LocationSample Location TypeTypeTypeType Sample NumberSample NumberSample NumberSample Number
Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos) ACMACMACMACM
PLMPLMPLMPLM TEMTEMTEMTEM Y/NY/NY/NY/N
Soft Gray
Caulk on Panel
Adjacent to
Door Frame
Olin Library Second
Floor North Side
Northwest Door
Perimeter of Panel West
of Doorway
Olin Library Second
Floor North Side
Northwest Door Base of
Panel West of Doorway
M
1801417-22
1801417-23
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Soft White
Caulk Top of
Metal Counter
Flashing at
Base of West
Stairs
Top of Metal Counter
Flashing West of Stairs
to the Raised Terrace
North of Library,
Northwest Corner
M
1801417-24
1801417-25
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Black Tar Base
of Bottom
Tread West
Side Stairs to
Ho Plaza
Base of Bottom Tread
Stairs West of Olin
Library to Ho Plaza
M
1801417-26
1801417-27
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Black Tar and
Fabric
Waterproofing
on Olin Library
West
Foundation
West Side of Olin
Library Foundation
Northwest Area Below
Stairs to Ho Plaza
M
1801417-28
1801417-29
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Light Gray
Capstone
Caulk
Retaining Walls
West End of the
Retaining Wall West of
the Plaza by North
Raised Terrace
Northeast Corner of the
Retaining Wall East of
the Plaza by Raised
Terrace
M
1801417-30
1801417-31
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Soft Black
Caulk Along
the Base of
Copper
Flashing Base
of Olin Library
Walls
Olin Library Second
Floor North Wall
Northeast Corner
Above Gravel Plaza
Level
Olin Library Second
Floor North Wall Base
of Center Panel Middle
of Wall Above Gravel
Plaza Level
M
1801417-32
1801417-33
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 6 of 11
Material Material Material Material
DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription Sample LocationSample LocationSample LocationSample Location TypeTypeTypeType Sample NumberSample NumberSample NumberSample Number
Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos)Results (% Asbestos) ACMACMACMACM
PLMPLMPLMPLM TEMTEMTEMTEM Y/NY/NY/NY/N
Hard Yellow Hard Yellow Hard Yellow Hard Yellow
Exterior Caulk Exterior Caulk Exterior Caulk Exterior Caulk
Perimeter of Perimeter of Perimeter of Perimeter of
Exterior PanelsExterior PanelsExterior PanelsExterior Panels
Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second
Floor North Wall Floor North Wall Floor North Wall Floor North Wall
Northeast Corner PanelNortheast Corner PanelNortheast Corner PanelNortheast Corner Panel
Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second Olin Library Second
Floor North Wall Center Floor North Wall Center Floor North Wall Center Floor North Wall Center
Panel Middle of WallPanel Middle of WallPanel Middle of WallPanel Middle of Wall
MMMM
1801417180141718014171801417----34343434
1801417180141718014171801417----35353535
1.5% Chrysotile1.5% Chrysotile1.5% Chrysotile1.5% Chrysotile
NA/PSNA/PSNA/PSNA/PS
NANANANA
NANANANA
YYYY
White Caulk on
Copper
Flashing Base
of Wall
Abutting Pavers
Olin Library Second
Floor East Wall
Northeast Corner at
Stone pavers
Olin Library Second
Floor East Wall Center
Area at Stone Pavers
M
1801417-36
1801417-37
ND
ND
ND
ND
N
ND = None Detected Y = Yes S = Surfacing
NA = Not Analyzed N = No T = Thermal System Insulation
NA/PS = Not Analyzed/Positive Stop M = Miscellaneous
Bulk samples were delivered with the chain-of-custody form to EMSL Analytical, Inc. (EMSL) in Depew, NY.
EMSL is a New York State accredited laboratory that is a participant in the Environmental Laboratory Approval
Program (ELAP) and National Voluntary Laboratory Approval Program (NVLAP). Friable materials were
analyzed using Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) using Method 198.1. Non-friable organically bound (NOB)
materials underwent gravimetric reduction prior to being analyzed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM)
Method 198.6. In addition, if NOB samples were negative by PLM, they were further analyzed by
Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Method 198.4.
Observations/RecommendationsObservations/RecommendationsObservations/RecommendationsObservations/Recommendations
The plaza level extends around all sides of Olin Library at the second floor level. The concrete deck, non-
asbestos vapor barrier, foam insulation and white membrane beneath gravel ballast and pavers are consistent
on all sides.
Asbestos-containing hard caulk was observed on the edges of all metal panels on Olin Library along the
second floor level above the plaza level. A total of approximately 30 metal panels with asbestos-containing
caulk were observed on the building exterior second floor level.
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 7 of 11
Photo 1: View of the plaza north of Olin Library. View is looking to the west at the raised terrace. The first floor level of
Olin Library extends beneath the plaza. The location of test core 3 is at the removed paver in the plaza.
Photo 2: View of test core 2 placed on the north plaza northeast of Olin Library. No asbestos was detected in samples
collected from the plaza test cores.
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 8 of 11
Photo 3: View of the black asphalt and fabric vapor barrier on the concrete deck beneath gravel ballast at test core 1 on
the plaza level. No asbestos was detected in samples of the vapor barrier on the concrete deck (arrow).
Photo 4: View of light poles and guard rails on the north raised terrace north of Olin Library. No asbestos was detected
in samples of caulk at the base of guard rails or light poles.
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 9 of 11
Photo 5: Looking east at the base of the raised terrace on the plaza north of Olin Library. No asbestos was detected in
samples of tar, caulk or fabric on the sides of the raised terrace or between retaining wall capstones.
Photo 6: View of the steps to Ho Plaza west of the north plaza and west of Olin Library. No asbestos was detected in tar
samples collected at the base of the steps.
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 10 of 11
Photo 7: View of a section of damaged foundation at the northwest corner of Olin Library on the west elevation. No
asbestos was detected in samples of the black coating on the foundation at this location (arrow).
Photo 8: View of the Olin Library second floor plaza northwest doorway. The hard caulk at the perimeter of the door
frame abutting the adjacent metal panels was determined to be an asbestos-containing material (arrow).
Mr. Dale Houseknecht – Asbestos Project Coordinator
Olin Library – Facility Code 2047
Terrace Renewal Project
Work Order 10780025
Targeted Asbestos Testing Letter Report
O:\2018\18014 Cornell 2018 Env Term\17 Olin Library Terrace\10. Env\10.f. Asbestos-Lead-PCB Assess\ACM Letter Report Olin Library
Terrace.docx
Page 11 of 11
Photo 9: View of the Olin Library second floor east elevation at the plaza level. Hard caulk between metal panels along
the second floor exterior was determined to be an asbestos-containing material (arrow).
The sample location drawing, laboratory report, chain-of-custody form, laboratory accreditations and Watts’
license and certifications are attached. Should you have any questions or need additional information, please
contact me at (716) 206-5142.
Sincerely,
WATTS ARCHITECTURE & ENGINEERINGWATTS ARCHITECTURE & ENGINEERINGWATTS ARCHITECTURE & ENGINEERINGWATTS ARCHITECTURE & ENGINEERING
Edward J. Jones
Environmental Consultant
Attachments
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE LOCATIONS
OLIN LIBRARY PLAZA
X = APPROXIMATE SAMPLE
LOCATIONS
SAMPLES COLLECTED MAY 11, 2018
SAMPLES PREFIXED "1801417-
NORTH RAISED
TERRACE
CORE 1
- 01, 03, 05
CORE 2
CORE 3
x
x
x - 04, 07
- 02,06
HO
PLAZA
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x x
x
x08
x 09
x 10
x11
x 12
x13
- 14, 16
- 15, 17
x18
19x
20
21
22, 23
24, 25
26, 27
28, 29
30
31
32, 34 x
33, 35
36 37
Analyzed
Date Asbestos Fibrous Non-FibrousTestColor
Non Asbestos
Test Report:Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Material
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
490 Rowley Road, Depew, NY 14043
Phone/Fax:(716) 651-0030 / (716) 651-0394
http://www.EMSL.com buffalolab@emsl.com
141802190
CustomerID:WATT50
CustomerPO:
ProjectID:
EMSL Order:
Attn:Edward Jones
Watts Architecture & Engineering
95 Perry Street
Suite 300
Buffalo, NY 14203
Received: 05/12/18 9:00 AM
1801417 / Olin Library Terrace Renewal, Facility ID2047: Olin Library, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY
Fax:(716) 206-5199
Phone:(716) 206-5100
Project:
5/14/2018Analysis Date:
5/11/2018Collected:
1801417-01
141802190-0001
Description white membrane beneath gravel ballast & on 2.5" foam insulation
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Glass1.1%
1801417-02
141802190-0002
Description white membrane beneath gravel ballast & on 2.5" foam insulation
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Glass1.2%
1801417-03
141802190-0003
Description geotextile fabric on white membrane
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Brown
Brown
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-04
141802190-0004
Description geotextile fabric on white membrane
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Brown
Brown
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-05
141802190-0005
Description black tar & fabric vapor barrier on concrete deck & beneath foam insulation
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray/Black
Gray/Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Heterogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Page 1Test Report 198VCM-7.30.0 Printed: 5/14/2018 12:40:06 PM
Initial Report From 05/14/2018 10:40:37
Asbestos Fibrous Non-FibrousTestColor
Non Asbestos
Test Report:Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Material
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
490 Rowley Road, Depew, NY 14043
Phone/Fax:(716) 651-0030 / (716) 651-0394
http://www.EMSL.com buffalolab@emsl.com
141802190
CustomerID:WATT50
CustomerPO:
ProjectID:
EMSL Order:
1801417-06
141802190-0006
Description black tar & fabric vapor barrier on concrete deck & beneath foam insulation
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-07
141802190-0007
Description black tar & fabric vapor barrier on concrete deck & beneath foam insulation
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Brown/Black
Brown/Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-08
141802190-0008
Description gray caulk at base of guard rails
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-09
141802190-0009
Description gray caulk at base of guard rails
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-10
141802190-0010
Description caulk at the base of light poles
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-11
141802190-0011
Description caulk at the base of light poles
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Page 2Test Report 198VCM-7.30.0 Printed: 5/14/2018 12:40:06 PM
Initial Report From 05/14/2018 10:40:37
Asbestos Fibrous Non-FibrousTestColor
Non Asbestos
Test Report:Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Material
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
490 Rowley Road, Depew, NY 14043
Phone/Fax:(716) 651-0030 / (716) 651-0394
http://www.EMSL.com buffalolab@emsl.com
141802190
CustomerID:WATT50
CustomerPO:
ProjectID:
EMSL Order:
1801417-12
141802190-0012
Description white caulk on North podium stairs
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-13
141802190-0013
Description white caulk on North podium stairs
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-14
141802190-0014
Description black coating on the concrete base North raised podium
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray/Black
Gray/Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Heterogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-15
141802190-0015
Description black coating on the concrete base North raised podium
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray/Black
Gray/Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Heterogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-16
141802190-0016
Description white caulk on the concrete base North raised podium
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-17
141802190-0017
Description white caulk on the concrete base North raised podium
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Page 3Test Report 198VCM-7.30.0 Printed: 5/14/2018 12:40:06 PM
Initial Report From 05/14/2018 10:40:37
Asbestos Fibrous Non-FibrousTestColor
Non Asbestos
Test Report:Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Material
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
490 Rowley Road, Depew, NY 14043
Phone/Fax:(716) 651-0030 / (716) 651-0394
http://www.EMSL.com buffalolab@emsl.com
141802190
CustomerID:WATT50
CustomerPO:
ProjectID:
EMSL Order:
1801417-18
141802190-0018
Description black membrane on the sides of the North raised podium
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black/Yellow
Black/Yellow
Sample ID
Homogeneity Heterogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Glass<1%
1801417-19
141802190-0019
Description black membrane on the sides of the North raised podium
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black/Yellow
Black/Yellow
Sample ID
Homogeneity Heterogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Glass<1%
1801417-20
141802190-0020
Description hard yellow exterior door frame caulk
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Not Analyzed
Brown
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1.5% Chrysotile
1.5% Total
1801417-21
141802190-0021
Description hard yellow exterior door frame caulk
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)
Not Analyzed
Sample ID
Homogeneity
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-22
141802190-0022
Description soft gray caulk on panel adjacent to door frame
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-23
141802190-0023
Description soft gray caulk on panel adjacent to door frame
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Page 4Test Report 198VCM-7.30.0 Printed: 5/14/2018 12:40:06 PM
Initial Report From 05/14/2018 10:40:37
Asbestos Fibrous Non-FibrousTestColor
Non Asbestos
Test Report:Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Material
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
490 Rowley Road, Depew, NY 14043
Phone/Fax:(716) 651-0030 / (716) 651-0394
http://www.EMSL.com buffalolab@emsl.com
141802190
CustomerID:WATT50
CustomerPO:
ProjectID:
EMSL Order:
1801417-24
141802190-0024
Description soft white caulk top of metal counterflashing base of stairs
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-25
141802190-0025
Description soft white caulk top of metal counterflashing base of stairs
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-26
141802190-0026
Description black tar base of bottom tread West side stairs to Ho Plaza
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-27
141802190-0027
Description black tar base of bottom tread West side stairs to Ho Plaza
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-28
141802190-0028
Description black tar and fabric waterproofing on Olin Library West foundation
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-29
141802190-0029
Description black tar and fabric waterproofing on Olin Library West foundation
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Page 5Test Report 198VCM-7.30.0 Printed: 5/14/2018 12:40:06 PM
Initial Report From 05/14/2018 10:40:37
Asbestos Fibrous Non-FibrousTestColor
Non Asbestos
Test Report:Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Material
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
490 Rowley Road, Depew, NY 14043
Phone/Fax:(716) 651-0030 / (716) 651-0394
http://www.EMSL.com buffalolab@emsl.com
141802190
CustomerID:WATT50
CustomerPO:
ProjectID:
EMSL Order:
1801417-30
141802190-0030
Description light gray capstone caulk retaining wall
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-31
141802190-0031
Description light gray capstone caulk retaining wall
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-32
141802190-0032
Description soft black caulk along the base of copper flashing base of library walls
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-33
141802190-0033
Description soft black caulk along the base of copper flashing base of library walls
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Black
Black
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-34
141802190-0034
Description hard yellow exterior caulk perimeter of exterior panels
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Not Analyzed
Brown/Tan
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1.5% Chrysotile
1.5% Total
1801417-35
141802190-0035
Description hard yellow exterior caulk perimeter of exterior panels
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)
Not Analyzed
Sample ID
Homogeneity
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
Page 6Test Report 198VCM-7.30.0 Printed: 5/14/2018 12:40:06 PM
Initial Report From 05/14/2018 10:40:37
Asbestos Fibrous Non-FibrousTestColor
Non Asbestos
Test Report:Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Material
EMSL Analytical, Inc.
490 Rowley Road, Depew, NY 14043
Phone/Fax:(716) 651-0030 / (716) 651-0394
http://www.EMSL.com buffalolab@emsl.com
141802190
CustomerID:WATT50
CustomerPO:
ProjectID:
EMSL Order:
1801417-36
141802190-0036
Description white caulk on copper flashing base of wall abutting pavers
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
1801417-37
141802190-0037
Description white caulk on copper flashing base of wall abutting pavers
PLM NYS 198.1 Friable
PLM NYS 198.6 NOB
TEM NYS 198.4 NOB
5/14/2018
5/14/2018
Not Analyzed
Inconclusive: None Detected
None Detected
Gray
Gray
Sample ID
Homogeneity Homogeneous
PLM NYS 198.6 VCM Not Analyzed
-In New York State, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if NOB materials can be considered or treated as non-asbestos containing.
All samples examined for the presence of vermiculite when analyzed via NYS 198.1.
-NYS Guidelines for Vermiculite containing samples are available at http://www.wadsworth.org/labcert/elapcert/forms/VermiculiteInterimGuidance_Rev070913.pdf
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by
EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. Samples
were received in good condition unless otherwise noted.
This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. This report may contain
data that is not covered by the NVLAP accreditation.
Rhonda McGee, Laboratory Manager
or other approved signatory
Analyst(s)
NOB = Non Friable Organically Bound N/A = Not Applicable VCM = Vermiculite Containing Material
Mark Tate
Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Depew, NY NYS ELAP 11606
Page 7THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT.Test Report 198VCM-7.30.0 Printed: 5/14/2018 12:40:06 PM
Initial Report From 05/14/2018 10:40:37
OrderID: 141802190
Page 1 Of 2
OrderID: 141802190
Page 2 Of 2
120 E. Washington St., Suite 414
Syracuse, NY 13202
95 Perry Street, Suite 300
Buffalo, NY 14203
44 W 28th Street, 5th Floor
New York, NY 10001
WATTS Architecture & Engineering
Excellence in all we do.
120 E. Washington St., Suite 414
Syracuse, NY 13202
95 Perry Street, Suite 300
Buffalo, NY 14203
44 W 28th Street, 5th Floor
New York, NY 10001
WATTS Architecture & Engineering
Excellence in all we do.
Edward Jones
C – Air Sampling Technician
D – Inspector
H – Project Monitor
I – Project Designer
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the
protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply
to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and
regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this
contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed
such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood
to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s
Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 57 13 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals:
1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil
and granular materials (“borrow”).
2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan.
3. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management.
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory
representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site.
B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this
Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested
by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner.
There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so
directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not
comply with these specifications.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE
A. In accordance with Section 01 14 00, only that portion of the working area that is absolutely
necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction. All clearing should be
approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of soils.
B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and
lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or
environmental quality of the area.
C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be reused as part of the Project, shall be
stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion.
1.6 SPOIL AND BORROW
A. Spoil
1. Dispose of excavated material which, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, is
unfit to be used as backfill or embankment or which is in excess of the amount required
under the Contract.
2. All spoil areas shall be graded and seeded to match the surrounding area.
3. Spoil areas shall be covered and protected from erosion into adjacent storm sewers,
drainage ways, land areas, or water bodies.
B. Borrow Material
1. Borrow material shall be provided from a clean source. Submittals of proposed borrow
material shall be reviewed by the Owner prior to delivery on-site. Submittals shall
include the quantity of materials, source location and certification by the material
supplier that it is free of chemicals or other foreign matter.
1.7 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of
noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by
construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines
and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment
presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these
requirements
1.8 DUST CONTROL
A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling,
loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based
materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the
duration of construction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling
dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate
actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to
control dust.
C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical
ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of
the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris.
All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws,
and regulations including OSHA.
1.9 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees
shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell
standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations.
Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this
Contract include, but are not limited to:
1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary
sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state
regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations.
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors,
any wetlands, or any surface waters.
3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm
sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters.
4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless
such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or
specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative.
6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream.
7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage
or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work.
C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning
operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the
levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5)
and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer
authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer.
D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of
pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative
and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.10 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK
A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping
and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to
the Owner’s Representative in writing.
The following shall require approval of the Owner:
1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections.
2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air
emissions.
B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical
equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves,
switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s
Representative.
1.11 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other
party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its
performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or
environmental risks associated therewith.
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University
Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In
situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S)
for guidance.
C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into
contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or
failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and
hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance
with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from
EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal.
1.12 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE
A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor
Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the
waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage
all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this
form to document waste disposal methods and locations.
B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated
with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at:
https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/env/solid-waste/construction-demolition-waste/Pages/default.aspx
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of
any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University
owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk
of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at
the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste
Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including
certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or
disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and
regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to
final payment(s) under this Contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 43***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or
hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects:
1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during
the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from
vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil
storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as
appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a
temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the
inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products.
3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a
manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or
vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in
accordance with all fire and safety codes.
B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is
leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such
materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES
All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health
and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could
potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted
by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous
substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are
beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the
Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the
following procedures shall be followed:
A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall:
1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area,
inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section
1. 3).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a
containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials;
and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that
valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area.
3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent
material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the
following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not
compromise worker safety.
a. Stop the spill at once (if possible).
b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.).
c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area.
d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires,
explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread.
e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source.
f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks,
bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill.
g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released
materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible
so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified.
h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the
release, fire, or explosion.
i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the
Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure
buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment.
B. Spill Cleanup:
1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be
initiated.
a. Use proper waste containers.
b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place
material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible
or reactive substances in the same container.
c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with
all applicable state and federal regulations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been
removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material
shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and
shall not be mixed with bulk liquid.
e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper
location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill.
f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change
clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product.
g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged
through the Contractor.
h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample
Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B.
C. Fire or Explosion:
1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g.,
ambulance, police) have been notified.
b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character,
source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency
personnel.
c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other
immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so.
e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions,
or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures
include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil,
or removing and isolating containers.
f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas
generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION
In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate
departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if
required.
The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation
procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362,
less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental
Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor
will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must
be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply:
TABLE 1
CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING
CRITERIA DESCRIPTION
Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons.
Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an
impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment.
Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious
surface.
Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence.
Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto
surface water.
A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be
immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or
“harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response
Center, 1-800-424-8802.
Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to
provide the following information, if possible:
1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an
indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance.
3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the
approximate duration of the event.
4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or
threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill.
5. The source of the release or spill.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for,
the facility or activity associated with the release or spill.
7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site.
9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material
and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any.
11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency,
and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals.
12. Assistance required, if any.
If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable
quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6
NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following:
1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site.
The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675.
2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description
should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3)
estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the
release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and
control future releases.
(1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that
triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation,
and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally
responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s
spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
(2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water
quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline;
or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR
110.3).
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 44***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00
Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the
execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall
include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe,
fill, street use and building demolition.
1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly
scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a
structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and
Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall
also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition.
C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and
maintained through the City of Ithaca.
D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting:
1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a
fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the
Uniform Code of New York State.
2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration
–Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the
Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire
detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for
this type of work.
3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require
a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department.
1.2 INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all
service charges, pavement cuts and repairs.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and
regulations applicable to the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00
Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall
comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of
equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work
in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of
the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary
of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit
fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the
Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings.
B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and
on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision
of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents.
C. Install All Work in Compliance with:
1. NYS Uniform Code
a. International Building Code
b. International Residential Code
c. International Existing Building Code
d. International Fire Code
e. International Plumbing Code
f. International Mechanical Code
g. International Fuel Gas Code
h. International Property Maintenance Code
i. Uniform Code Supplement
2. NYS Energy Code
a. International Energy Conservation Code
b. ASHRAE 90.1
c. Energy Code Supplement
3. National Electric Code
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101.
6. All local ordinances
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner
and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications,
addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement,
and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement.
C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent
the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract
Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials
and equipment incorporated in such construction.
E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation.
F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice
architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner
Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized
representative.
G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction
Agreement contract is made by Owner.
H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work
at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor.
I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval.
J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including
"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.”
L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that
control performance of the Work.
M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position.
P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for.
Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above
ceilings, either permanent or removable.
S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed.
T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project
site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land
on which Project is to be built.
U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to
record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes
both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the
course of project construction.
V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all
services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The
“record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings
and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor.
W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that
are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for
some portion of the work.
X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship,
and to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the
responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction
contract.
Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or
elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the
contractor for construction purposes.
AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are
directions given to the Contractor;
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS
A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council,
Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members
of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as
follows:
Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers
Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters
Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters
Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers
Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades
Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers
Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America
The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows:
All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction
of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft
maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed
as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other
employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided,
however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees
covered by this agreement.
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are
not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800
Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
Available from Defense Standardization Program
www.dps.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925
www.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800
www.nibs.org
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253
Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080
www.access-board.gov
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960
www.aluminum.org
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333
www.aaadm.com
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202
www.aabchq.com
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664
www.aamanet.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800
Transportation Officials
www.transportation.org
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141
www.aatcc.org
ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888
www.airbarrier.org
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155
www.abma-dc.org
ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700
(American Concrete Institute)
www.aci-int.org
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216
www.concrete-pipe.org
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530
www.aeic.org
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878
www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000
www.aga.org
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118
www.agc.org
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955
www.aham.org
AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960
www.asphaltinstitute.org
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837
www.aia.org (202) 626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400
www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100
www.steel.org
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559
www.aitc-glulam.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-7
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America
(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700
www.alsc.org
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150
www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020
www.ansi.org
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437
www.aosaseed.com
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600
www.apawood.org
APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989
www.archprecast.org
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000
www.api.org
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800
www.ari.org
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917
www.asphaltroofing.org
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723
www.asce.org (703) 295-6300
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723
Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400
www.ashrae.org
ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170
www.asme.org
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040
www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811
www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-8
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800
www.awpa.com
AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353
www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337
www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122
www.buildershardware.com
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010
www.bia.org
BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405
www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772
www.bissc.org
CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312
www.carpetcushion.org
CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282
www.copper.org (212) 251-7200
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700
www.cganet.com
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462
www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919
www.cisca.org
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137
www.cispi.org
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583
www.chainlinkinfo.org
CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604
www.pbmdf.com
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607
CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846
www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-9
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200
www.crsi.org
CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011
www.caststone.org
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900
www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700
www.cedarbureau.org
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087
www.cti.org
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010
www.dhi.org
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500
www.eia.org
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462
www.eima.com (770) 968-7945
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000
www.ejdc.org
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040
www.ejma.org
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937
www.esda.org
FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000
www.fmglobal.com
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850
www.fluidsealing.com
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0
www.fsc.org
GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440
www.gypsum.org
GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com
GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400
www.greenseal.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-10
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440
www.geosynthetic-institute.org
HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744
www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200
www.gamanet.org
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900
www.hpva.org
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550
www.hpwhite.com
IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369
www.icea.net
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830
www.icri.org
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11
www.iec.ch
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900
www.ieee.org
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000
www.iesna.org
IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561
www.iest.org
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234
www.igcc.org
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510
www.igmaonline.org
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426
www.iliai.com
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11
www.iso.ch
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020
www.ansi.org
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732
www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-11
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851
www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11
www.itu.int/home
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org
LMA Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864
www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333
www.mbma.com
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138
www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610
www.metalframingmfg.org
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815
www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222
www.marble-institute.com
MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937
www.paintinfo.com
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613
Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405
www.naamm.org
NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200
www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926
www.nadca.com
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084
www.naima.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-12
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848
www.nbgqa.com
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222
www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900
www.ncma.org
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094
www.ncpi.org
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550
www.ncta.com
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698
www.nebb.org
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110
www.necanet.org
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901
www.nelma.org
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200
www.nema.org
NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382
www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900
www.nfhs.org
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555
(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000
www.nfpa.org
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776
www.nfrc.org
NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642
www.glass.org (703) 442-4890
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318
www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393
www.nlga.org
NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016
www.nofma.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-13
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545
www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400
NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275
(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010
www.nsf.org
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415
www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736
www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930
NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700
www.nybfu.org
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300
www.pci.org
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322
www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956
www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929
http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522
www.landcarenetwork.org
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540
www.post-tensioning.org
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400
www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580
www.rfci.com
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339
www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662
SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323
www.sae.org (724) 776-4841
SBI Steel Boiler Institute
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-14
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647
www.sdi.org
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010
www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424
www.sefalabs.com
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234
www.sgcc.org
SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075
www.siaonline.org
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995
www.steeljoist.org
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991
www.smacentral.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980
National Association
www.smacna.org
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100
www.smpte.org
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154
www.sprayfoam.org
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611
www.spib.org
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026
www.spri.org
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355
www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772
www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265
www.steeltank.com
SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333
www.steelwindows.com
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974
www.swrionline.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-15
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453
www.tileusa.com
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700
Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700
www.masonrysociety.org
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010
www.tpinst.org
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555
www.turfgrasssod.org
TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177
www.tileroofing.org
UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962
www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577
www.ul.com (847) 272-8800
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902
www.uni-bell.org
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422
www.usgbc.org
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869
www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636
www.windowcoverings.org
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301
www.wdma.com
WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943
www.wicnet.org
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889
www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333
www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930
www.wwpa.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-16
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100
www.iapmo.org
ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233
www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587
www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543
NEC National Electric Code
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000
www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257
http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220
www.energy.gov
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167
www.epa.gov
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322
www.faa.gov
FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322
www.fcc.gov
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332
www.fda.gov
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111
www.gsa.gov
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00
Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN LIBRARY REFERENCES 01 42 00-17
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112
www.hud.gov
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000
www.lbl.gov
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478
www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742
www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999
PBS Public Building Service
(See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694
www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540
(See USDA)
SD State Department (202) 647-4000
www.state.gov
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934
www.nas.edu/trb
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791
www.usda.gov
USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000
www.usps.com
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 42 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00
Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC)
program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of
Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and
tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities,
instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function.
Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction
sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program.
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the
Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation
meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress
meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved
submittals and products.
a. Agenda to include the following:
i. Appointment
ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.
iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as
required.
iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements.
v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements.
vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.
vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners
consideration.
viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds,
utilities, fences, Section 01500.
ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour
notice to Architect for review of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00
Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and
undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410.
xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
xii. Special safety requirements and procedures.
b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting:
i. Project Manager.
ii. Project Field Supervisor
iii. Subcontractor
iv. Architect’s Representative
v. Owner’s Representative
vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable
vii. Testing Agency, when applicable
2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any
definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the
supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that
materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check
to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work
area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine
materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that
the materials and equipment are on hand.
3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a
representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for
compliance with contract requirements.
4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure
continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular
work.
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS
A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as
opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be
responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC
Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during
shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in
good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although
any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the
Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the
completed project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00
Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.4 TESTING
A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an
installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship
requirements.
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the
work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to
reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in
conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to
make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents.
1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track non-
conforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s
Representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29
Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
OLIN LIBRARY TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
4.0 GENERAL
4.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to
perform specified services.
1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required
services.
2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to
perform the Work of the Contract.
B. Testing Laboratory services are specified in connection with work including but not limited
to the following:
1. New York State Building Code, Chapter 17, Special Inspections
2. Earth Moving: Section 31 20 00.
3. Asphalt Paving: Section 32 12 16
4. FRP Reinforcing: Section 03 01 33.
5. Cast-in-place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
4.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY
A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest
edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.
B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-05b, "Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged
in Construction Inspection and/or Testing ".
C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York.
D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under the direction of Licensed Professional
Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all
testing and inspections and shall certify any local agency requirements.
E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of
National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum
of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29
Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
OLIN LIBRARY TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
F. Testing Equipment:
1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either:
a. National Bureau of Standards
b. Accepted values of natural physical constants.
2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency.
4.3 LABORATORY DUTIES
A. Cooperate with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on
notice.
B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction.
1. Comply with specified standards, ASTM, other recognized authorities, and as specified.
2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of
work or products.
D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate that
strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical
Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. The Architect
shall determine whether remedial action is necessary.
E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect,
Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.
4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
6. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
7. Date of test.
8. Identification of product and specification section.
9. Location of sample or test in the Project.
10. Type of inspection or test.
11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29
Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
OLIN LIBRARY TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection certifying that the work has been
inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found which
have not yet been repaired or resolved.
G. Perform additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner.
4.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
4.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel. Provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's
operations.
B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials
proposed to be used and for which testing is specified.
C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for concrete, and
other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.
D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required.
E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To provide access to Work to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be
tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.
F. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory
assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse laboratory
for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's responsibility.
G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for
Contractor's convenience.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 29
Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
OLIN LIBRARY TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing
laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests
indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents.
5.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
6.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-1
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Special Inspections and Structural Testing shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the
Building Code of New York State (BCNYS).
B. Hold a Special Inspections preconstruction meeting at least seven (7) days prior to the initial
planned date for start of construction.
1. Discussion shall include the following:
a. Review of specifications and Schedule of Special Inspections for work requiring
Special Inspections.
b. Responsibilities of Contractor, Owner, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and
Registered Design Professional.
c. Notification and reporting procedures.
2. Attendees shall include the Contractor, Owner’s representative, Testing Agency, Special
Inspector, and Registered Design Professionals for Structural Engineering and for
Architecture.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Registered Design Professional: The licensed Professional Engineer or Registered Architect
whose seal appears on the Construction Drawings.
B. Code Enforcement Official: The Officer or other designated authority charged with
administration and enforcement of the BCNYS.
C. Testing/Inspecting Agency: An agent retained by the Special Inspector or by the Owner and
coordinated by the Special Inspector, to perform some of the inspection services on behalf of
the Special Inspector. (An example of an Inspecting Agent is a Geotechnical Engineer.)
D. Statement of Special Inspections: A document prepared by the Registered Design Professional
and filed with and approved by the Code Enforcement Official that includes the Schedule of
Special Inspections listing the materials and work requiring Special Inspections. This document
includes the inspections and verifications required for the project and the individuals, agencies,
and/or firms who will be retained to perform these services.
E. Continuous Special Inspection: The full-time observation of work by the Special Inspector or
Testing Agency while the work is being performed.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-2
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
F. Periodic Special Inspections: The part-time or intermittent observation of work by the Special
Inspector or Testing Agency for work that has been or is being performed and at the completion
of the work.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall be accepted by the Owner.
B. Special Inspections shall be performed by agents who have relevant experience for each
category of inspections indicated on the drawings.
C. Minimum qualifications of inspection agents are indicated on the drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit to the Registered Design
Professional and Code Enforcement Official for review, a copy of their qualifications including
the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be
performing inspections or tests.
B. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall disclose any past or present business
relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors
whose work will be inspected or tested.
1.5 PAYMENT
A. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting
Agency.
B. If any materials requiring Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant not located within 200
miles of the project site, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses of the Special
Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or re-inspection of work failing
to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Owner will provide the Special Inspector with a complete set of Contract Documents sealed
by the Registered Design Professional and approved by the Code Enforcement Official.
1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector and his agents so that Special
Inspections and testing may be performed without hindrance.
B. As indicated in the Schedule of Special Inspections, the Contractor shall notify the Special
Inspector and/or Testing/Inspecting Agency at least 48 hours in advance of a required inspection
or test.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-3
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
C. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be
inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested,
to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples.
D. If Special Inspections or testing require the use of the Contractor’s scaffolding to access work
areas, the Contractor shall provide a competent person to perform the daily evaluation of the
scaffolding to verify that it is safe to use. The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector and
Testing Agent of this review before each use. The Contractor is responsible for the safe
assembly and stability of the scaffolding.
E. The Contractor shall keep the latest set of Construction Drawings, field sketches, accepted shop
drawings, and specifications at the project site for field use by the Inspectors and Testing
Technicians.
F. The Contractor shall perform remedial work (if required) and sign non-conformance reports
stating that remedial work has been completed. The Contractor shall submit signed reports to
the Special Inspector as work proceeds.
G. The Special Inspection program shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to
perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from
implementing an effective Quality Control program.
H. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety.
1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY
A. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge
on the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not have control over the Contractor’s
means and methods of construction.
C. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not be responsible for construction
site safety.
D. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not have the authority to stop the
work.
2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING
A. The Contractor shall follow the Special Inspection requirements developed by the
Architect/Engineer of Record.
2.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Special Inspector shall perform the following:
1. Inspect reinforcing steel and placement.
2. Inspect embedded bolts prior to concrete placement.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-4
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
B. Testing Agency shall perform the following:
1. Verify use of required design mix.
2. Sample and test concrete during placement as follows. Test shall be taken at point
of discharge into structure:
a. Record specific locations where concrete was placed. Refer to column lines
where possible.
b. Record time concrete is batched, time placement begins/sample time.
c. Sample fresh concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172, except modified for
slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
d. Perform slump test in accordance with ASTM C 143.
e. For normal-weight concrete, measure air content in accordance with ASTM C
231, pressure method. For lightweight concrete, measure air content in
accordance with ASTM C 173, volumetric method.
f. Record temperature of concrete. Test in-place concrete temperature hourly
when ambient temperature is 40 degrees F and below and when 80 degrees F
and above.
g. Record air temperature and general weather conditions (cloudy, windy, sunny,
etc.).
h. Record unit weight of fresh normal-weight concrete in accordance with ASTM
C 138.
i. Record unit weight of lightweight concrete in accordance with ASTM C 567.
j. Perform concrete compressive tests as follows:
I. Prepare compressive test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31. Take
a set of six 6 x 12 cylinders or nine 4 x 8 cylinders for each project for each
type of concrete. Store undisturbed in insulated box during cold weather.
Deliver to laboratory between 16 and 32 hours after making. Perform
compressive tests in accordance with ASTM C 39: two 6 x 12 specimens
(three 4 x 8 specimens) tested at 7 days, two 6 x 12 specimens (three 4 x 8
specimens) tested at 28 days, and two 6 x 12 specimens (three 4 x 8
specimens) retained for later testing if required.
II. In cold weather, cast additional set of four 6 x 12 specimens (six 4 x 8
specimens) for each project area subject to weather. Field-cure cylinders,
and test two 6 x 12 specimens (three 4 x 8 specimens) at 7 days, retaining
two 6 x 12 specimens (three 4 x 8 specimens) for later testing if required
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-5
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
k. Perform additional testing as follows if required:
I. Make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate
specified concrete strengths or other characteristics have not been attained
in structure.
II. Perform tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods acceptable to Architect.
III. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for cost of additional tests.
3. Inspect concrete placement for proper application techniques.
4. Inspect for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques.
2.2 CONCRETE REPAIRS
A. Testing Agency shall perform the following:
1. Verify use of approved repair materials.
2. Inspect preparation of concrete surfaces for patching.
3. Inspect installation of patches.
4. Document quantity of repairs. For each repair location, document the size of the
repair, and type of repair (deep or shallow).
5. Test patched areas after three days for soundness and delamination by sounding
with a hammer.
6. Inspect for maintenance of specified placement temperature and curing techniques.
2.3 FRP COMPOSITE REINFORCING
A. Special Inspector shall perform the following:
1. The special inspector shall periodically observe all aspects of preparation, mixing,
and application. All FRP composite applied areas shall be inspected, in accordance
with the manufacturer’s specifications for voids, bubbles, and delaminations.
B. Testing Agency shall perform the following:
1. In-situ Testing
a. ASTM D7522 and/or ASTM D4541 – Adhesion Tests
I. Direct tension adhesion testing of FRP shall be conducted using the method
described by ASTM D7522 and/or ASTM D4541. Pull-off tests shall be
performed on a representative adjacent area to the area being strengthened
whenever possible. Tests shall be performed on each type of substrate or
for each surface preparation technique used. Perform one test adjacent to
each area of FRP strengthening.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-6
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
II. The prepared surface of the bonded FRP system shall be allowed to cure a
minimum of 72 hours before execution of the direct tension pull-off test.
The locations of the pull-off tests shall be representative and on flat
surfaces. If no adjacent areas exist, the tests shall be conducted on areas of
the FRP system subjected to relatively low stress during service. The
minimum acceptable value for any single tension test is 175 psi. The
average of the tests at each location shall not be less than 200 psi.
Additional tests may be performed to qualify the work.
III. Test locations shall be filled with thickened epoxy after the values have
been recorded and verified by the special instructor and the test dollies have
been removed.
2. Laboratory Testing
a. ASTM D7565 and/or ASTM D3039 – Tension Tests
I. Sampling
1) Record lot number of fabric and epoxy resin used, and location of
installation. Measure square footage of fabric and volume of epoxy
used each day. Label each sample from each day’s production.
2) A “sample batch” shall consist of two 12” by 12” samples of cured
composite. A minimum of two “sample batches” shall be made
daily. The two “sample batches” will be taken at appropriate times
during the day as to ensure the maximum material deviance in the
components of the FRP composite.
II. Preparation of Samples
1) Prepare sample on a smooth, flat, level surface covered with
polyethylene sheeting, or 16 mil plastic film, prime with epoxy resin.
Then place two layers of saturated fabric and apply additional topping
of epoxy. Cover with plastic film and squeegee out all bubbles.
2) Samples shall be stored in a sample box and not moved for a minimum
48 hours after casting. The prepared, identified samples shall be given
to a pre-approved and experienced testing laboratory. The laboratory
shall then precondition samples for 48 hours at 140°F before testing.
III. Testing
1) Testing specimens shall be cut from samples and tested for ultimate
tensile strength, tensile modulus and percentage elongation as per
ASTM D7565 and/or ASTM D3039 in the longitudinal fiber
direction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-7
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
2) Test a minimum of 15% of all samples as per ICC AC178. If one
coupon fails, specimens from the same 12” x 12” sample will be
tested. If these specimens also fail, the other 12” x 12” sample from
the same “sample batch” will be tested. In the extreme case that this
sample also fails, the remaining “sample batch” for that day will be
tested and appropriate remediation shall be taken to ensure integrity
of the system at locations from the failed “sample batch”. In
addition, 25% of the remaining samples shall be tested by the same
criteria as per ICC AC178.
3) Test results shall be based on normalized thicknesses , the product data
sheet and the ICC ESR. Testing results shall be made available within
3 weeks of sample submission.
IV. Acceptance Criteria
1) Acceptance Criteria: FRP design values must be lower than the
calculated mean determined from the test results received from the
ASTM D7565 and/or ASTM D3039 field test specimens. Acceptable
minimum values for ultimate tensile strength, tensile modulus, and
elongation shall not be below the submitted design values. Any values
below the submitted design values will require remediation.
2.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Special Inspector shall perform the following:
1. Verify Fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and Quality Control procedures:
a. Review procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to code
requirements.
b. If Fabricator is designated as AISC-Certified Fabricator, Special Inspection for
shop-fabricated members and assemblies is not required.
c. If Fabricator is not designated as AISC-Certified Fabricator, Contractor shall
reimburse Owner via execution of credit change order for cost of Special
Inspections and testing in Fabricator’s shop.
2. Review manufacturer’s Certificates of Compliance for high-strength bolts and weld
filler material.
3. Review certified mill test reports.
4. Inspect steel frame joint details for compliance with approved Construction
Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-8
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
B. Testing Agency shall perform the following:
1. Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers, including review of
identification markings and manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
a. Test high-strength bolt assemblies in a tension measuring device to verify
material conformance prior to installation. Assemble bolt, nut, and washer on a
loose plate and tension by tightening nut to develop required tension in Table
7.1 of “Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts.
2. Verification that copies of accepted field welding procedure specifications are
available on site for reference by erector’s welders.
3. Verification that erector’s welder’s qualifications are current and appropriate for
joint type, welding position, and welding process to be used.
4. Verification that joint fit-up for partial and complete penetration groove welds are
in compliance with AWS tolerances as follows:
a. Visually inspect 50 percent of joints scheduled for partial and complete
penetration groove welds.
b. Visually inspect 50 percent of column splices scheduled for partial and
complete penetration groove welds.
c. Visually inspect 100 percent of tension member splices, column splices, and
moment connections that are part of the lateral force resisting system.
5. Inspect high-strength bolting.
a. Joints designated as snug tight require only visual inspection.
6. Material verification of structural steel, including review of identification
markings.
7. Perform pull-out tests on adhesive, expansion, and sleeve anchors.
8. Material verification of weld filler materials, including review of identification
markings.
9. Inspect welding of structural steel.
a. Visually inspect welds according to AWS.
b. Schedule inspection of field welding in timely manner utilizing vertical access
means and methods utilized by Contractor to perform the welding.
c. Ultrasonic inspection (UT) according to ASTM E 587 is required for partial and
complete penetration field groove welds as follows:
I. UT inspect 50 percent of joints scheduled for partial and complete
penetration groove welds.
II. UT inspect 50 percent of column splices scheduled for partial and complete
penetration groove welds.
III. UT inspect 50 percent or minimum of six of the joints scheduled for partial
or complete penetration groove welds completed by each welder. Increase
inspection percentage to 100 percent for each welder with more than one
rejected weld.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-9
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
d. Magnetic particle inspection according to ASTM E 709 is required for
Fabricators not certified by AISC Quality Certification Program for 10 percent
of shop fillet welds.
e. Magnetic particle inspection according to ASTM E 709 is required for 10
percent of field fillet welds.
10. Inspect condition of erected materials.
a. Visually inspect erected steel for damage.
b. Visually inspect connections and framing to verify compliance with Contract
Documents and accepted shop drawings.
11. Additional testing shall be performed as follows if required.
a. Testing Agency shall perform additional tests of connections and framing
members field modified by Contractor to correct errors in shop drawings,
fabrication, or erection.
b. Testing and reporting of field modifications shall be in accordance with this
section, Special Inspections, and have the following additional requirements:
I. Magnetic particle inspection according to ASTM E 709 is required for 100
percent of fillet welds.
II. Ultrasonic inspection according to ASTM E 587 is required for 100 percent
of full-penetration welds.
III. Perform pull-out tests on 100 percent of each type of adhesive, expansion,
or sleeve anchor used by applying a load equal to 125 percent of allowable
pull-out strength listed in manufacturer’s literature.
c. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for cost of additional tests performed.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-10
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR BUILDING STRUCTURES
INSPECTION AGENTS
1. SPECIAL INSPECTOR, P.E.
2. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING/INSPECTOR
3. TESTING/INSPECTING AGENCY
4. TESTING/INSPECTING AGENCY
THE OWNER OR THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL RETAIN A SPECIAL
INSPECTOR WHO WILL PERFORM INSPECTIONS AND TESTING AND/OR OVERSEE THE
WORK OF AN INSPECTION AND TESTING AGENCY. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE
A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER EXPERIENCED IN THE DESIGN OF BUILDINGS AND
REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF NEW YORK.
THE CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR PERFORMING THE WORK CANNOT RETAIN
THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR. ANY CONFLICT OF INTEREST MUST BE DISCLOSED TO THE
CODE ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION.
THE NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS OF AGENTS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE CODE
ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL AND REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL PRIOR TO
COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. THE QUALIFICATIONS OF ALL PERSONNEL
PERFORMING INSPECTION AND TESING ACTIVITIES ARE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY
THE CODE ENFORCEMENT OFFICIAL. MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF THE TESTING
AGENTS ARE INDICATED IN THE SCHEDULE.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-11
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
KEY OF MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF INSPECTION AGENTS (MQIA)
PE NEW YORK STATE REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
RDP NEW YORK STATE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
EIT ENGINEER IN TRAINING SUPERVISED BY A PE – INTERN ENGINEER
ACI-CCI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE CERTIFIED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
INSPECTOR
ACI-CFTT AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE CERTIFIED CONCRETE FIELD TESTING
TECHNICIAN – GRADE 1
ICC-RCSI ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE SPECIAL INSPECTOR
ICC-RCC ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE CERTIFICATION
ICC-SMC ICC STRUCTURAL MASONRY CERTIFICATION
ICC-SSWC ICC STRUCTURAL STEEL AND WELDING CERTIFICATION
AWS-CWI AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY CERTIFIED WELDING INSPECTOR
ICC-SAFC ICC SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING CERTIFICATION
ASNT AMERICAN SOCIETY OF NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING – LEVEL II OR III
ICC-PCC ICC PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CERTIFICATION
CATEGORY MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF INSPECTION AGENTS (MQIA)
A. REINFORCED
CONCRETE
1. CURRENT ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE SPECIAL
INSPECTOR OR ACI CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
INSPECTOR
2. CONCRETE FIELD TESTING CAN BE BY AN ACI CONCRETE
FIELD TESTING TECHNICAL WITH GRADE 1 CERTIFICATION
3. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
4. NEW YORK STATE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL
ENGINEER (RDP) WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
B. PRE-STRESSED
PRE-TENSION
CONCRETE
1. CURRENT ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE CERTIFICATION
AND ACI CONCRETE FIELD TESTING TECHNICAL WITH
GRADE 1 CERTIFICATION PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT
EXPERIENCE
2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
C. PRE-STRESSED
POST-TENSION
CONCRETE
1. CURRENT POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE (PTI)
CERTIFICATION
2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-12
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
D. WELDING 1. CURRENT AWS CERTIFIED WELDING INSPECTOR
2. CURRENT ICC STRUCTURAL STEEL AND WELDING
CERTIFICATE PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. CURRENT LEVEL II CERTIFICATION FROM THE AMERICAN
SOCIETY FOR NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING (NDT)
4. CURRENT LEVEL III PROVIDED PREVIOUSLY CERTIFIED AS
NDT LEVEL II
E. HIGH-STRENGTH
BOLTING AND
STEEL FRAME
INSPECTION
1. CURRENT ICC STRUCTURAL STEEL AND WELDING
CERTIFICATE PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
F. MASONRY 1. CURRENT ICC STRUCTURAL MASONRY AND ONE YEAR OF
RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
G. SPRAYED
FIRE-RESISTANT
MATERIALS
1. CURRENT ICC SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING
CERTIFICATION AND ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT
EXPERIENCE
2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
H. EXCAVATION AND
FILLING
VERIFICATION OF
SOILS PILES AND
DRILLED PIERS
MODULAR
RETAINING WALLS
1. CURRENT LEVEL II CERTIFICATION IN GEOTECHNICAL
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY/CONSTRUCTION FROM THE
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES (NICET)
2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
I. INSPECTION OF
FABRICATORS
1. PRECAST: CURRENT ICC REINFORCED CONCRETE
CERTIFICATION PLUS ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT
EXPERIENCE
2. BAR JOISTS: SEE WELDING REQUIREMENTS
3. METAL BUILDINGS: SEE WELDING REQUIREMENTS
4. STRUCTURAL STEEL: SEE WELDING REQUIREMENTS
J. EXTERIOR AND
INTERIOR
ARCHITECTURAL
WALL PANELS
1. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
2. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-13
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
K. EXTERIOR
INSULATION AND
FINISH SYSTEM
1. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
2. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
L. SMOKE CONTROL 1. EXPERTISE IN FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING,
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, AND CERTIFIED AS AN AIR
BALANCER
2. THE RDP RESPONSIBLE FOR DESIGN
M. SEISMIC
RESISTANCE
1. SEE APPLICABLE CATEGORIES IN THIS TABLE
N. GENERAL 1. QUALIFIED PERSON WITH ONE YEAR OF RELEVANT
EXPERIENCE
2. INTERN ENGINEER WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
3. RDP WITH RELEVANT EXPERIENCE
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-14
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
☒ CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION: SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING IS REQUIRED.
(TABLE 1705.3)
TYPE AGENT
NO.
MQIA CONT. PERIODIC REFERENCED
STANDARD
CODE
☒
☒
INSPECT
REINFORCEMENT, AND
VERIFY PLACEMENT.
A. WALLS
B. RAMP SLAB
1 OR 3 A.1, A.3
M.1
B.1, B.2
C.1, C.2
X
X 50%
X 50%
ACI 318 Ch.
20, 25.2, 25.3,
26.5.1-26.5.3
1908.4
☒ INSPECT ANCHORS 1 OR 3 E.1, E.2, TABLE
POST-INSTALLED IN E.3 1705.3
HARDENED CONCRETE FOOTNOTE
MEMBERS. ‘b’.
☒ A. ADHESIVE X ACI 318: 7.8.2.4
ANCHORS
INSTALLED IN
HORIZONTALLY
OR UPWARDLY
INCLINED
ORIENTATIONS
TO RESIST
SUSTAINED
TENSION LOADS.
☒ B. MECHANICAL X ACI 318: 17.8.2
AND ADHESIVE
ANCHORS NOT
DEFINED IN “A”.
☒ VERIFY USE OF 3 A.2 X 100% ACI 318 Ch. 19, 1904.1,
REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. 26.4.3, 26.4.4 1904.2,
1908.2,
1908.3
☒ PRIOR TO CONCRETE 3 A.2 X ASTM C172 1908.10
PLACEMENT,
FABRICATE SPECIMENS
FOR STRENGTH TESTS,
PERFORM SLUMP AND
ASTM C31
ACI 318:26.4.5,
26.12
AIR CONTENT TESTS,
AND DETERMINE THE
TEMPERATURE OF
CONCRETE.
☒ A. TAKE SIX
STANDARD
CYLINDERS FOR
EACH WORK
AREA.
☒ B. RECORD TIME
CONCRETE IS
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-15
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
BATCHED, AND
TIME CONCRETE
IS SAMPLED
☒ C. PERFORM ONE
SLUMP TEST FOR
EACH AREA; TWO
IF THE
CONCRETE IS
PUMPED.
☒ D. MEASURE AIR
CONTENT.
☒ E. RECORD
CONCRETE AND
AMBIENT AIR
TEMPERATURE.
☒ F. RECORD UNIT
WEIGHT OF
CONCRETE.
☒ G. PERFORM
COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH
TESTS.
☒ INSPECT CONCRETE 3 A.1, A.2 X ACI 318:26.4.5 1904.6,
PLACEMENT FOR
PROPER APPLICATION
TECHNIQUES.
1904.7,
1908.8
☒ VERIFY MAINTENANCE 3 A.1, A.2 X ACI 318: 26.4.7- 1904.9
OF SPECIFIED CURING 26.4.9
TEMPERATURE AND
TECHNIQUES.
☒ INSPECT FORMWORK 1 OR 3 A.1, A.3, X ACI 318:
FOR SHAPE, LOCATION, A.4 26.10.1(b)
AND DIMENSIONS OF
CONCRETE MEMBER
BEING FORMED
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-16
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
☒ SPECIAL CASES- CONCRETE REPAIRS: SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING IS REQUIRED.
TYPE AGENT
NO.
MQIA CONT. PERIODIC REFERENCED
STANDARD
CODE
☒ INSPECT 1 OR 3 A.1, A.3 X 50% ACI 318 Ch. 1908.4
REINFORCEMENT. 20, 25.2, 25.3,
26.5.1-26.5.3
☒ VERIFY USE OF
REQUIRED
REPAIR
MATERIALS.
3 A.2 X 100%
☒ 1. INSPECT 3 A.2 X 100%
PREPARATION OF
CONCRETE
SURFACES FOR
PATCHING.
☒ 2. INSPECT 3 A.2 X 50%
INSTALLATION OF
PATCHES.
☒ 3. DOCUMENT 3 A.2 X 100%
QUANTITY OF
REPAIRS.
☒ 4. TEST PATCHED 3 A.2 X 100%
AREAS AFTER
THREE DAYS FOR
SOUNDNESS AND
DELAMINATION
BY SOUNDING
WITH A HAMMER.
☒ INSPECT FOR
MAINTENANCE OF
SPECIFIED PLACEMENT
TEMPERATURE &
CURING TECHNIQUES.
3 A.2 X 50%
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-17
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
☒ FRP REINFORCING: SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED. (1705.1.1)
TYPE AGENT
NO.
MQIA CONT. PERIODIC REFERENCED
STANDARD
CODE
☒ INSPECT
PREPARATIONS AND
APPLICATION
3 N.3 X 1705.1.1
☒ SAMPLE AND TEST: 3 N.3 ASTM D7522, 1705.1.1
A. PERFORM ASTM X ASTM D4541
D7522 AND D4541
IN-SITU TEST PER
SPECIFICATIONS.
B. PERFORM LAB X
TENSION TESTS
PER
SPECIFICATIONS.
☒ STEEL CONSTRUCTION: SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED. (TABLE 1705.2.1)
TYPE AGENT
NO.
MQIA CONT. PERIODIC REFERENCED
STANDARD
CODE
☒ MATERIAL VERIFICATION
OF STRUCTURAL STEEL:
☒ A. IDENTIFICATION 1 OR 3 E.1-E.3 X 100%
MARKINGS TO
CONFORM TO
ASTM STANDARDS
SPECIFIED IN THE
APPROVED
CONSTRUCTION
DOCUMENTS.
☒ B. MANUFACTURER’S 1 X 100%
CERTIFIED MILL
TEST REPORTS
REQUIRED.
☒ MINIMUM INSPECTIONS
PRIOR TO WELDING
3 D.1, D.2,
M.1
X AISC 360 TABLE
N5.4-1
☒ MINIMUM INSPECTIONS
DURING WELDING
3 D.1, D.2,
M.1
X AISC 360 TABLE
N5.4-2
☒ MINIMUM INSPECTIONS
AFTER WELDING
3 D.1, D.2,
M.1
X 100% AISC 360 TABLE
N5.4-3
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-18
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
☒ UT SHALL BE 3 D.1, D.2, AISC 360 N5.5b
PERFORMED ON CJP M.1
GROOVE WELDS
SUBJECTS TO
TRANSVERSELY
APPLIED TENSION
LOADING IN BUTT-T, AND
CORNER JOINTS
☒ B. FOR RISK X 10%
CATEGORY II
STRUCTURES
☒ MAGNETIC PARTICLE
SHALL BE PERFORMED
ON FILLET WELDS
X 10%
☒ MINIMUM INSPECTION
AFTER HIGH-STRENGTH
BOLTING
3 E.1, M.1 X AISC 360 TABLE
N5.6-3
☒ MINIMUM INSPECTIONS
FOR SNUG-TIGHT HIGH-
STRENGTH BOLTING –
100% VISUAL.
3 E.1, M.1 X
☒ INSPECT FABRICATED 1 OR 3 E.1, E.2, X AISC 360 N5.7
OR ERECTED STEEL AS E.3, M.1
APPROPRIATE TO
VERIFY COMPLIANCE
WITH THE
CONSTRUCTION
DRAWINGS. INSPECT
BRACES, STIFFENERS,
MEMBER LOCATIONS,
AND JOINT DETAILS.
☒ INSPECT DURING
PLACEMENT OF ANCHOR
RODS AND OTHER
EMBEDMENTS
SUPPORTING
STRUCTURAL STEEL
FOR COMPLIANCE WITH
THE CONSTRUCTION
DRAWINGS.
1 OR 3 A.1, A.2,
A.3, A.4
X AISC 360 N5.7
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-19
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
☒ PERFORM PULL-OUT 3 E.1 X 100% ACI 318 17.8.2
TESTS ON DRILLED-IN,
ADHESIVE, EXPANSION,
AND SLEEVE ANCHORS:
☒ A. TEST 10% OF
EACH ANCHOR
TYPE (MINIMUM OF
2) BY APPLYING A
LOAD EQUAL TO
125% ALLOWABLE
PULL-OUT
STRENGTH.
☒ B. TEST 100% OF
ANCHORS BY
PULLING WITH A
CLAW HAMMER
USING THE
WEIGHT OF ONE
MAN.
☒ C. ADHESIVE X ACI 318 17.8.2.4
ANCHORS
INSTALLED IN
HORIZONTALLY
OR UPWARDLY
INCLINED
ORIENTATIONS TO
RESIST
SUSTAINED
TENSION LOADS.
3.0 DOCUMENTATION
3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS
A. Detailed reports shall be prepared of each test or inspection. The reports shall include the
following general information:
4.0 DOCUMENTATION
4.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS
B. Detailed reports shall be prepared of each test or inspection. The reports shall include the
following general information:
1. Project name and number.
2. Date of test or inspection.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-20
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
3. Name of Testing Agency or Inspecting Agency.
4. Name of technician or inspector.
5. Weather conditions.
6. Locations and elevations of specific areas tested or inspected referenced to gridlines.
7. Description of test or inspection.
8. Reference to applicable ASTM standard.
9. Summary of observations, results, and recommendations.
10. Description of any areas or materials requiring retesting or re-inspection.
C. Concrete compressive strength test reports shall contain the following information:
1. Name of Contractor and concrete supplier.
2. Name of concrete testing service.
3. Name of technician making and testing specimens.
4. Truck number and delivery ticket number.
5. Date and location within the structure of concrete placement.
6. Concrete type, class, mix proportions of materials, and design compressive strength at
28 days.
7. Slump, air content, unit weight, and concrete temperature.
8. Total time period between batching and completion of placement for each truck.
9. Compressive strength and type of break for all tests.
D. Field reports for concrete inspection shall contain the general information noted above, plus
ambient temperature and cylinder numbers.
E. Test reports for masonry materials shall include proportions, composition, and compressive
strength.
4.2 COMMUNICATION
A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall immediately notify the Owner, Contractor, Special
Inspector, and Registered Design Professional by telephone, fax, or email of any test results
failing to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. The Special Inspector shall immediately notify the Contractor of any work found to be in
nonconformance with the Contract Documents during inspections. If the nonconforming
work is not corrected while the Special Inspector is on-site, the Special Inspector shall notify
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33
Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-21
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
the Owner and Registered Design Professional within 24 hours (one business day) and issue
a nonconformance report. The Special Inspector may use the Special Inspection Non-
Conformance Report form at the end of this section or other similar form.
C. If the nonconforming work is not corrected at the time of substantial completion of the
structure or other appropriate time, the Special Inspector shall notify the Owner.
4.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS
A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit reports to the Owner, Special Inspector and the
Registered Design Professional within seven (7) days of the inspection or test. Legible
handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available.
B. The Special Inspector shall submit reports to the Owner and Registered Design Professional
within seven (7) days of the inspections. Legible handwritten reports may be submitted if
final typed copies are not available.
C. If requested by the Code Enforcement Official, the Special Inspector shall submit interim
reports which include all inspections and tests performed since the beginning of construction
or since the previous interim report. Interim reports shall be addressed to the Code
Enforcement Official with copies sent to the Registered Design Professionals (Structural
Engineer and Architect) and Contractor. Interim reports shall be signed by the agent
performing inspections.
4.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. At the completion of work, each Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit an Agent’s Final
Report of Special Inspections to the Special Inspector stating that work was completed in
substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that appropriate inspections and
tests were performed. The Testing/Inspecting Agency may use the Agent’s Final Report of
Special Inspections form provided at the end of this section or other similar form.
B. At the completion of work, the Special Inspector shall compile all inspection and test reports
generated by each Agent into a Final Report of Special Inspections. The Final Report of
Special Inspections shall state that required inspections have been performed and shall
itemize any nonconforming work not corrected or resolved.
C. The Special Inspector may use the Final Report of Special Inspections form provided at the
end of this section or other similar form based on CASE Form 102-2001.
D. The Special Inspector shall submit The Final Report of Special Inspections to the Owner,
Registered Design Professional and Code Enforcement Official prior to issuance of a
Certificate of Use and Occupancy.
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-22
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
SPECIAL INSPECTION NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT NO.
DATE: ___________________________
TO:
CC: Contractor:
FROM: ___________________________, Special Inspector
PROJECT:
PART I: REFERENCE SPECIAL INSPECTION REPORT NO.
(Attach copy of report)
DESCRIPTION OF NON-CONFORMANCE:
RDP RESPONSE: (PROVIDE ATTACHMENTS IF NECESSARY)
RDP SIGNATURE ____________________________________ DATE__________________
IS RE-INSPECTION BY SPECIAL INSPECTOR REQUIRED □ YES □ NO PART II: CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION (To be completed by either the [General Contractor or
Construction Manager] or Subcontractor and returned to the Special Inspector and the RDP.)
I verify that as of the date listed, the non-conforming item noted above has been corrected as required.
Date Completed By
(Contractor’s Site Representative)
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-23
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
AGENT’S FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
Project Name: Special Inspector:
Location: Agent:
Special Inspector’s Project:
Agent’s Project:
To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Special Inspections or testing required for this
project and designated for this Agent in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes the Schedule
of Special Inspections) submitted for permit have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been
reported and resolved other than the following:
Comments:
[Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description of uncorrected discrepancies.]
Respectfully submitted,
Agent of the Special Inspector
______________________________________________
(Type or print name)
______________________________________________
Signature Date
______________________________________________
Address
______________________________________________
City, State, Zip
Design Professional Seal
or Certification
OLIN LIBRARY CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL 01 45 33-24
TERRACE RENEWAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES APRIL 24, 2019
FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS
Project Name: Registered Design Professionals
Location: Architecture: Name
Address
Owner: CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Owner’s Address: Structural Engineering: Name
Address
Special Inspector: Name
Address
To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project and
itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes the Schedule of Special Inspections)
submitted for permit have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved
other than the following:
Comments:
[Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description of uncorrected discrepancies.]
Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part
of this final report. Agent’s Final Reports of Special Inspections are attached and are also a part of this
Final Report.
Respectfully submitted,
Special Inspector
______________________________________________
(Type or print name)
______________________________________________
Signature Date
***END OF SECTION 01 45 33***
Professional Seal
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every
kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the
Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and
complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may
direct.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide,
construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and
services.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the
Contractor’s option.
B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes,
standards and specifications.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to
render first aid at the site.
B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical
services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals.
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site.
Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor.
Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -
protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and
establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post
warnings and information.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire
alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different
levels of impairments
a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system
coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be
performed.
- Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction and FM Global.
- No fire watch will be required in most cases.
b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or
sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler
system at the same time is not allowed.
- Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having
Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building
Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service.
- Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and
contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is
the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Equipment:
1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of
the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire
Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards.
3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system.
4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each
area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building.
5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional
temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a
warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be
removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide
hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas.
6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections,
standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for
firefighting.
7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire
protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new
services are placed into operation and use.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-
protection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation
and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent
fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during
construction.
C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location.
2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project.
3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions.
4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building.
Smo king is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings.
5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible
materials and volatile conditions.
6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel.
D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection
certificate attached to each extinguisher.
E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in
accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall
provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the
operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University
Environmental Health & Safety.
F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety,
e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to
facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways,
platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other
such equipment.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings,
for use by construction personnel.
C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition.
2.5 SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports,
beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All
supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the
Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations
provided for same.
2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until
installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior
walls as work progresses for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from
exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary
to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials,
provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to
prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets.
2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of
materials.
3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or curing
requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or
detrimental conditions and effects.
B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building
occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent
damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from
construction work.
1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply
with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards.
a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with
existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture.
b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and
ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations.
2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure systems until new exterior enclosure
systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure
systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new
exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible.
3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior
enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems
are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers
as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems
and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of
water at all times.
B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of
adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such
water shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.8 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION
A. Preserve and protect existing trees, plants and lawns at the site which are designated to
remain, and those adjacent to the site.
B. Consult with Owner, and remove agreed-on roots and branches which interfere with
construction.
1. Employ certified arborist to remove, and to treat cuts.
C. Provide temporary fences to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees
and plants. Provide temporary lawn protection to prevent soil compaction. Reference Cornell
University Design Standards and Details for wood and chain fencing below.
D. Protect root zones of trees, plants and lawn areas:
1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking.
2. Do not store materials or products.
3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.
4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water.
E. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations
to prevent damage.
F. Replace, or suitably repair, trees, plants and lawn areas designated to remain which are
damaged or destroyed due to construction operations.
G. Roots 2 inches or larger that are damaged or cut during construction are to be sawed off close
to the tree side of the excavation by certified arborist.
H. During the leafing-out period in the spring, extra care should be exercised to reduce root
damage such as keeping exposed roots wet, saturating soil when backfilling around roots, and
backfilling as soon as possible.
I. Consult Cornell University Grounds Department for mitigation of roof or tree damage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-7
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-8
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2.9 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to
protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing
the construction site.
1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert
persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards.
2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper
barricades.
3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and
employees.
2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner.
2.11 FIELD OFFICES
A. Provide a Field office facility as required to support the Contractor's activity on the job site.
Facilities shall be maintained in a condition so as not to detract from the overall Campus
appearance. Installation shall be in a suitable location on the site as agreed to by the Owner.
B. Costs shall be based on either purchase price or total anticipated rental, whichever is lower.
The quantity and rental rates of all Field office facilities, whether rented from third parties or
owned by the Contractor, shall be subject to the prior written approval of Cornell.
C. Field Office shall include at a minimum the following:
1. Skirting shall be required on all temporary job site trailers.
D. Within fifteen (15) days of execution of the contract, contact Cornell Facilities Inventory
Office to acquire a valid facility code and address for the all on-site construction trailers.
Such identification is required for the Campus Police 911 Emergency Response System.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures
and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be
affected by execution of the work.
1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other
temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the
Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-9
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by
Contract Documents.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40.
B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout.
C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner.
D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality
specified for the original installation.
E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements,
and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site.
F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste
matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to
the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s
Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal
of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week.
G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction
debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.3 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction.
2. At completion of the Project.
B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal.
C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to
original condition.
1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and
utilities.
2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and
slopes, and clean the area.
***END OF SECTION 01 50 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for
construction. Remove on completion of Work.
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and
distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company
requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must
not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and
standards.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the
Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its
operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the
Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall
be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power.
The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as
long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to
meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage
of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the
Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and
charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor.
C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no
longer required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be
maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The
required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven
(7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in
all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All
temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code.
E. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction
equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators.
The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently
installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so
that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's
Representative for drainage or for temporary heat.
F. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the
Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and
cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule
shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of
the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges
relating to shutdowns.
G. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal
The Contractor shall:
1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the
Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary
service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any
additional cost entailed thereby.
2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's
Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the
Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work.
B. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required.
2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times.
B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work.
C. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
OLIN LIBRARY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide adequate toilet and washing facilities for the use of personnel and employees; locate
convenient to work stations.
B. Existing plumbing facilities shall not be used by construction personnel.
C. Facilities may be portable chemical-type toilets or temporary flush toilets connected to
sanitary sewer, screened for privacy.
D. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in a neat, clean and sanitary condition.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to
original, condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 51 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 23
Ithaca, New York HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION
OLIN LIBRARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 01 51 23-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain existing or temporary building heating systems to accomplish
the following:
1. Protect the existing facility and facility plumbing systems against damage due to cold
temperatures.
2. Provide sufficient heat so that the Work can be accomplished in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
3. Maintain construction schedules as required by the Contract.
B. Include in the bid price an amount necessary to provide Construction Heat as required.
C. No natural gas is available to the facility for temporary heat.
D. At the conclusion of the project the facility heating systems shall be returned to functional
order as necessary to protect the building and facility plumbing systems.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall include in the bid the cost of the temporary heat.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs to the facility necessitated by the failure to
provide heat during any portion of the Work.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 51 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 57 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 57 13 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and implementing an Erosion and Sediment
Control Plan.
B. This Section describes minimum standards for the prevention and control of erosion during
the construction process and may not be sufficient for all sites. The Contractor shall remain
responsible for the means and methods of preventing erosion and may be required to employ
additional means and methods as required to prevent violations of local, state, or federal
standards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, as specified herein.
B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
1.3 PLAN AND IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Plan shall comply with design specifications in the New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion
and Sediment Control, NYS Stormwater Management Design Manual, NYSDEC Technical
and Operational Guidance Series, good engineering practices, and this Section.
B. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the Environmental
Health and Safety Office, and implemented prior to any site work.
C. Maintain Erosion and Sediment Control measures throughout the course of site construction
activities until vegetative growth is established to the Owner’s satisfaction.
D. At conclusion of the Project, remove all remaining temporary erosion control structures and
properly dispose of accumulated sediment on-site in areas approved by the Owner.
1.4 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
A. At no time shall construction operations or any related disturbance of the site result in the
impairment of local waterways. “Impairment” is defined by regulations as including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. The release of water into receiving waters that causes a substantial visible contrast to
natural conditions; or
2. The deposition of significant sediment into such waters.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 57 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. Such deficiencies shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor to prevent further
impairment.
C. In addition, and without notice to the Contractor, the Owner shall also have the right, based
on the Owner’s independent assessment, to stop work or engage other contractor(s) to
construct or correct such work as may be necessary to prevent the impairment of waterways,
and to charge all costs related to such corrective or additional actions against the Contract.
D. Acceptance of an Erosion and Sediment Control plan shall not in any way imply that the plan
will be adequate in preventing impairment of waters, or that maintenance and modification
will not be necessary. Rather, acceptance of the plan authorizes the Contractor to begin
installation of the control measures under the assumption the appropriate maintenance and
modification will be required throughout the life of the project to meet the project
requirements.
E. The Contractor’s responsibilities under this Section shall end upon final completion and
payment of the Work of the entire Contract.
1.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN COMPONENTS
A. The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan submitted shall specifically address project measures,
features, and areas critical to proper site erosion and sediment control. The Plan shall
specifically include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Site Map, to scale;
2. Measures to prevent stormwater from running onto the disturbed areas of the site;
3. Inlet protection for storm sewers and catch basins;
4. Measures to be used for dewatering; and
5. Measures to be used for soil stabilization, runoff control, and sediment control,
including specific measures for the following:
a. Site entrance stabilization
b. Staging areas
c. Material and soil stock piles
d. Concrete curing operations
e. Disturbed areas of the site
In addition to the requirements included in these specifications, specific erosion control
measures shown on the Contract Drawings, if any, shall also be required.
B. All features shall be designed and installed in accordance with the references included in
Paragraph 1.3 – Plan and Implementation General Requirements of this Section.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 57 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
OLIN LIBRARY SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. Keep access roads and public roads clear of mud and construction debris at all times.
Maintain dust control measures throughout construction.
1.6 INSPECTIONS
A. At the sole discretion of the Owner, inspections may be performed by a third party or on-staff
representative of the Owner.
1. The Owner may inspect the site at any time, without prior notification, for compliance
with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and applicable local, state and federal
regulations. Any instances of non-compliances or failure to meet the performance
standards found must be resolved within 24 hours, with more immediate responses as
required to mitigate active erosion during storm events or similar instances.
2. Modify the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan as necessary, to provide full compliance
with the performance standards.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 57 13***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00
Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN LIBRARY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be
incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent
manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source.
B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas.
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means
and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction space.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,
storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation.
E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct and products are undamaged.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement or damage.
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE
A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat
and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with
the daily functioning of the Institution.
B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored
weatherproof temporary storage sheds.
C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00
Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN LIBRARY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The
Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact
on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no
impact at all on the Campus.
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid
overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to
exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored
materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work.
F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or
equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall
move such materials or equipment.
1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE
A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road location
shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or
replacement of property due to any cause of loss.
B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm
Road storage site associated with the Contractor’s storage.
C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the
Palm Road site.
D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination
caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for
cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found.
E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the
Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the
site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally
or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all
contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows:
1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an
investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the
incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally.
F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm
Road site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents.
G. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell
standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305
West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579,
Email – db@ithacaplastics.com.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00
Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN LIBRARY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.5 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be
necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor
shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished
by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work.
B. Protection of Utilities
1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities,
pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions
to protect existing facilities from damage.
2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The
Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of
its operation.
C. Protective Covering
1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows:
a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways
or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately
against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades.
b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the
Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks,
gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected,
which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to
satisfaction of Owner.
c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished
concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over
these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires
on wheels.
d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring
during all phases of the work including after installation.
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with
plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the
building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including
but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc.
2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction
of contaminants:
a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap
to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until
immediately prior to installation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00
Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
OLIN LIBRARY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the
manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process.
c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the
weather.
d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles.
e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the
construction process.
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in
immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of
openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used
by construction personnel.
D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to
foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy
objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will
occur.
E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from
manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of
adjacent unprotected areas.
F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 66 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 71 23
Ithaca, New York FIELD ENGINEERING
OLIN LIBRARY FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering services required for the Project.
1. Survey work required in execution of the Project.
2. Verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions shown on Drawings.
3. Lay out Work from established control points and bench marks.
4. Coordinate the Work of all trades.
5. It may be necessary at times to discontinue portions of Contractor's work in order that
the Owner's Representative may check measurements or surveys without interruptions
or other interferences that might impair the accuracy of the results. At any time, on
request of the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall discontinue its work to such
extent as may be necessary for this purpose and shall cooperate in all reasonable means
to the extent of providing labor, tools, or materials to assist the Owner's Representative
in making measurements and surveys.
6. Notwithstanding anything set forth above, it shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor to complete the works within the tolerances of lines and grades as given on
the drawings. No direct payment or claim for additional compensation will be allowed
the Contractor for any work or delay occasioned by the Owner's Representative
establishing or checking lines or grades or making other measurements, and no
extension of time will be allowed for such delays.
B. Owner's Representative will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes
indicated on the drawings, as required.
1.2 QUALIFICATION OF SURVEYOR
A. The Surveyor shall be a registered civil engineer or registered land surveyor, licensed in the
state in which the Project is located and acceptable to the Owner.
1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Project are those designated on drawings.
B. Locate and protect control points prior to occupation of the site, and preserve all reference
points during construction.
1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written approval of the Architect and
Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 71 23
Ithaca, New York FIELD ENGINEERING
OLIN LIBRARY FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2. Report to Owner when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation
because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
3. Require surveyor to replace reference points which may be lost or destroyed.
a. Establish replacements based on original survey control.
C. The Contractor shall provide and shall maintain axis lines on each floor and shall establish
and shall maintain grade marks 4' 0" above the finished floor on each floor level.
D. The Contractor shall furnish such stakes and other required equipment, tools and materials,
and all labor as may be required in laying out any part of the Work.
1.4 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to start of construction operations, review and verify figures shown on Drawings and
on surveys furnished by Owner.
B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate
means for site improvements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil replacement, utility slopes
and invert elevations, batter boards for structures, foundations, column locations and floor
levels, and controlling lines and levels required for the mechanical and electrical trades.
C. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods.
1.5 RECORDS
A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.
1. Make available to Architect and Owner on request: field books, notes, logs and other
data developed in performing survey and control work.
2. Maintain a record plan at field office for the information and use of all parties, recording
reference points, control points and bench marks.
B. On completion of foundations and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey
showing all dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and turn over to
Owner. Submit copies of certified survey in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Record
Documents.
C. When all enclosing walls are complete, certify the location and plumb of the walls.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written qualifications of surveyor to Architect and Owner prior to starting survey
work.
B. Submit name and address of Professional Engineer to the Architect.
C. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 71 23
Ithaca, New York FIELD ENGINEERING
OLIN LIBRARY FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. Submit certificate signed by registered engineer or registered surveyor certifying that
elevations and improvements are in conformance, or nonconformance, with Contract
Documents.
1. Indicate on record drawings all variations from Contract Drawings.
2. Indicate horizontal locations and elevations of all existing underground utilities
encountered during excavation and construction.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 71 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN LIBRARY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation
and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or
new surfaces and finishes.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative:
1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work.
2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified.
3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work.
4. Patch work uncovered or removed.
C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof.
D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the
Owner’s Representative.
E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit
details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original
structure.
F. Openings and Chases
1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to
complete the Work as set forth in the Contract.
2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided,
build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN LIBRARY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution
of the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or
excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of
any portion of the Project. Include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected work.
3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the
Project.
5. Description of the proposed work:
a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation.
7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.
B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original
installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions
and Product Options.
C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the
work will be uncovered.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that
would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching
structural elements, including but not limited to the following:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN LIBRARY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
c. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel and lintels
e. Structural decking
f. Miscellaneous structural metals
g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems
h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports
i. Equipment supports
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in
a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and
patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased
maintenance or decreased operation life or safety.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching
the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment
b. Air or smoke barriers
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems
f. Control systems
g. Communication systems
h. Electrical wiring systems
i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s
aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner.
D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any
structural members without written permission of the Owner.
1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes
a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or
repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN LIBRARY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and
roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to
be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or
guarantee/warranty in force for membrane.
2. Water Tightness
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and
workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general
practice to be watertight.
b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through
foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight.
c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water
tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before
installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and
approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at
no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with
materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved.
B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical
materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will
equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of in-
place or existing materials.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to
movement during:
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavation and backfilling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN LIBRARY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or
performance of the work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with
the work until the Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that
portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties.
D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations
free from water.
E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining
areas.
F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be
removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to
restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely
to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to
receive new work.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly
to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily
cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished
side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of
services is required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN LIBRARY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing
patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent
finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize
plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing
system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform
visual appearance.
5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an
even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor
and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform
color and appearance.
a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and
comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-
plane surface of uniform appearance.
7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU
units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint
profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible
with in-place materials.
8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and
masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar
joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory
materials compatible with in-place materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN LIBRARY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-7
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to
a weather-tight condition.
a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for
cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base
sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards,
accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top
mounted items.
D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable
for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with
an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent
settlement or damage to other work.
F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with
specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work
in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure
disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain
even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and
patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features
before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its
original condition.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
***END OF SECTION 01 73 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00
Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. Substantial Completion:
1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has
reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and
apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall
conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract
have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare
and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list),
indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection
of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements
of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is
acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed
and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect
has determined that the work is substantially complete.
3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the
inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part
of the Work found to be incomplete or defective.
4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating
Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca
Building Department.
a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or
reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System
Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance
with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code
of NYS.
b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require
the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems
that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS
and NFPA.
c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance
Testing for the Following Conditions:
- Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire
detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00
Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
- Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more
than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from
the rest of the system
- Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump.
- A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components.
- A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been
modified.
- A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been
replaced or the control unit software has been replaced.
- A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan
control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified
- An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the
actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement.
- A modification or extension of the piping fur a fire standpipe system where
a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected,
the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and
Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform
the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final
inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete
work will be furnished to the Contractor.
2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions,
omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an
inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final
inspection.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels,
casework, equipment, and building systems.
B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final
Completion.
C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00
Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the
completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any
kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion
of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings,
rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under
its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall
restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its
failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor,
and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but
not be limited to the following:
1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes
cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by
such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications.
2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and
existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned.
3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire
floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of
the flooring.
5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing
condition.
6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement
of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace
all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean.
7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning.
8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began.
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain
signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00
Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
OLIN LIBRARY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.5 ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION TRAILER REMOVAL
A. Within fifteen (15) days of removal of on-site construction trailers, contact Cornell Facilities
Inventory Office to notify them of removal to allow for updating of Campus Police 911
Emergency Response System.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 77 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22
Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
OLIN LIBRARY FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and
an Excel template.
B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in
Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the
Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall
include:
1. Name of Product
2. Equipment Classification
3. Manufacturer
4. Model Number
5. Serial Number
6. Cost
7. Location (including Building and Room Number)
8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation)
C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel
template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and
specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the
Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its’
disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in
close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access
point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects.
E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with
the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The
Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e.
- O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22
Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
OLIN LIBRARY FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST
• Building Equipment
• AC Drive/VSD
• Air Dryer
• Backflow Preventor
• Air Compressor
• Building
• Sprinkler
• Control
• Vacuum
• Pump
• Condensate
• Glycol
• CWC
• HWC
• Potable
• Sanitary Sewer
• Storm Sewer
• Sump
• Quality Water
• Fuel
• Fan
• Exhaust
• Supply
• Return
• Fume Hood
• Furnace
• Generator
• Hot Water Heater
• Heat Exchangers
• Boiler
• Tank
• Unit Heater
• Fan Coil
• VAV Box
• Transfer Switch
• Motor
• Pump
• Fan
• Lift/Levelers
• Water Softener
• Reverse Osmosis
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22
Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
OLIN LIBRARY FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.2 ROOF SYSTEM INVENTORY
A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Roof System Attributes to be
inventoried in an Excel template.
B. The Contractor shall provide a dimensioned roof plan of the facility drawn to scale, Auto
CAD or Microstation format. Each roof panel of the roof system is to be labeled with a
unique ROOF ID number that will reference the Excel template to properly inventory Roof
System Attributes of each panel. Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return
to the drawings to the Owner’s Representative for review and approval.
1. Entire Roof Replacement Projects for a Facility: The Contractor is to assign a ROOF
ID to each panel of the newly installed roofing system. The ROOF ID will be comprised
of the unique Cornell Facility Code number followed by an underscore and a three digit
number. (i.e. - Day Hall (Facility Code: 2026) - ROOF ID: 2006_001).
2. Partial Roof Replacement Projects for a Facility: The Owner will provide a graphically
representation of the facility’s roof plan with the ROOF ID numbers already assigned
to each panel of the roof . The Contractor is responsible to transfer the assigned ROOF
ID numbers to their new drawings to be returned to the Owner’s representatives.
C. The Contractor shall populate the template. Once populated, the Contractor shall
electronically return the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on
each panel of the newly installed roof system shall include:
1. Roof Classification
2. Manufacturer (If applicable)
3. Description of System
4. Roof Material
5. Installation Type
6. Slope of Roof (Low or Steep)
7. Roof ID (See Section 1.1.B) for additional information
8. Area of Roof Panel (SF)
9. Contractor (Installer of Roof System)
10. Warranty Number (If applicable)
11. Warranty Expiration Date (If applicable)
12. Material Warranty Number (If applicable)
13. Material Warranty Expiration Date (If applicable)
14. Asbestos Present (If any material remained in place during the reroofing project)
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22
Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
OLIN LIBRARY FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
15. Insulation (Yes or No), Fastening type, Thickness
16. Flashing Material
17. Gutter Type (If applicable)
18. Downspout Type (If applicable)
19. Roof Drain Type (If Applicable)
20. Roofing Substrate
21. Facility (State or Endowed)
22. Vapor Barrier Type
23. Installation Date
24. Cost per Square Foot
25. Remaining Useful Life (RUL)
26. Type of Heat Trace Element (If applicable)
27. Type Snow Guard Systems (If applicable)
28. Additional Comments as Applicable
D. The Contractor shall electronically submit the Roof System data as specified above and any
related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals and Warranty data) to the Owner’s
Representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 22***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN LIBRARY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in
other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed
work.
2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior
to substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment
and systems.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in
final form.
1. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”.
b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file.
c. Drawings in electronic format
- Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14
or higher format.
d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of
equipment.
- Provide type description of product, and major component parts of
equipment.
- Provide indexed PDF bookmarks.
- Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index
with hyperlinks to the various documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN LIBRARY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS".
List:
- Title of Project
- Identity of separate structure as applicable.
- Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume.
3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in
Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete reference to inapplicable information.
C. Submittal Data:
1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a
clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect
the “as-installed” system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN LIBRARY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct
illustration of completed installation.
3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
d. Certification as to asbestos free
2. Instructions for care and maintenance:
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the
product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN LIBRARY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards
b. Chemical composition
c. Details of installation
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN LIBRARY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN LIBRARY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of
Specifications and General Conditions.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents
thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals.
B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase
of the Project.
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance.
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and
maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products,
equipment and systems:
1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating
and maintenance personnel.
B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction:
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of
operations and maintenance.
C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been
instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction.
2. Equipment and Systems Operated.
3. Length of Instruction Period.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
OLIN LIBRARY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-7
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's
personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. All operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner
for operating all systems and equipment.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN LIBRARY WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and
bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on
products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of
workmanship and materials.
2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout."
3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that
are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2
through 40.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner
are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the
products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to
countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual
manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to
the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN LIBRARY WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater
rights for the Owner
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed
requirements relating to warranties and bonds.
B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor
shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following
acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance,
materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents.
B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner.
Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by
Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work.
Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s
required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to
Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding
items, if any.
1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a
system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time
(employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner,
an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an
emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours
and may require action during non-normal working hours.
2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action
to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or
repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s
representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way
jeopardize the existing warranty.
3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary
adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility.
4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the
necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours,
the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and
charge the Contractor for parts and labor.
5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are
done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future
warranty claims.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN LIBRARY WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove
and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be
removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace
or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective
Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion
of its anticipated useful service life.
F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied
warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available
under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in
which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to
purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project
guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it
has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are
willing to do so.
H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is
required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept
the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such
commitments are willing to do so.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial
Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a
commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the
Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the
Architect or Owner.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the
Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period,
submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days
of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and
a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a
draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN LIBRARY WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the
respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include
the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor.
B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to
the various documents and or references.
C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the
respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each
item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Item description.
3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat)
4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer?
5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number.
6. Scope.
7. Duration.
a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract
b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
8. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
OLIN LIBRARY WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
request for payment.
B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date
of acceptance as the start of the warranty period.
3.3 ROOF WARRANTY PACKAGE
A. Roof warranties shall explicitly denote the specific roof panel identification number (ROOF
ID) for which the warranty applies to.
B. Roof panel identification numbers shall be generated in accordance with 01 78 22, FIXED
EQUIPMENT INVENTORY.
C. Roof warranties shall include a dimensioned roof plan with roof panel identification numbers
generated in accordance with 01 78 22, FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY.
***END OF SECTION 01 78 36***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions.
6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
7. Field Test records
8. Construction photographs
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples apart from documents used for construction.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform
Construction Index.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative
and the Architect.
1.3 RECORDING
A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
C. Survey Mapping
1. Provide an accurate topographic, planimetric, utility map of as-built conditions, and
mapped locations and elevations of constructed facilities / elements including as-built
and exposed underground utilities. Survey work in progress as required to accurately
locate constructed facilities / elements. Survey final condition of project extents at final
acceptance.
a. Site related elements including:
- Sidewalks, ramps, curbs, and gutters - indicate type and surface material.
- Streets, drive ways, parking areas, labeled with material.
- Fences, walls, steps, handrails, signs, site furniture and light fixtures labeled
with material.
- Live trees which have a trunk diameter of three inches (3”) or greater and
all isolated or specimen trees. Measure tree trunk 3’ above grade. Indicate
approximate trunk diameter, “drip line” and common name of tree.
- Shrubs, show outlines of shrub masses.
- Streams and bodies of water.
b. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure including:
- Manholes, catch basins, drain inlets, cleanouts, vent stacks, tanks,
underdrains, foundation drains, monitoring wells,
detention/retention/filtration facilities. Label type (sanitary or storm),
dimensions and material of structure and cover/grate; pipe connections;
sizes, materials, direction of flow and invert elevations. Locate and identify
size, material, and invert elevations for culverts.
- Water, gas, central steam, chilled water or other pressure lines, valve boxes,
meter boxes, hydrants, tanks, fittings, etc. Label type, size, material,
elevations at building walls and all intersections, connections and vertical
angle changes.
- Utility poles, above and below ground lines including but not limited to
power, street lighting, traffic control communication and sensors, telephone,
television, communication, fire and police call boxes, public
communication or display facilities. Label utility as direct buried, in
conduit, or concrete encased duct. Identify elevations at building walls and
all intersections, connections and vertical angle changes. Label all utilities
and associated duct banks or conduits with sizes and materials.
- Existing and abandoned utilities exposed during construction. Show ends
of abandoned utilities left in place and assumed continued direction of
utilities. Label with information as listed above.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
2. Survey mapping shall be done under the personal supervision of a Surveyor, registered
in and licensed by the State of New York, who shall certify under his/her seal the
accuracy of the survey.
3. Field Survey Accuracy:
- Horizontal and Vertical mapping shall be ACSM Second Order Class II, 1
in 20,000.
4. Coordinate base:
- NAD83-86 geodetic system with grid values in the New York Central State
Plane coordinate system in feet with elevations in NAVD ’88 in feet.
5. Each different feature shall be drafted on a separate named CAD level/layer in
Microstation or AutoCAD format using industry standard symbology of color, line
style, line weight, and cells.
6. Provide an ASCII file list of coordinates for all survey points including control, feature,
and topographic in the following comma delimited format: Point number, Northing
coordinate, Easting coordinate, Elevation coordinate, Point description.
7. Topography and spot elevations:
a. Topographic contours shall be accurately plotted at one foot (1’) contour intervals.
b. Record spot grade elevations as follows:
i. Within natural ground and lawn and planted areas, spot elevations shall be
shown to one-tenth of a foot (0.1’). Within all areas of built-up improvements
such as pavements, curbs, steps, walls, utility and drainage systems or other
site improvements, spot elevations shall be shown to one-hundredth of a foot
(0.01’).
ii. Existing grade at building corners; and thresholds and finished floor at all
entrance, exit, or access points.
iii. Develop road cross sections at 50-foot intervals maximum, record spot
elevations for all drive centerlines and all beginning radius of street
intersections. For each cross section obtain elevations for front and back of
existing sidewalk, top and bottom of curb, and centerline of the street. Obtain
elevations for centerline intersection of all roads.
iv. For trees of three inches to eighteen inches (3” - 18”) in diameter, record
elevation at high and low side at base of trunk. For specimen trees of
eighteen inches (18”) or greater diameter, indicate four (4) spot elevations on
the north, south, east, and west at base of each trunk to one-hundredth (.01)
foot elevation.
v. Base, top, corners, and at cheek walls for all steps. Indicate elevations at top
and bottom of walls and curbs.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
vi. Rim elevations of all catch basins, drain inlets, manholes, valve boxes, slabs
on grade. Inverts at all sewer pipes and culverts. Bottom of structure floor
and sump.
D. Drawings
As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract
Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day
basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a
drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites
the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for
producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional,
or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall
be subject to approval of the Owner.
The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or
Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all
changes to the following areas of construction:
1. Architectural:
a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code
b. Wall, door, window locations
c. Built in casework locations
d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations
e. Material and products where submittals are requested
2. Civil and Structural
a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical
b. Materials and products where submittals are requested
c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems
d. Site related elements including:
- Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts,
significant architectural projections and other pertinent data.
e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete
reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during
construction.
f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems
g. Geotechnical subsurface information
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-5
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
h. Items that will require future maintenance
i. Life safety critical items
3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection)
a. Products where submittals are requested
b. Final locations of all equipment.
c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork.
d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork.
e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators.
f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance
dampers and fire dampers.
g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations.
h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas,
sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing,
including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves,
meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm
water drainage.
4. Electrical
a. Products where submittals were requested.
b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type.
c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access
Control/Security systems.
d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and
power supplies.
e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits
and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of
Change Order or job conditions.
5. Environmental
a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure
b. Storm water maintenance/testing access points
c. Location of unusual excavation findings / contaminated soil (i.e. mercury
uncovered during excavation, also on-site spills during construction), including
quantity excavated/disposed.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-6
TERRACE RENEWAL APRIL 24, 2019
E. Specifications and Addenda
Legibly mark each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract close-out, submit through ePM system.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. Title and number of each record document
5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate
6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 39**
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
OLIN LIBRARY TERRACE RENEWAL
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
ITHACA, NEW YORK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 31 26
Ithaca, New York EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFO
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFO 02 31 26-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 02 31 26 - EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFO
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION
A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the information provided to bidders and is not
designed to serve as a specification for abatement. They provide Owner's information for Bidders'
convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They
are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing
conditions.
1.2 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
A. An existing asbestos report for this project, prepared by “Watts Architecture & Engineering” dated May
17th, 2018 is available for reference. Refer to the appended document.
1.3 LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS
A. No sampling was conducted. Bidders shall assume that lead based materials may be disturbed as part of
this project.
END OF SECTION 02 31 26
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 41 19
Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building, structure and roofing.
2. Removal, salvaging, transporting and turn-over of selected portions of the roofing to the owner.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to
be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent dama ge, and
deliver to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where
indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are
not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct
selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with
selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be selectively
demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is provided in Section 00 31 26 – Existing
Hazardous Materials Information. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous
materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except
under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 41 19
Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-2
April 24th, 2019
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 – Standard for Safeguarding Constructions, Alteration and
Demolition Operations.
2.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SHORING MATERIALS
A. Proprietary shoring components and other products or materials used for temporary shoring an d bracing
shall be in good condition and of adequate strength to support intended loads with appropriate safety
factors.
B. Shoring components and materials that are damaged shall not be used. If damaged during use, replace.
C. Shoring components and materials shall be reviewed by a competent person prior to use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective de molition operations.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to dete rmine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a
written report to Architect.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01
"Summary."
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 41 19
Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-3
April 24th, 2019
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used
facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people and damage to adjacent building and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and
from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between selective demolition of ex isting
construction on exterior surfaces and new construction to prevent water leakage and damage to
structure and interior areas.
3. Provide secure barriers between existing construction scheduled to remain and selective
demolition area to prevent unauthorized entry into occupied portions of building.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to
preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain
and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
2. Shoring shall be designed by a New York State registered Professional Engineer to adequately
support existing conditions to remain while removals and demolition operations proceed.
3. Shoring shall meet local and national standards and regulations, including OSHA regulations.
4. Shoring shall remain in place until the affected area has been stabilized and resupported by
permanent structural framing and until reviewed and accepted by the Registered Design
Professional (Structural).
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by ne w construction and
as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and
as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or
small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,
such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting
flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-
cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items. Do not salvage any item that may have hazardous materials on it.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 41 19
Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-4
April 24th, 2019
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make
item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective
demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated
to remain Owner's property, remove demolished ma terials from Project site.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey
debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 02 82 13 - ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all labor, materials facilities, equipment, services, employee training and testing, and permits
necessary to perform the disposal in accordance with these specifications, the latest regulations from the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), the State of New York (includes Code Rule 56), the recommendations of the National Institute
of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), and any other applicable federal, state and local government
regulation. Whenever there is a conflict or overlap of the above references, the most stringent provision
is applicable.
1. Scope of work generally consists of but is not limited to removal of asbestos co ntaining materials
(ACM) around door frames and metal column covers on the roof areas as indicated on the
drawings, notes and test reports.
B. All work is to be done in accordance with Part 56 of Title 12 NYCRR. The Contractor's attention is
directed to the following special requirements:
1. All operations are to be confined to areas indicated.
2. The Contractor is to submit a work plan and schedule showing the containment areas.
3. Moveable objects within the work areas will be removed from these areas by the Owner. Large
objects remaining in place must be cleaned and covered in accordance with this Section.
4. The work may be completed in accordance with In-Plant operations provided that all applicable
NYSDOL ICR56 requirements are met.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 02 31 26 "Existing Hazardous Materials Information” for sampling and testing results.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Owner approval is required of the asbestos abatement Contractor qualifications and will be based upon
submission at the time of bidding by the Contractor evidence of the following:
1. Personnel:
a. Competent Person (as defined by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101):
1) Education and Training: Demonstrate education and specialized training with
successful completion of examination of an EPA approved course.
2) Minimum Experience: Participation in two projects of comparable complexity with
this project.
b. Superintendent and Foreman:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-2
April 24th, 2019
1) Training and knowledge of applicable regulations and expertise in safety and
environmental protection as evidenced by the participation and successful
completion of training course offered by an EPA endorsed education institutio n.
2) Experience with abatement work as evidenced through participation in at least two
asbestos abatement projects of comparable complexity with this project.
c. Workmen:
1) Training as evidenced by the participation and successful completion of training
course given by a qualified competent person on all aspects of the latest OSHA
regulations for asbestos abatement work.
2) Skills and experience with all phases of abatement work as evidenced through
participation in at least two asbestos abatement projects of compara ble complexity
with this project.
1.3 CODE RULE 56 LICENSING & CERTIFICATION – NYS DOL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor must hold a current valid asbestos handling license issued by the Commissioner of
Health.
B. A copy of a valid asbestos handling license or other p roof of the issuance of a valid asbestos handling
license deemed suitable by the NYS Commissioner of Health shall be submitted with the bid.
C. A copy of a valid asbestos handling license shall be conspicuously displayed approximate to but outside
the work area during the duration of the project.
D. The Contractor shall permit only those persons who hold valid asbestos handling certificates and are at
least 18 years old to engage in work on this project.
1.4 CODE RULE 56 NOTICE & RECORDKEEPING – NYS DOL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall maintain for at least forty (40) years, a record of each asbestos project in which the
Contractor engages. Such record shall include the following information: the name, address, and social
security number of the person who shall supervise the asbestos project; the amount of asbestos or
asbestos materials that was installed, removed, enclosed, applied, encapsulated, or disturbed; the starting
and completion date of the asbestos project; the name and address of the deposit or waste disposal site or
sites where the asbestos waste materials was deposited or disposed of; the name and address of any sites
that were used for the interim storage of asbestos or asbestos waste materials prior to final deposit or
disposal; the name and address of any transporters that were used to transport asbestos waste material; the
name, address and social security number of all persons who were engaged in the asbestos project.
1.5 POSTING AND FILING REGULATIONS
A. Post all notices required by applicable federal state or local regulations. A copy of any (AV=s)
APPLICABLE VARIANCES and job specific variances granted shall be posted at the entrance to the
personal decontamination enclosure provided at the work area. Maintain two (2) copies of applicable
federal, state and local regulations and standards. Maintain one (1) copy of each at job site. Keep on file
in Contractor's office, one copy of each.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-3
April 24th, 2019
1.6 SUBMITTALS AND NOTICES
A. Prior to Commencement of Work, the Abatement Contractor shall submit the following documents t o the
Owner/ Architect. No work will be allowed to start until these documents have been reviewed.
1. Construction abatement schedule including but not limited to the following:
a. Phase area sequencing and timetable.
b. Size, length and number of work shifts per day/per week.
c. Mobilization schedule.
2. Satisfactory proof that written notification has been provided to the EPA regional office with
jurisdiction over the project area, and/ or the New York Department of Labor Asbestos Control
Bureau.
3. Proof that all required permits, disposal site locations, and arrangements for transportation and
disposal of asbestos contaminated materials, supplies and the like have been obtained.
4. A written description and plans for construction of decontamination enclosure systems and
asbestos work area.
5. Written approval from the local sanitary district office for the discharging of wastewater into the
sanitary system.
6. Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA form 174 or equivalent) for all chemicals used during work
performed under this section.
7. Submit a written description of plans for providing temporary power and usage of ground fault
interrupters.
8. Manufacturers' certification that vacuums, ventilation equip ment, and other equipment required to
contain airborne fibers conform to HEPA filtratio n requirements.
9. Contractor shall submit encapsulant data and encapsulation procedures.
10. Documentation certifying that all Contractor's employees engaged in abatement work have a valid
abatement license demonstrating compliance with Code Rule Park 56, Title 12 of the New York
State Department of Labor.
11. Certification from manufacturer of surfactant or removal encapsulant that the material, if used in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, will wet asbestos containing materials to which it is
applied as required by the National Emission Standard for Hazardous Pollutants Asbestos
Regulations (NESPHAPS) (40 CFR 61 Subpart M).
B. The Contractor shall provide written notification to Owner's representative of his intent to start work at
least 10 days in advance. In no case will the Contractor start work until authorization to proceed is
received. Upon review by the owner, the contractor shall make notice to all residential and/or
commercial occupants a minimum of 10 calendar days in advance of commencement of wor k for large
projects and 3 calendar days in advance for small and minor projects.
C. Contractor shall submit a notarized statement, signed by an officer of the company, containing the
following information:
1. A record of any citations issued by Federal, State, or Local regulatory agencies relating to asbestos
abatement activity. Include projects, dates and resolutions.
2. A list of penalties incurred through non compliance with asbestos abatement project specifications
including liquidated damages, overruns in scheduled time limitations and resolutions.
3. Situations in which an asbestos related contract has been terminated including projects, dates and
reasons for terminations.
4. A listing of any asbestos related legal proceedings/claims in which the Contractor (or emp loyees
scheduled to participate in this project) have participated or are currently involved. Include
descriptions of role, issue and resolution to date.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-4
April 24th, 2019
1.7 PERSONNEL PROTECTION
A. Prior to commencement of work, the workers shall be instructed and be knowledgea ble and have had
instruction on the hazards of asbestos exposure, on use and fitting of respirators, on protective dress, on
use of showers, on entry and exit from work areas, and on all aspects of work procedures and protective
measures. Also, all employees shall receive appropriate medical examinations and have successfully
passed a fit test for the respirator to be work. As a minimum, medical exams must be consistent with
requirements in OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101.
B. Work Protection shall comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (Respiratory Protection).
C. Visitor Clothing:
1. The Contractor shall provide authorized visitors with suitable respirator, protective clothing,
gloves, headgear, eye protection, and footwear as described herein, whenever they enter t he work
area.
D. Decontamination and Work Procedures
1. The decontamination and work procedures to be followed by the workers shall be posted in the
equipment room and clean room, as described in NYS DOL Code Rule 56.
E. Work Area Entry and Exit Procedures
1. Entry/Exit Log: All persons who enter the work area or an enclosure shall sign the entry/exit log,
located in the clean room, upon every entry and exit.
1.8 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURES
A. First Cleaning: External surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet
cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming in the work area before moving such items into the waste
decontamination enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty. These work area persons
shall not enter the airlock.
B. Removal to Washroom: These contaminated items shall be removed from the airlock by persons
stationed in the washroom during the waste removal operations. These washroom persons shall remo ve
gross contamination from the exterior of their respirators and protective clothing b y brushing, HEPA
vacuuming and/or wet cleaning.
C. Second Cleaning: Once in the waste decontamination enclosure system, external surfaces of
contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned a second time by wet cleaning.
D. Re-containerizing: The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment are to be dried of any
excessive pooled or beaded liquid, placed in uncontaminated plastic bags or sheeting, as the item's
physical characteristics demand, and sealed airtight.
E. Removal to Airlock: The clean recontainerized items shall be moved into the airlock that leads to the
holding area. The washroom persons shall not enter this airlock or the work area until waste remo val is
finished for that period.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-5
April 24th, 2019
F. Removal to Holding Area: Containers and equipment shall be moved from the airlock and into the
holding area by persons dressed in clean personal protective equipment, who have entered from
uncontaminated areas.
G. Holding Carts: The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment shall be placed in water tight
carts with doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be held in the holding area
pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at least once a day.
H. Enclosure Security: The exit from the decontaminatio n enclosure system shall be secured to prevent
unauthorized entry.
I. Enclosure Restrictions: Where the waste removal enclosure is part of the personal decontamination
enclosure, waste removal shall not occur during shift changes or when otherwise occupied. Precautions
shall be taken to prevent short circuiting and cycling of air outward through the shower and clean room.
1.9 DISPOSAL ACTIVITIES
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with current federal, state and local regulations
concerning the waste handling, transportation and disposal of ACM.
B. The Contractor will document actual disposal of the waste at the designated landfill by completing
Disposal Certificate or submitting proof of landfill receipt.
C. Non-friable material, as defined as Type I by NESHAPS, is to be disposed of as construction debris.
1.10 VARIANCES
A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to apply and pay for any required variances for methods under wh ich
he intends to conduct the work. The variances are to be submitted by a Project De signer to DOL and this
office for review and approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Deliver all materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the ma nufacturer
and the brand name.
B. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces, and under cover
sufficient to prevent damage or contamination.
C. Damaged or deteriorating materials shall not be used and shall be removed fr om the premises. Materials
that become contaminated shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations.
D. Fire resistant polyethylene sheet, of 6-mil thickness shall be used unless otherwise specified.
Polyethylene sheets shall be sized to minimize the frequency of joints.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-6
April 24th, 2019
E. Waterproof vinyl tape shall be capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheet of polyethylene and for use in
attachment of polyethylene sheet to finish or unfinished surfaces of similar materials and shall be capable
of adhering under dry and wet conditions.
F. Sealable polyethylene bags of 6-mil minimum thickness shall be used. Bags shall be sized to fit within
drums specified below.
G. Sealable drums of 30 or 55 gallon capacity shall be of fiber or metal with tightly fitting lids. T he drums
and bags shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA or U.S. EPA requirements and shall be air and water
tight.
H. Provide spray adhesive for sealing polyethylene to polyethylene.
I. Wetting agent shall be a mixture of 50:50 polyoxyethylene ether and polyo xyethylene ester of equivalent,
commercially available product. Wetting agent shall generally be non-toxic and non-carcinogenic.
J. Water based, non-solvent spray poly for walls, floors and glass, application equipment and mineral spirit
cleaning solution.
K. Encapsulant materials shall be an EPA approved bridging and penetration type and conform with the
following characteristics:
1. Encapsulants shall not be solvent-based or utilize a hydrocarbon in the liquid in which the solid
parts of the encapsulant are suspended.
2. Encapsulant shall not be flammable.
2.2 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide suitable tools for removal of asbestos containing materials. Metal shovels shall not be used to
pick up or remove waste products.
B. Provide sufficient number of HEPA filtered vacuum cleaners equipped with wet pick up adaptors, steel
floor wands, crevice tools, and carpet tools.
C. Airless sprayers capable of spraying amended water shall be provided in sufficient number to allow
continuous uninterrupted work.
D. Asbestos filtration devices shall utilize high efficiency particulate absolute (HEPA) filtration Systems.
E. Transportation Equipment: Transportation equipment, as required, shall be suitable for loading,
temporary storage, and unloading of contaminated waste without exposure to persons or p roperty, and
shall be quiet in motion if used within the building.
F. Wastewater filtering system shall be a combination of a 20 micron first stage filter(s) and a 5 micron
second stage filter(s). Filter media shall be of the disposable cartridge type.
G. Power tools used to drill, cut, saw or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be equipped with HEPA
filtered local exhaust ventilation.
H. Ladders and/or Scaffold: Scaffolds and ladders shall comply with all applicable codes. Scaffold joints
and ends shall be sealed with tape to prevent incursion of asbestos. The Contractor shall make availabl e
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-7
April 24th, 2019
to authorized visitors, ladders and/or scaffolds of sufficient dimension and quantity so that all work
surfaces can be easily and safely reached.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A. Contractor is responsible to provide temporary power for equipment an d lighting within the work area.
Existing power within the work area must be shut down and cannot be used as a temporary source.
Contractor shall insure safe installation and use of power and lighting within the work site per applicable
electrical code requirements and provide safety lighting and ground fault interrupter circuits as power
source of electrical equipment and lighting. The Owner will provide a power sourc e for temporary power
and lighting.
3.2 DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM
A. Construct decontamination enclosure systems (as a minimum) in accordance with OSHA regulation
1926.58, Appendix F. The systems maybe remote from the work area if NOB material is being re moved,
consisting of three and five totally enclosed rooms, not including the air locks.
3.3 WORKER DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM
A. The "worker decontamination system" is for the exclusive use of people shall not be used to
decontaminate equipment and material unless otherwise noted or directed.
3.4 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM
A. The "Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System" shall consist of a serial arrangement of rooms,
wash room, air lock, holding room and clean room for the exclusive removal of equipment and material
from the work areas and shall not be used by people for entry or exit from the work area unless otherwise
noted or directed.
3.5 WINDOWS, DOORS OPENINGS AND STAIRS
A. Polyethylene sheeting consisting of two layers of 6 mil thickness, sealed with tape at all joints and edges.
Polyethylene shall be sized to minimize seams.
3.6 EMERGENCY EXITS
A. Maintain emergency and fire exits from the work areas.
B. A diagram of all emergency and fire exits must be prepared and displayed in a conspicuous location in
the clean room.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-8
April 24th, 2019
3.7 MAINTENANCE OF DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS AND WORK AREA
BARRIERS
A. Inspection of Barriers: All plastic barriers inside the work area, in the personal decontamination
enclosure system, in the waste decontamination enclosure system and at partitions constructed to isolate
the work area from occupied areas, shall be inspected by the asbestos Contractor supervisor at least twice
daily. The barriers shall be inspected before the start of and following the completion of day's abatement
activities. Inspections and observations shall be documented in a daily project log.
B. Repairs to Barriers and/or Enclosure Systems: Damage and defects in the barriers and/or enclosure
systems shall be repaired immediately upon discovery and prior to resumption of abatement activities.
C. Testing of Barriers and Enclosure Systems: With the differential air pressure ventilation units in
operation, smoke tubes shall be used to test the effectiveness of the work area barriers and the personal
and waste decontamination enclosure systems. These tests shall be performed prior to the beginning of
abatement activities and at least once a day thereafter until satisfactory clearance air monitoring results
have been achieved. Test results, observations and any modifications shall be documented in a daily
project log.
D. Loss of Enclosure Integrity: At any time during the abatement activities, if visible emissions are
observed outside of the work area or if damage occurs to the barrier, work shall be stopped, repairs made
and visible residue immediately cleaned up using HEPA vacuuming and/or wet cleaning methods prior to
the resumption of abatement activities.
E. Daily Cleaning of Enclosures: The Contractor shall HEPA vacuum and/or wet clean the waste
decontamination enclosure system.
3.8 WORK AREA INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall request and inspection, in writing, to the Building Owner, Architect and Owners
Project Monitor at least 24 hours in advance of the time the inspection is required. All inspections shall
be performed under conditions of adequate lighting.
1. Daily Visual Inspection:
a. Throughout the abatement operations, the Project Monitor shall conduct daily, periodic
work area inspections to ensure the work practices employed by the Contractor conform
with the specification requirements.
2. All items demonstrating noncompliance shall be submitted in writing to the Building Owner and
Contractor followed by corrective actions as necessary.
3.9 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
A. Dry Removal or Disturbance: No dry removal or disturbance of asbestos materials shall be permitted.
B. Wetting requirements: The asbestos material shall be wetted frequently with amended water. Sufficient
time shall be allowed for penetration to occur prior to abatement activities. All friable materials shall be
saturated. All non-hydroscopic asbestos material shall be thoroughly wetted on a continuous basis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-9
April 24th, 2019
C. Handling: Asbestos material on detachment from the substrate shall be directly bagged or dropped into a
flexible catch basin and subsequently bagged.
D. Chutes: For asbestos material dropped distances greater than ten (10) feet, dust tight, enclosed, inclined
chutes shall be used.
E. Handling Large Components: Large components, removed intact, shall be wrapped in two layers of at
least 6 mil plastic sheeting, secured and made airtight with tape.
F. Roofing:
1. No enclosure is required if the following procedures are followed during the removal of asbestos
containing roofing materials:
a. The entire roof area shall be considered the work area. This area shall be cordoned off an d
the appropriate warning signs shall be displayed at each entrance to the roof. Durin g the
removal project only N.Y.S.D.O.L. certified asbestos handlers will be permitted on the
roof.
b. Amended water will be continuously misted on the material as it is being removed.
c. Personal protective equipment, including but limited to, tyvek suits, 2 mas k negative-
pressure respirators equipped with HEPA filters, gloves and boots shall be worn.
d. All communicating openings on the roof level and one floor below shall be sealed with two
layers of six mil poly sheeting. HVAC and plumbing vents which must remai n in service
shall be extended no less than ten feet (10') from the work area.
e. The material removed will be placed into six mil poly bags and doubled before being
passed through the decontamination chambers and lowered to an enclosed roll-off
container on the ground.
f. Personal and waste decontamination enclosures with air locks shall be established on the
roof, adjacent to the removal area.
2. Coordinate removal of all lighting rods and electrical conduit mounted on portions of or attached
to material to be removed with the Electrical Contractor prior to the start of the asbestos abatement
work on roofs.
3. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of metal gravel stop, expansion c ontrol joints, etc.
contaminated with asbestos mastic along with the perimeter asbestos roof flashing felts, cement,
and patch materials at the parapet walls, roof edge, and metal drains, vents, and other roof
penetrations. Remove and dispose of all lightning protection cables which are adhered to the roof
base with asbestos cement on roofs.
4. The Contractor shall install water-tight barriers over areas where the roofing materials are
removed from roofs. The Contractor shall be responsible to repair damage to the interior of the
building as a result of the Contractor's work practices and proc edures including, but not limited to,
failure to install adequate water-tight barriers on the exposed portions of roofs.
3.10 PRE-FINAL CLEARANCE TEST INSPECTION
A. Inspection shall commence upon completion of the following:
1. All ACM has been removed, properly contained, and removed from the work area.
2. Contractor has cleaned up the work site of all loose debris and water and disposed as of ACM.
3. Contractor shall conduct a complete visual inspection to insure that all surfaces from which
asbestos containing and contaminated materials have been removed, are free of visible residue.
4. The Project Monitor shall then verify the removal of specified materials by conducting an
inspection.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-10
April 24th, 2019
3.11 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REMOVAL PROCEDURES
A. Clean external surfaces of ACM bags or containers, materials and equipment thoroughly be wet sponging
or HEPA vacuuming before moving such items into the equipment decontamination enclosure system
wash room for final cleaning and removal to uncontaminated areas. Equipment, materials and containers
shall be free of all visible debris and dust. No items shall be removed from the work area without first
notifying the Project Monitor. All items shall be subject to inspection by the Project Monitor who will
designate items requiring further decontaminatio n of visible debris and dust. Ensure that personnel do
not leave the work areas through the equipment decontamination enclosure system unless otherwise
directed or noted.
3.12 FINAL CLEAN-UP
A. Removal of Waste: All containerized waste shall be removed from the work area and the holding area.
B. Removal of Tools and Equipment: All tools and equipment shall be removed from the work area and
decontaminated at an appropriate time in the final cleaning sequence.
C. All polyethylene sheeting and HEPA filters shall be disposed of as asbestos waste.
3.13 HANDLING AND DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAMINATED WASTE
A. Bagging and Drumming Waste
1. Bags of asbestos containing waste shall be sealed with tape in the work area. Asbestos waste shall
not be allowed to dry out prior to sealing bags. While in the work area, bags shall be
decontaminated of any bulk debris by wet wiping. Utilizing the equipment decontamination
enclosure system, bags shall be passed into the wash room where they will be thoroughly
decontaminated by wet sponging with amended water. Decontaminated bags will then be passed
directly into the holding room where they will immediately be placed in a second clean bag and
sealed with tape. Bags shall then be deposited into clean sealable drums for transport. Filled
drums shall be sealed. Drums shall be marked with the label prescribed by OSHA or the EPA.
Ensure that the containers are removed from the holding area by workers who have entered from
uncontaminated areas dressed in clean coveralls. The Project Monitor must be notified prior to
removal of materials from the work area.
B. Handling of Contaminated Water:
1. Contaminated water from the work area shall not be disposed of in the shower room.
Contaminated water must be either filtered through a separate 5.0 micron filter. Used filters shall
be disposed of as ACM waste.
C. Transportation of Waste:
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the sealed drums are transported to the waste disposal site. The
sealed bags may be removed from the drums and deposited at the burial site. However, i f the bags
are broken or damaged, they shall be left in the drums and the sealed drums shall be buried.
Uncontaminated drums may be recycled.
D. Waste Manifest System:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 82 13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 82 13-11
April 24th, 2019
1. The Contractor shall establish a manifest system that accounts for all asbestos waste. The
manifest system shall be described in writing and will be subject to the approval of the Project
Monitor . The Contractor must be able to demonstrate custody over all asbestos waste from the
time it is removed from the work area until it is deposited at the landfill.
2. Copies of the written description, the manifest, and any receipts generated during the handling and
disposal process shall be provided to the Project Monitor and the Owner.
3. Final manifest and documents must be provided to the Project Monitor and Owner within three (3)
working days of the removal of asbestos materials from the site by the waste hauler.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF WASTEWATER
A. All water from any asbestos abatement work area including shower waste will be filtered through a filter
having a maximum rated power size of 5 micrometers (um) before being discharged into a sanitary sewer
system.
B. All holding tanks located inside the work site is recommended in case the c apacity of the filter is
exceeding during active periods such as showering out.
C. All wastewater shall be discharged in an approved manner. No wastewater discharge will be allowed to
enter a storm sewer, open drainage basin, body of water, a drywell or sept ic system.
D. The Contractor shall obtain a written approval/permit from the Local Sanitar y District as to the proper
discharge of the wastewater prior to commencement of any work activities.
END OF SECTION 02 82 13
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 83 13
Ithaca, New York LEAD REMEDIATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LEAD REMEDIATION 02 83 13-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 02 83 13 - LEAD REMEDIATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REMEDIATION
A. Paint, soil and/or other existing materials may contain lead and a probable leachable lead content.
1. The Contractor shall remove, contain, capture, collect and dispose of the lead containing materials
in compliance with all current and pending Federal and State regulations, including the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Resource Conservation and Reco very Act (RCRA),
the Hazardous and Solid Waste Amendment (HSWA), the Comprehensive Environmenta l
Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA) and the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA), and the especially 29 CFR 1926 for the protectio n of workers.
2. The Contractor shall bear responsibility for insuring that the waste is properly handled at each
stage of operation and properly stored in approved containers. The campus shall be the generator
of the waste, and shall supply its EPA ID number and address for use in filling out the manifests.
The contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of the manifest (information and tracking
form) to be signed by all applicable parties. The contractor shall allow two weeks for the Campus
to review and sign the completed manifests.
3. The Contractor shall hire an environmental or chemical testing laboratory, accredited by the State
of New York, as legally required to sample and test the waste in accordance with EPA method
1311, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP).
4. Waste classified as hazardous shall be shipped off site for treat ement, treated on site or recovered
and reused in compliance with Federal and State regulations. Obtain all applicable permits.
Provide certification of disposal to the campus.
5. All work areas involving demolition, cutting, modifications, etc., to any exi sting materials shall be
considered a lead hazard per 29 CFR 1926 for the protection of workers unless the contractor
removed the potential sources of air borne lead.
6. Scope of Work consists of properly removing and/ or handling and Lead Based Paint associated
with the removal drawings.
END OF SECTION 02 83 13
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 00
Ithaca, New York MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 03 01 00-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 03 01 00 - MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of concrete repair and restoration work is indicated in drawings.
B. Concrete repair and restoration work includes the following:
1. Repairing spalls at underside of west stair landing overhang.
2. Repairing spalls at first floor window ledge.
3. Filling in after installation of CFRP strips. See Specification 03 01 33.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Removal includes complete removal in designated areas and legal disposal of existing items except those noted
to remain property of Owner.
B. Unsound concrete exhibits one or more of the following characteristics:
1. Incipient fractures present beneath delaminated or spalling surfaces.
2. Honeycombing.
3. Friable or punky.
4. Deterioration from freeze-thaw action.
C. Deteriorated reinforcing bars are those that have lost more than 15 percent (10 percent if two or more
consecutive units are affected) of original cross-sectional area through corrosion.
D. Damaged reinforcing bars are those that have lost more than 15 percent (10 percent if two or more consecutive
units are affected) of original cross-sectional area as a direct result of Contractor's removal operations. Damaged
material shall be replaced or reinforced at Contractor's expense.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Protect surfaces from rapid drying.
B. Do not apply materials if temperature is below 45°F.
C. Do not apply materials if precipitation is expected within 48 hours of application, unless protection is provided.
D. Use workers who are skilled and experienced in this type of work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 00
Ithaca, New York MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 03 01 00-2
April 24, 2019
E. Materials used must be compatible.
F. Concrete Repair Specialist: Work shall be performed by a firm with minimum 5-years successful experience in
comparable concrete repair projects and employing skilled personnel trained to use the repair products specified
herein.
1.5 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-place Concrete.
B. Section 01 45 33, Schedule of Special Inspections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualifications:
1. Submit descriptions of projects completed within last ten years of similar scope and cost. Include
project location and contact information.
2. Submit project experience for person(s) responsible for work to be performed under this section.
3. Submit written verification from product manufacturer that personnel performing this work have
completed training from the Company Field Advisor as specified in Section 1.7 prior to start of work.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each product indicated, including recommendations for
its application and installation instructions. Include certifications substantiating product complies with
requirements.
1.7 QUALIFICATION OF WORKMEN
A. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this section and is
thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements and the materials and methods needed for their execution
and who shall direct work performed under this section.
1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers bearing the manufacturer's
name and label.
B. Protect concrete repair systems before, during, and after installation and protect the work and materials of other
trades. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the
Owner and at no additional cost.
1.9 TESTING
A. Test patched areas after three days for soundness and delamination by sounding with a hammer. Repair all
hollow-sounding areas by replacing the patch in the affected area at no cost to the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 00
Ithaca, New York MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 03 01 00-3
April 24, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for uncoated deformed bars.
1. ASTM A 775 for epoxy-coated, deformed bars.
2. Coatings (epoxy) applied after fabrication and bending.
B. Corrosion-resistant Coating for Existing Reinforcing: Two component polymer modified silica-fume
cementitious coating tested under FHWA/RD-86/193 procedure.
C. Bonding Grout: Equal parts by volume of sand and cement with sufficient water to achieve a consistency of
stiff “pancake batter” or as recommended by patching material manufacturer.
D. Flowable Repair Mortars: “Monotop 611 Plus” by Sika Corp.; “Forment” by Conproco Corporation;
“MasterEmaco S 477 CI” by Master Builders Solutions; or accepted equivalent.
E. Vertical and Overhead Trowel Applied Patching Material: “Sika Top 123 Plus” by Sika Corporation; “Conpro
Set” by Conproco Corporation; “MasterEmaco N 350 CI” by Master Builders Solutions; “Strongcrete SW-82
(vertical)” and “Strongcrete SW-88 (overhead)” by Strong Wall Systems; or accepted equivalent.
F. See Section 033000 for concrete mix specifications.
G. Aggregate: Hard, sound, and durable pea gravel 1/4 to 3/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine conditions under which concrete shall be reconditioned. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean all concrete surfaces prior to patching and coating application in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Clean surfaces using High Pressure water wash using a pressure washer set at 3,000 psi pressure
with a 25-degree nozzle.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Locate delaminations in members by sounding entire surface with hammer. Mark limits of delaminated area
with chalk. Designate area to be removed with straight lines in rectangular patterns for neat patch.
B. Removals:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 00
Ithaca, New York MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 03 01 00-4
April 24, 2019
1. Saw cut perimeter of area to required depth without cutting into reinforcing steel and without
overrunning cuts at corners. Make shallow cuts inside area to be removed. This second cutting shall
facilitate removal of concrete.
2. Remove unsound concrete within marked areas using 15- to 30-pound chipping hammers equipped
with gad point bits.
3. After required concrete has been removed, clean surface by sandblasting or high- pressure water to
remove loose materials.
4. Where embedded reinforcement is exposed by concrete removal, exercise extra caution to avoid
damaging it during removal of concrete. Remove concrete around reinforcement to provide minimum
of 2 inch clearance. If rust is on embedded reinforcement where it enters concrete, continue concrete
removal until bare reinforcement is exposed or removals are terminated by Engineer.
5. Notify Engineer when removals have been completed so that they may be observed. Unsatisfactory
cavity preparation shall be corrected as required by Engineer.
6. Clean rust from reinforcement by sandblasting or wire brush.
7. Prior to placing patching materials, air blast cavities clean to remove sand and debris.
C. Coat existing exposed reinforcement with corrosion-resistant coating. Reinforcement to be coated shall be
sandblasted clean in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 SUPPLEMENTAL REINFORCEMENT
A. Where there is a defective or damaged reinforcement in cavities, add epoxy-coated reinforcement. Add a
sufficient number of bars to equal cross-sectional area of defective or damaged bars, and provide a minimum
length of 2 feet. Secure new reinforcement to existing reinforcement with non-corrosive wire ties.
B. Securely anchor loose reinforcement in cavities to prevent its displacement during patching operation.
3.5 SLAB UNDERSIDE REPAIR
A. Apply bonding grout to surfaces to receive trowel applied materials with a uniform thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch
thick. Coating may be retempered with a second coat if the first coat dries before patching materials are placed.
Reclean cavity if second coat dries.
B. Mix trowel-applied patching compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Place patching compound immediately following bonding grout application. Place patching compound using
trowels to consolidate materials. Apply patching compound in lifts according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Add aggregate to patching materials where patched area will be more than 2 inches deep. Add aggregate at a
rate of 15 pounds for a 50-pound bag of patching material or as recommended by material's manufacturer.
E. Finish patches to match texture of adjoining concrete.
F. Protect and cure according to the manufacturer's instructions.
G. Do not allow traffic over patch areas for at least three days.
3.6 WALL OR BEAM SHALLOW REPAIR
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 00
Ithaca, New York MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 03 01 00-5
April 24, 2019
A. Apply bonding grout to surfaces to receive patching. Apply grout to a uniform thickness 1/16 to 1/8 inch thick.
Coating may be retempered with a second coat if the first coat dries before placing patching materials. Reclean
cavity if second coat dries.
B. Place trowel-applied patching compound in cavity, ensuring materials are well-consolidated. Place in lifts as
recommended by the manufacturer. Apply trowel finish to surface.
C. Protect and cure surface in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.7 SLAB TOP SURFACE REPAIR
A. Apply bonding grout to surfaces to receive patching compound with a uniform thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch.
Coating may be retempered with second coat if first coat dries before patching compound is placed. Reclean
cavity if second coat dries.
B. Mix a flowable repair mortar in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Place repair compound immediately following bonding grout application. Apply patching compound according
to manufacturer's instructions.
D. Protect and wet cure for three days, and allow to air dry before allowing traffic on area.
3.8 REPAIRS
A. Test patched areas after three days for soundness and delamination by sounding with a hammer. Repair all
hollow-sounding areas by replacing the patch in the affected area at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 03 01 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 33
Ithaca, New York FRP REINFORCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FRP REINFORCING 03 01 33-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 03 01 33 – FRP REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This specification is intended to define the minimum requirements of structural strengthening using
externally bonded fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) composite systems.
B. The work includes the furnishing of all materials, labor, equipment and services for the supply,
installation and finish of all structural strengthening using externally bonded FRP composite system.
C. The general contractor or subcontractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, transportation,
necessary storage, access, labor, and supervision required for the proper installation of the externally
bonded FRP composite system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following reference standards, except where more stringent requirements are indicated
on the Drawings or specified herein:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. ACI 440.2R-08 “Guide for the Design and Construction of Externally Bonded FRP
Systems for Strengthening Concrete Structures.”
b. ACI 440R-07 “Report on Fiber-Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Reinforcement for Concrete
Structures.”
c. ACI 440 R-96 “State-of-the-Art Report on Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Reinforcement
for Concrete Structures.”
d. ACI 503 R “Pull-off test to determine FRP adhesion to concrete substrate.”
2. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI):
a. ICRI Guideline No. 03742 “Guide for the Selection of Strengthening Systems for Concrete
Structures.”
b. ICRI Guideline No. 03739 “Guide to Using In-Situ Tensile Pull-Off Tests to evaluate Bond
of Concrete Surface Materials.”.
B. Contractor’s Qualifications: The Contractor shall have a minimum of two years of experience in bonded
FRP Reinforcement confirmed by actual field tests of at least 5 successful installations. Submit a list of
five projects with the dates of work, type, description, and quantity of work performed.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 33
Ithaca, New York FRP REINFORCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FRP REINFORCING 03 01 33-2
April 24, 2019
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years of experience in the
production of FRP Reinforcement. Experience shall be confirmed by actual field tests of a minimum of
100 successful installations. Acceptable Manufacturers include but are not limited to the following:
1. Fyfe Co. LLC.
2. Sika Corporation.
3. BASF Corporation.
4. Structural Technologies, LLC.
D. Manufacturer shall maintain a program of contractor training, instruction, certification, and technical
support for the use of FRP reinforcement.
E. Source Limitations: Provide FRP products from one manufacturer.
F. Pre-installation Conference: A meeting shall be held two weeks prior to installation to discuss the Project
and installation methods. Manufacturer's Representative shall be present at the meeting. Refer to
Specification Section 014533 and Schedule of Special Inspections.
1.4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Refer to Specification Section 01 45 33.
1.5 MATERIAL EVALUATION/QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preconstruction Testing: Contractor shall employ testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer and Architect
to perform material evaluation tests.
B. Submit properties of materials as determined by independent laboratory testing in accordance with ASTM
D7565 and/or ASTM D3039 (tensile modulus, stress and strain) for the proposed fiber composite system.
Submit a minimum of 20 of each test.
C. Submit testing service qualifications demonstrating experience with similar types of projects.
D. The Registered Design Professionals (RDPs) for Structural Engineering and Architecture and the Special
Inspector will visit construction site at appropriate intervals to determine if work is in general
conformance with Contract Documents and specifications. Notify RDPs 48 hours before anticipated time
of completion of reinforcement for a given section of work so they may determine if site observations are
required. If site observations are required, do not place concrete until RDPs have had opportunity to
observe reinforcement.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data indicating product standards, physical, mechanical, and chemical
characteristics, technical specifications, limitations, installation instructions, maintenance instructions and
general recommendations regarding each individual material.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification by the manufacturer that supplied products comply with
specified performance requirements.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 33
Ithaca, New York FRP REINFORCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FRP REINFORCING 03 01 33-3
April 24, 2019
C. Submit written consent from the FRP manufacturer that the surface bonded FRP composite systems are
installed by trained certified applicators.
D. Submit for record, a complete description of the FRP Reinforcing system materials, surface preparation,
application procedures, application rates, and cure times.
E. Submit drawings and calculations signed and stamped by a professional engineer licensed in New York
State. Design shall be based on the performance criteria defined on the structural drawings. Drawings and
calculations shall show the type, locations, dimensions, numbers of layers, and orientation of all FRP
materials and coatings to be installed.
G. Submit manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials to be used.
1.7 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Design the composite system to achieve the structural performance shown on the structural drawings.
B. Design shall be based on the design modulus and associated area of the composite to be installed. FRP
design values must be lower than the calculated mean determined from the test results determined by
preconstruction testing as defined in Section 1.5B of this specification.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver epoxy (adhesive resin) materials in factory-sealed containers with the manufacturer’s labels intact
and legible with verification of date of manufacture and shelf life.
B. Store materials in a protected area at a temperature between 40°F and 100°F.
C. Products shall be stored according to the manufacturer’s requirements and shall avoid contact with soil
and moisture. Products shall be stored to avoid UV exposure.
1.9 JOB SITE CONDITIONS
A. Precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to any surface near the work zone due to mixing and handling
of the specified materials.
B. The Contractor is solely responsible for fume control and shall take necessary precautions against injury
to Installer personnel or adjacent building occupants during application of primer and resin, etc.
Contractor personnel shall use protective equipment and area shall be well vented to the outside. As a
minimum, Installer must take the following precautions:
1. Contractor shall locate and protect building air intake during application.
2. Contractor shall follow all state, federal, and local safety regulations.
3. Contractor shall follow all Manufacturers’ safety requirements as indicated on appropriate MSDS
sheets.
1.10 WORKMANSHIP
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 33
Ithaca, New York FRP REINFORCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FRP REINFORCING 03 01 33-4
April 24, 2019
A. Contractor shall be responsible for correction of work not conforming to specified requirements. Correct
deficient work as directed by Engineer.
B. Remove work found to be defective. Replace with new acceptable work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. FRP Reinforcement Fabric: High strength, high modulus, fiber fabric, unidirectional or woven (in various
fiber architectures) to suit specific repair needs.
B. Approved FRP Strengthening Systems:
1. TyfoÒ FibrwrapÒ System(s) supplied by Fyfe Co. LLC.
2. Sika CarboDur Composite Strengthening Systems supplied by Sika Corporation.
3. MasterBrace Composite Strengthening Systems supplied by BASF Corporation.
4. V-Wrap Strengthening Systems supplied by Structural Technologies, LLC.
C. Related Materials: Compatible saturant, primer, filler and other materials recommended by the
manufacturer as needed for the proper installation of the complete surface bonded FRP composite system.
D. Protective Coating: Acrylic or Polyurethane paint. Alternate finishes must be approved by the Owner.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Inspect surfaces to receive the work and immediately report, in writing to the Engineer, any deficiencies
in the surface that render it unsuitable for proper execution of this work as required in the General
Conditions.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surface in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. All concrete surfaces shall be sound. Remove deteriorated concrete, dust, laitance, grease, paint, curing
compounds, waxes, impregnations, foreign particles, and other bond inhibiting materials from the surface
by blast cleaning or equivalent mechanical means. (Minimum ICRI CSP-2 concrete surface profile.)
C. All concrete surfaces shall be air blasted and vacuumed clean to a dust free condition.
D. Prior to the application of the saturated composite fabric, fill any uneven surfaces with the manufacturer’s
thickened epoxy.
E. Round off sharp and chamfered corners (to be wrapped around) to a minimum radius of 1/2 inch by
means of grinding or forming with the system’s thickened epoxy. Variations in the radius along the edge
shall not exceed 1/2 inch for each 12 inches of length.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 33
Ithaca, New York FRP REINFORCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FRP REINFORCING 03 01 33-5
April 24, 2019
F. Repair all damaged concrete, spalls, and irregular surfaces to create a flat, or slightly convex, surface. Fill
surfaces with thickened epoxy to eliminate air surface voids greater than 1/2 inches in diameter.
G. The adhesive strength of the concrete shall be verified after preparation by random pull-off testing (ACI
503R) at the direction of the Engineer. Minimum tensile strength is 200 psi with concrete substrate
failure.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Ensure that all patch work is complete and cured.
B. Verify ambient and concrete temperatures. No work shall proceed if the temperature of the concrete
surface is less than 40°F or greater than 100°F or as specified on the epoxy component labels.
C. Mix components in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Diluting is not permitted. Pre-condition materials as indicated on technical data sheet.
E. Mix only that quantity which can be used within its pot life.
F. Components that have exceeded their shelf life shall not be used.
G. Apply primer in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Primer may be applied with a brush or roller. Apply second coat as necessary after first coat has
penetrated into concrete.
I. Surface depressions shall be filled with epoxy filler per manufacturers’ instructions.
J. Primer must be covered with fiber within 24 hours of application, depending on temperature conditions.
If 24-hour window is exceeded, the primed surfaces must be solvent wiped with a fast flashing solvent
(e.g. MEK) or roughened with sandpaper to break the amine blush.
K. Apply FRP reinforcing using wet or dry layup in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Apply subsequent layers until designed number of layers is achieved per project drawings.
L. All cutting of fabrics, mixing of epoxy and combination thereof shall take place in a protected area away
from heat sources and any electrical equipment.
M. Clean up and protect area adjacent to element where FRP composite is being applied as specified in
Section 1.9 of this specification.
N. Finish: All edges and seams shall be feathered. Use system as directed by the manufacturer. Finish as
specified between 24 and 72 hours after final application of epoxy. If after 72 hours the epoxy is cured,
the surface must be roughened by hand sanding or brush blasting, prior to finishing.
3.4 CURING
A. Protect finished installation of FRP Reinforcement from rain, sand, dust, etc. using protective sheeting or
other barriers. Do not allow protective sheeting to come in contact with finished application.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 01 33
Ithaca, New York FRP REINFORCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FRP REINFORCING 03 01 33-6
April 24, 2019
B. Cure finished application for a minimum of 24 hours. To achieve full strength of the FRP composite
system, extend curing for a period of two weeks at an average ambient temperature of 68°F.
3.5 REPAIR OF DEFECTS
A. Upon completion of the curing process, the installed system shall be checked for areas where saturant has
not penetrated or where saturant has not completely cured. Such areas shall be epoxy injected to re-
establish bond and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
B. Repair procedures shall be performed in accordance with guidelines established by ACI 440.2R-08
(paragraph 7.2.3) and approved by the Engineer. All repairs shall be subject to the same application,
curing and quality control specifications as the original work.
1. Small delaminations and voids less than 2 inches square each are permissible as long as the
delaminated area is less than 5 percent of the total laminate area and there are no more than 10
such delaminations per 10 feet square.
2. Medium sized delaminations and voids greater than 2 inches square but less than 25 inches square
may be repaired by epoxy resin injection or ply replacement, depending on the size and number of
delaminations and their location. The repair procedure should be determined by the Engineer.
3. Larger size delaminations and voids greater than 25 inches square should be repaired by
selectively cutting away the affected sheet and applying an overlapping sheet patch of equivalent
plies. The overlap should extend a minimum of 6 inches in all directions.
C. Correct and repair any damage to the new or existing structures, property or services caused by the
installation and testing of the FRP composite, at no cost to the Owner.
3.6 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Apply protective coating in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all surplus material, equipment, and debris from the site once work is complete. Leave the site
clean.
END OF SECTION 03 01 33
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division
1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Waterproofing is specified in Division 7.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement
procedures, and finishes.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. ACI 117 “Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials”
2. ACI 211.1 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete."
3. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
4. ACI 304 "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete"
5. ACI 305 "Hot-Weather Concreting."
6. ACI 306R "Cold-Weather Concreting."
7. ACI 311 "ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection" and "Guide for Concrete Plant Inspection and
Testing of Ready-Mixed Concrete."
8. ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
9. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete."
10. ACI 347 "Guide to Formwork for Concrete."
11. ACI SP-15 "Field Reference Manual." A copy of this publication shall be kept in the field office
at all times during concrete construction.
12. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."
13. NYSDOT "Standard Specification for Construction and Materials."
14. ACI 302 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that
complies with ASTM C94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities.”
C. Source Limitations: To minimize irregularities in appearance or color, obtain cementitious materials of the
same brand from the same manufacturer’s plant. Obtain aggregates, admixtures, and water for each type of
concrete construction exposed to view in completed project from same source for duration of that type of
construction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2
April 24, 2019
D. Hold a preconstruction meeting at least 14 days prior to initial planned date of concrete placement.
Discussion shall include reinforcing and dowel placement, slab joints, concrete mix designs, and
procedures for concrete placement, finishing, curing, and protection. Attendees shall include Contractor,
Placement Subcontractor, Concrete Supplier, Special Inspector, Testing Agency, Engineer, and Architect.
1.4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Refer to Specification Section 014533 and Schedule of Special Inspections.
1.5 MATERIAL EVALUATION/QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preconstruction Testing: Contractor shall employ Testing Agency acceptable to Engineer and Architect to
perform material evaluation tests and evaluate concrete mixes prior to submitting.
1. Testing Agency shall be qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E329.
B. Submit concrete testing service qualifications demonstrating experience with similar projects.
C. The Registered Design Professionals (RDPs) for Structural Engineering and Architecture and the Special
Inspector will visit construction site at appropriate intervals to determine if work is in general conformance
with Contract Documents and specifications. Notify RDPs 48 hours before anticipated time of completion
of reinforcement for a given section of work so they may determine if site observations are required. If site
observations are required, do not place concrete until RDPs have had opportunity to observe reinforcement.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Show
bar sizes, lengths, material grade, schedules, spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements of
reinforcement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, and supports for reinforcement. Include
special reinforcement required for openings through concrete.
a. Show elevations of reinforcement for all members at minimum 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale.
b. Show locations of construction and control joints.
c. Reference Contract Drawing number and addendum number in each shop drawing.
d. Do not place reinforcing information from more than one design discipline (structural, civil,
landscape) in each drawing.
2. Submit for information only formwork drawings. Design and construction of formwork remains
sole responsibility of Contractor.
B. Mix Designs: Submit proposed mix designs for concrete 15 days minimum before start of concreting.
Submittal must be in the Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form at end of this section for each class of
concrete.
C. Submit to Special Inspector and Engineer material certificates signed by manufacturers certifying each
material complies with specifications. Submit proposed admixtures including chloride ion content prior to
submitting mix design.
D. Submit data and installation instructions for proprietary materials.
E. Submit option for slab placement (see Part 3 of this section) and layout of slab joints.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3
April 24, 2019
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials so as to preserve their quality and fitness for work.
1. Store reinforcement and formwork in manner to prevent bending, damage (including damage to
coatings) and accumulation of dirt.
2. Store waterstops in a manner to prevent exposure to moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
1.8 WORKMANSHIP
A. Contractor shall be responsible for correction of concrete work not conforming to specified requirements,
including strength, tolerances, and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by Architect.
B. Remove work found to be defective. Replace with new acceptable work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with maximum VOC of
450 g/l that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatments
of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion or impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or
curing compound.
1. Formulate form release agent with rust inhibiter for steel form-facing materials.
C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off, metal form ties, designed to
prevent form deflection and spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer
than 1 inch to exposed surface.
1. Provide ties that will leave holes no larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface when removed.
2. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates or washers to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
3. Unexposed concrete: “Type A-3 Snap Tie Standard” by Dayton Superior or accepted equivalent.
4. Provide galvanized or stainless steel ties for concrete elements that are reinforced with epoxy-
coated or galvanized reinforcing.
5. Internal wood spreaders are prohibited.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Deformed bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
B. Deformed bars to be welded, ASTM A 706.
C. Deformed Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775.
D. Deformed Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767, Class I.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4
April 24, 2019
E. Deformed Stainless-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 955.
F. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
G. Epoxy-coated Wire: ASTM A 884.
H. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775.
I. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc.
J. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars in place. Use wire bar-type or all plastic-type supports complying with CRSI
specifications. Use chairs with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair
legs.
1. Concrete bricks may be used to support footing and pile cap reinforcing. Stagger brick locations
on subgrade.
a. Do not use clay bricks.
b. Do not use bricks to support epoxy-coated or galvanized reinforcing.
c. Do not locate bricks or other supports on ends of piles.
2. Supports for epoxy-coated reinforcing shall be either wire bar-type coated with epoxy, plastic, or
vinyl compatible with concrete for a minimum distance of 2 inches from the point of contact with
reinforcing or all plastic-type.
3. Supports for galvanized reinforcing shall be either galvanized wire bar-type or all-plastic type.
4. Finish (epoxy-coated or galvanized) for supports formed from reinforcing bars shall match the
finish of the supported reinforcing.
K. Minimum 16-gauge annealed tie wire, ASTM A 82.
1. Provide coated tie wire for use with epoxy-coated or galvanized bars. Acceptable coatings include
epoxy, nylon, or vinyl. Galvanized tie wire may be used with galvanized bars. Do not use plain tie
wire.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or I/II only.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F, with loss on ignition of less than 6 percent.
C. Ground-Granulated, Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
D. Aggregates: NYSDOT-approved, Section 703 (normal weight), one source and as specified.
1. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious
substances.
2. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate free from clay, mud, loam, or foreign
matter.
a. For foundation walls and superstructure walls, blend of NYSDOT size 1 and 2 (25 percent
size 1 and 75 percent size 2) or gradation conforming to ASTM C 33, size 467:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5
April 24, 2019
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
2 inch 100
11/2 inch 95 to 100
3/4 inch 35 to 70
3/8 inch 10 to 30
No. 4 0 to 5
b. For miscellaneous applications, blend of NYSDOT size 1 and 2 (40 percent size 1 and 60
percent size 2) or gradation conforming to ASTM C 33, size 57:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
1 1/2 inch 100
1 inch 95 to 100
1/2 inch 25 to 60
No. 4 0 to 10
No. 8 0 to 5
c. Lightweight Coarse Aggregate for Slabs: ASTM C 330, Size 3/4-inch to No. 4. Dry unit
weight of concrete shall be a maximum 120 pcf from a batch weight of 120 to 124 pcf, presoaked
to achieve a damp condition according to ACI 211.2; limit shrinkage to 0.03 percent at 28 days.
D. Water: ASTM C 94, clean, fresh, drinkable.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entraining: ASTM C 260.
B. Water-Reducing Admixture: “Eucon MR”, "Eucon WR-75”, or “Eucon WR-91” by Euclid Chemical Co.;
“MasterPozzolith 200” by Master Builders; or "Plastocrete 161" by Sika Chemical Corp. Admixture shall
conform to ASTM C 494, Type A, and not contain more chloride ions than in municipal drinking water.
C. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: "Eucon Retarder-75" by Euclid Chemical Co; “MasterSet
R100” by Master Builders; or "Plastiment" by Sika Chemical Corp. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C
494, Type D, and not contain more chloride ions than in municipal drinking water.
D. Noncorrosive, Nonchloride Accelerator: ASTM C 494, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions
than in municipal drinking water.
E. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): "Eucon 37" by Euclid Chemical Co. or
"Sikament SPMN" by Sika Chemical Corp. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G, and
not contain more chloride ions than in municipal drinking water.
F. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates, and admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent
water-soluble chloride ions by weight of cement or more than 0.3 percent thiocyanates by weight of cement
shall not be permitted.
G. Ramp slab admixtures:
1. Set-Control Admixtures: Not permitted.
2. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-6
April 24, 2019
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: “Eucon WR-75” or “Eucon WR-91” by Euclid Chemical Co.;
“MasterPozzolith 200” by Master Builders; or “Plastocrete 161” by Sika Chemical Corp.
Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A, and not contain more chloride ions than in
municipal drinking water.
4. Mid to High Range Water Reducer/Finish Enhancer: “MasterPolyheed 997” by Master Builders;
“Sikament 686” by Sika Chemical Corp; or accepted equivalent. Admixture shall conform to
ASTM C 494 Type A and F and not contain more chloride ions than in municipal drinking water.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 ounces a square yard
when dry and complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
B. Curing-Sheet Materials: One of the following moisture-retaining covers, complying with ASTM C 171.
Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or polyethylene-coated burlap.
C. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC compliant): ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B with minimum 15
percent solids content. Use "Diamond Clear VOX" by Euclid Chemical Co. or accepted equivalent.
D. Vertical Joint Sealants: “Eucolastic 1 NS” by Euclid Chemical Co.; “MasterSeal NP2” by Master Builders;
“Sikaflex-2c NS” by Sika Corporation; or accepted equivalent.
E. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751, ½-inch-thick, premolded, expansion and isolation joint filler strips.
F. Backer Rod: Polyethylene closed-cell foam. “MasterSeal 920 or 921” by Master Builders or accepted
equivalent.
G. Chamfer Strips: Provide wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to provide 3/4-inch chamfer
on exposed edges.
H. Non-shrink Grout: Corp of Engineers CRD-C 621. “Sure-Grip High Performance Grout” by Dayton
Superior; “NS Grout” by Euclid Chemical Co.; “SikaGrout 212” by Sika Corp.; “Masterflow 928” by
Master Builders, Inc.; or accepted equivalent.
J. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II “Acrylic Bonding Agent J40” by Dayton Superior; “SBR Latex”
by Euclid Chemical Co.; “Everbond” by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; “SikaLatex” by Sika Corp.;;
or accepted equivalent.
K. Chemical Adhesive for Doweled Reinforcement:
1. Anchors to solid concrete, grouted CMU, solid brick, or stone:
a. Anchors for use when base material temperature is 0°F or greater: “HIT-Ice” by Hilti; “Epcon
A7” by ITW Ramset/Red Head; “AC 100 + Gold” by Powers Fasteners; “AT-XP” by
Simpson/Strong-Tie; or accepted equivalent.
b. Anchors for use when base material temperature is 40°F or greater; “HIT HY 200” by Hilti;
“Epcon C6+” by ITW Ramset/Red Head; “PE 1000+” by Powers Fasteners; “ET-HP” by
Simpson/Strong-Tie; or accepted equivalent.
L. Related Materials for Slab:
1. Polyurethane Joint Sealant for Exterior Slabs: “Sikaflex-2c SL” by Sika; “MasterSeal SL2” by
Master Builders; “Eucolastic 2 SL” by Euclid Chemical Co.; “Urexpan NR-200” by Pecora
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-7
April 24, 2019
Corporation; or accepted equivalent.
2. Penetrating Exterior Anti-Spalling Sealer: “Euco-Guard 100” by Euclid Chemical Co. (mixed to
17.5 percent concentration); “MasterProtect H400” by Master Builders; “Aquapel Plus” by L&M
Construction Chemicals; or accepted equivalent.
3. Evaporation Retarder: Monomolecular, film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab
surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. “Aquafilm J74RTU” by Dayton
Superior; “Eucobar” by Euclid Chemical Co.; “MasterKure ER 50” by Master Builders, Inc.; or
accepted equivalent.
4. Crack Repair Material: For cracks smaller than 1/8 inch, use “Sika Pronto 19” methacrylate by
Sika; “Rapid Refloor” polyurea by Metzger McGuire; or accepted equivalent. For cracks greater
than 1/8 inch, use specified joint filler material.
2.6 PROPORTIONING AND MIX DESIGN
A. Prepare design mixtures for type and strength of concrete in accordance with ACI 301, section 4.2.2 and
these specifications. Use independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs.
B. Where concrete production facility can establish uniformity of its production for concrete of similar
strength and materials based on recent test data, the average strength used as a basis for determining mix
design proportions shall exceed specified design strength by requirements of ACI 301, Section 4.2.3.3(a).
C. When a concrete production facility does not have field-test records for calculation of standard deviation,
the required average strength shall be determined in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3.3(b).
D. Documentation of average compressive strength shall comply with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3.4(a), 4.2.3.4(b),
or 4.2.3.4(c). Submit sample standard deviation calculation and/or results of trial mixtures used as basis for
determination of f’cr. See Specification Section 1.6.B.
E. Pumping concrete is permitted only if mix designs specifically prepared and used previously for pumping
are submitted. Mix designs not previously used for anticipated pump line lengths shall be tested by
Contractor to verify suitability for project before use at site. Pump line shall have 5-inch-minimum inside
diameter and be used with 5-inch pumps.
F. Pozzolans:
1. Pozzolans may be substituted for cement in light-weight concrete at a rate of 20 percent by weight.
2. Submittals shall include actual mix design, including percentage of pozzolans and test results
showing mix meets specified 7-day compressive strength where indicated, 28-day compressive
strength, and air content.
3. Protect and heat concrete containing pozzolans during cold-weather conditions. Maintain
protection and heat until 70 percent of specified design strength is achieved.
G. For normal-weight concrete, quantity of coarse aggregate in pounds must be in the range of 1.25 to 1.5
times quantity of fine aggregate in pounds.
H. For lightweight concrete, provide minimum 675 pounds of lightweight coarse aggregate (saturated, surface
dry) for each cubic yard of concrete.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-8
April 24, 2019
J. Concrete Quality:
Location
Required 7-day
Compressive
Strength psi
Required 28-day
Compressive
Strength psi
Maximum
Water/Cement
Ratio
Percent
Entrained
Air
Misc. concrete. NA 3,000 0.55 4.5*
Walls 3,000 4,000 0.5 4.5*
Lean concrete NA 1,500 0.65 4.5*
Exterior slabs
NA 4,500** 0.45 6*
* Plus or minus 1.5 percent.
** Maximum cement content 611 pounds, or 526 pounds plus 20 percent pozzolans by weight.
K. Slump:
1. Walls, misc. concrete: 3 inches to 5 inches.
2. Wall concrete containing high-range, water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) shall have a
maximum slump of 9 inches unless otherwise accepted by Engineer.
3. Ramp slab: 5-inch maximum for normal and mid-range, water-reduced mixes.
4. Ramp concrete containing a high-range, water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) shall have
maximum slump of 6 inches unless otherwise accepted by Engineer.
5. Ready-Mix Concrete: ASTM C 94.
6. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work indicating project identification
name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced.
2.7 REINFORCING FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.” Fabricate bars to
required lengths, shapes, and bends. Do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in manner that could
weaken material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine conditions under which concrete shall be placed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-9
April 24, 2019
conditions are corrected.
B. Whenever possible, air temperature should be rising after concrete placement. Attempt to schedule slab
placements according to favorable weather reports.
3.2 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. General: Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic
loads, and construction loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347 and ACI 117.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location,
grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways,
recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts,
sleeves, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt
joints and provide backup at joints to prevent concrete mortar leakage.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for
inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for
forming keyways, reglets, recesses, etc., for easy removal.
D. Erect forms in logical sequence to allow placement and inspection of reinforcement and other embedded
items.
E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection
before concrete placement, and for concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings, and set tightly
to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
F. Provide cleanout panels at bottoms of deep wall and column forms.
G. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
H. Fit corners and joints with gaskets or tape to prevent leakage.
J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,
wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before
placing concrete as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
K. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged
form-facing materials are not acceptable. Apply new form-release agent. When forms are reused for
successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to
close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patch forms for exposed concrete surfaces
unless approved by Architect.
L. Clean and coat forms before erection. Do not coat forms in place.
M. Place concrete plugs in exposed holes left by form-tie cones.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED STRIPS FOR SLABS
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-10
April 24, 2019
A. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and
contours in finished slab surfaces. Provide secure edge forms or screed strips to support strike-off templates
or compacting vibrating-type screeds. Wet screeding is not permitted.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for placing reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond
with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or
concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters,
spacers, hangers, or concrete brick as required.
1. Wire-tie intersections as required to prevent displacement of reinforcement.
2. Do not wet set reinforcing bars. Wet setting is not permitted.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum concrete coverages for protection of bars. Minimum
required concrete cover is noted in drawings.
E. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
F. Use of nails in forms and use of clay brick to support reinforcement is prohibited.
G. Lap bar splices as indicated. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. Wire-tie splices.
H. At points where bars lap-splice, including distribution steel, provide wire-tied minimum lap of 30-bar
diameters unless otherwise required.
J. Place concrete in manner to ensure alignment of elements remains unchanged.
K. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according
to ASTM D 3963. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.
L. Comply with manufacturer-recommended procedures for installing and anchoring of doweled
reinforcement using chemical adhesives, including drilling and cleaning of holes and mixing and applying
of adhesives.
M. Dedicate workers to placement of reinforcement to continuously monitor and adjust reinforcement location
during concrete placement.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items including embedded plates
required for other work attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.
B. Do not wet set embedded items. Accurately position, support, and secure embedded items against
displacing by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-11
April 24, 2019
C. Embedded structural supports incorrectly located or damaged after installation shall be field modified,
including repair or replacement, by Contractor.
1. Notify Engineer of defective work. Submit proposed field modifications to Engineer for review
and acceptance prior to making corrections.
2. Proposed field modifications shall include design details and calculations, signed and sealed by a
licensed Professional Engineer hired by Contractor.
3. Field modifications shall be tested in accordance with Section 051200. Perform pull-out tests and
other appropriate tests on each repair.
4. Cost of field modifications shall be borne entirely by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for cost of additional testing required.
3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an accepted form-coating compound before placing
reinforcement.
B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come in contact with in-place
concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventive material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not
acceptable.
3.7 WALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Locate and install
construction joints so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or
acceptable to Architect.
1. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls. Roughen joints
between reinforced concrete walls and footings to a minimum 1/4-inch amplitude and remove dirt
and concrete laitance prior to casting concrete walls.
2. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated in drawings. If not indicated, space joints a maximum of
60 feet.
3. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of
strip placements.
4. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
3.8 RAMP SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Locate and install construction joints not shown in drawings so as not to impair strength and appearance of
structure as acceptable to Engineer.
B. Construction joints in exposed slabs on grade shall be doweled joints.
C. Continue half of bar reinforcement through construction joints in concealed slabs and slabs on metal deck.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-12
April 24, 2019
3.9 RAMP SLAB CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Saw cut contraction joints as soon as possible after finishing, generally within 4 to 16 hours. Make sample
cut to determine if concrete surface is firm enough so it is not torn or damaged by blade.
B. Use soft-cut contraction joints.
1. For slabs on grade, depth of cut shall be one-fifth of slab thickness with minimum of 1 inch.
2. For slabs on metal deck, depth of cut shall be one-fifth of slab cover over metal deck, with
maximum depth of ¾ inch.
C. Obtain permission from Engineer if diamond blade cutting is to be used.
D. Contraction joints in exposed slabs on grade shall be doweled joints.
E. Continue half of bar reinforcement through contraction joints in concealed slabs and slabs on metal deck.
3.10 WALL CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement and embedded items is
complete and required inspections have been performed.
1. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. Cooperate with other trades in setting work
as required.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete" and as specified.
C. A maximum of 2 1/2 gallons for each cubic yard of total mix design water can be added in field. Water
must be added prior to discharging and testing concrete. At no time shall total water exceed amount listed
in accepted mix design.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within
section. Provide construction joints if section cannot be placed continuously.
E. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation caused by rehandling or
flowing.
F. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in manner to avoid inclined
construction joints.
G. Keep excavations free of water. Do not deposit concrete in water, mud, snow, or on frozen ground.
H. Maximum drop of concrete shall not exceed 5 feet. Use hopper and trunk for greater drops.
J. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement.
K. Pumping concrete is permitted only if mix designs specifically prepared and used previously for pumping
are submitted. Pump line shall have 5-inch-minimum inside diameter and be used with 5-inch pumps.
3.11 SLAB CONCRETE PLACEMENT
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-13
April 24, 2019
A. Maximum of 2 1/2 gallons for each cubic yard of total mix design water can be added in field. Water must
be added prior to discharging and testing concrete. At no time shall total water exceed amount listed in
accepted mix design.
B. Slab:
1. Use strip pour methods and mechanical vibratory screed whenever possible.
2. Deposit and consolidate concrete in continuous operation within limits of construction joints until
placing of panel or section is complete.
3. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
4. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use darbies to smooth
surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water or portland cement on plastic
surface. Do not disturb slab surfaces before beginning finishing operations.
5. Maintain reinforcement in proper position during concrete placement operations. See requirements
for reinforcement placement.
6. Cost of corrections to provide for positive drainage shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
C. OPTION FOR RAMP SLAB PLACEMENT
1. For placement of slabs that will be subsequently concealed with an architectural finish material,
Contractor has two options. Option 1 is to place slabs with few joints or construction joints only.
Option 2 is to place slabs with construction and contraction joint spacings as recommended by
ACI 302, “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.” Contractor shall submit option to be
used and joint layout to Architect and Engineer for review.
2. If Option 1 is selected, shrinkage cracking will likely occur but potential for curling will be
reduced. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing cracks and curled areas. If Option 2 is
selected, probability of shrinkage cracking will be less but probability of curling will increase.
Contractor shall be responsible for repairing cracks and curled areas.
3.12 WALL SURFACE FINISHES
A. Rough-Form Finish: Provide as-cast, rough-form finish to formed concrete surfaces that shall be concealed
in finished work or by other construction. Standard rough-form finish is concrete surface having texture
imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and other defective areas repaired and patched, and
fins or other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
3.13 RAMP SLAB FINISH
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces. After leveling, roughen surface before
final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of ¼ inch in one direction.
B. Float Finish: Apply power float finish to slab surfaces that will subsequently be covered with
waterproofing membrane. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface
until ready for floating. Begin floating using float blade or float shoes when surface water has disappeared,
when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate
surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Cut
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-14
April 24, 2019
down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth,
granular texture.
C. Delay finishing as long as possible. Allow bleed water to evaporate before finishing.
D. Finish slabs to specified tolerances given. Patching low spots shall not be permitted. Perform grinding as
soon as possible, preferably within 3 days, but not until concrete is sufficiently strong to prevent dislodging
coarse aggregate particles.
3.14 RAMP SLAB JOINT SEALANT
A. Install joint sealant in contraction joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Clean joints thoroughly before applying sealant.
C. Apply sealant after slabs have cured 90 days minimum.
3.15 CONSOLIDATION
A. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding,
or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309.
B. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside formwork.
C. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness
of machine. Vibrators shall penetrate placed layer of concrete at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set.
D. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.
E. Do not allow vibrator to come in contact with form.
3.16 WALL CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperature, and damage in
accordance with provisions of ACI 306R for cold-weather protection and ACI 305, for hot-weather
protection.
B. Curing Methods: Perform concrete curing in accordance with ACI 308 by wet-curing or moisture-retaining
cover curing or combinations thereof as specified.
C. Provide wet-curing by following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Use continuous water-fog spray.
3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and
keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges
with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
D. Provide moisture-retaining-cover curing as follows:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-15
April 24, 2019
1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair holes or tears during curing period
using cover material and waterproof tape.
E. Curing Vertical-Formed Surfaces:
1. Keep forms in place for minimum of 7 days, 14 days in cold weather or until concrete has
achieved 70 percent of its design strength.
2. If forms are removed before minimum time period, alternate methods of curing, wet-curing,
moisture-retaining-cover curing, or liquid-membrane curing, are required.
a. Contractor shall submit procedures to Architect for review.
b. Forms shall remain in place for a minimum of 24 hours when alternating methods of curing
are used. For placement during cold weather, the minimum time to form removal shall be
extended based on expected weather conditions and Contractor’s submitted procedures.
F. Cure concrete placed under cold-weather conditions completely covering exposed surface of concrete with
moisture-retaining cover completely sealed around edges. Cure concrete 14 days minimum with concrete
temperature at or above 40 degrees F or 7 days minimum with concrete temperature at or above 70 degrees
F.
G. During hot weather after concrete has hardened, loosen form ties, keeping forms in place, and apply water
to inside face of form to keep concrete continuously moist.
3.17 SLAB PROTECTION AND CURING
A. Protect freshly placed slabs from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature. Maintain without
drying at a relatively constant temperature for time period necessary for cement hydration and proper
hardening.
B. Cure exterior slabs completely by moist-curing using burlap absorptive cover, soaker hoses, and ponding
for at least 7 days. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-inch
lap over adjacent absorptive covers. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. Allow absorptive cover to
remain an additional 3 days.
C. Do not allow foot or other traffic over slabs during 7-day curing period.
D. Cure slabs or pads 14 days minimum before placing equipment.
E. Exterior Slabs:
1. Apply penetrating exterior anti-spalling sealer to exterior concrete slabs, walks, platforms, steps,
ramps, and curbs according to manufacturer's directions.
3.18 COLD-WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 306R.
B. For cold-weather concreting (defined as when air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40
degrees F (4 degrees C) during the protection period), maintain concrete temperature in accordance with
Table 5.1, and maintain concrete protection in accordance with Table 7.1 in "Cold-Weather Concreting"
reported by ACI Committee 306.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-16
April 24, 2019
C. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C), uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain concrete mixture temperature recommended in Table 5.1 of
ACI 306R.
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators.
3.19 HOT-WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 305.
B. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 85 degrees F at time of placement.
C. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent
of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
D. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if temperature of reinforcing steel exceeds ambient air
temperature.
E. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
F. Fog-spray forms and reinforcing steel just before placing concrete.
G. Use water-reducing, retarding admixture when required by high temperature, low humidity, or other
adverse placing conditions when acceptable to Architect.
3.20 WALL CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after form
removal when acceptable to Architect.
1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/2 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods
and bolts, down to solid concrete but not to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat area to be
patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be
repaired to satisfaction of Architect. These include surface defects such as color, texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and
other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form-tie holes, and fill with dry-pack
mortar or precast-cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1. Where possible, repair concealed formed surfaces containing defects affecting concrete durability.
If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces for smoothness, and verify surface plane to
tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas. Test unformed surfaces sloped
to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using template having required slope.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-17
April 24, 2019
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects affecting concrete durability. These include
surface defects such as crazing, cracks, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other
objectionable conditions.
D. Repair methods not specified above may be used subject to acceptance of Architect.
3.21 SLAB SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for cost of repairing slab defects.
B. Test surfaces for flatness and level tolerances. Test uniform surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope.
C. Correct flatness and levelness defects by grinding or removing and replacing slab. Patching low spots not
permitted. Repair areas shall be remeasured and accepted by Owner.
D. Repair cracks only when slab is more than 90 days old. Use crack repair material. For cracks over 1/8 inch,
fill crack with oven-dried sand prior to application of crack repair material as recommended by
manufacturer. Contractor has option to remove and rebuild areas of cracking. Mask cracks to limit crack
repair material to crack only.
E. Repair curling only when slab is more than 90 days old.
F. Curling at slab edges exceeding 1/8 inch when measured with a 10-foot straightedge shall be made level by
grinding or planing. Locate straightedge with its end at the slab edge, and measure space between
straightedge and slab.
G. If curling exceeds 1/4 inch, level slab by grinding or planing as stated above. In addition, core-drill slab 10
inches from joint at 2 foot intervals, alternating on each side of joint, and inject nonshrink grout to fill void
beneath slab.
H. Repair edge spalls occurring from shrinkage cracking or from Contractor's operations with methods
acceptable to Engineer.
3.22 TOLERANCES
A. Walls:
1. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions in thickness of walls: plus or minus 1/4 inch.
2. Variation in plan from specified location in plan: plus or minus 1/2 inch for any member in any
location.
3. Deviation in plan from straight lines parallel to specified linear building lines: 1/4 inch for
adjacent members less than 20 feet apart or any wall length less than 20 feet; 1/2 inch for adjacent
members 20 feet or more apart or any wall length of 20 feet and greater.
4. Deviation from plumb: 1/4 inch for any 10 feet of height; 1 inch maximum for entire height.
5. Variation in elevation from specified elevation: plus or minus 1/2 inch for any member in any
location.
B. Embedded Items (plates, angles, etc.) other than anchor rods and sleeves:
1. Variation from specified location in plan: plus or minus 1/4 inch.
2. Variation from specified elevation: plus or minus 1/4 inch.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-18
April 24, 2019
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM
Submit separate form for each mix design
Project: Location:
General Contractor: Concrete Supplier:
Mix Design No: Concrete Grade:
Use (Describe):
Methods of Placement (chute, pump, chute and buggy, etc.:
If placing by pumping, verify concrete mix can be pumped distances required in project:
A. DESIGN MIX INFORMATION:
Based on Standard Deviation Analysis:___________________ or Trial Mix Design Data:____________
Design Characteristics - Density:___________________ pcf; Strength:_________________ psi (28-day);
Slump:_______________________ in. required BEFORE adding superplasticizer (if used)
Slump:_______________________ in. required AFTER adding superplasticizer (if used)
Entrained Air Content:_____________________% specified
Materials:
Aggregates: (size; type; source; gradation; specification)
Coarse:______________________________________________________________________________
Fine:________________________________________________________________________________
Other Materials: Type Product-Manufacturer (Source)
Cement:____________________________________ ________________________________________
Fly Ash:____________________________________ ________________________________________
Slag:_______________________________________ ________________________________________
Admixtures:
Water Reducer:________________________________________________________________________
Air-Entraining Agent:___________________________________________________________________
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixtures (superplasticizer):____________________________________
Non-Corrosive Accelerator:______________________________________________________________
Other:_______________________________________________________________________________
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-19
April 24, 2019
B. FINAL MIX DESIGN DATA:
RATIOS MIX PROPORTIONS
Water _____________ lb
Cementitious lb = ________
Materials
Course Agg. ____________ lb
Fine Agg. lb =________
SPECIFIC GRAVITIES
Fine Agg.______________________________
Coarse Agg.____________________________
Other:_________________________________
ADMIXTURES
W.R.:_______________ oz. per 100 # Cement
HRWR:______________ oz. per 100 #Cement
Non-Corrosive Accelerator:_____________ oz.
Per 100# Cement
A.E.A.:____________________________ oz. per 100 # Cement
Other:_____________________________ oz. per 100# Cement
PLASTIC CONCRETE
Initial Slump = _______________ in. Air Content = _________________%
Final Slump = _______________ in. Unit Dry Wt. = _________________ pcf
Unit Wet Wt. = _______________ pcf
STANDARD DEVIATION ANALYSIS (from experience records):
Number of Test Cylinders Evaluated:_____________________ Standard Deviation:_________________
fcr=fc + 1.34s or fcr=fc +2.33s – 500
(Refer to ACI for increased deviation factor when fewer than 30 tests are available.)
Mix #_____________________________________ Job Name_________________________________
WEIGHT ABSOLUTE VOL.
(LBS.) (CU. FT.)
Cement: ___________ __________________
Fly Ash: ___________ __________________
Slag: ___________ __________________
Fine
Aggregate: ___________ __________________
Coarse
Aggregate: ___________ __________________
Water: ___________ __________________
Entrained
Air: ___________ __________________
Other: ___________ __________________
TOTALS: ___________ __________________
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03 30 00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-20
April 24, 2019
C. LABORATORY TEST DATA (HARDENED CONCRETE):
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
Age (days) Mix #1 Mix #2 Mix #3
7 __________________ _________________ ___________________
14 __________________ _________________ ___________________
28 __________________ _________________ ___________________
Other __________________ _________________ ___________________
28-day average compressive strength: ______________________________psi
Mix design proportioned to achieve fcr = fc + 1200 psi (1400 psi for strength higher than 5000 psi at 28 days)
CHLORIDE ION CONTENT: ____________________________________________________________
Remarks:_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
NOTE: Fill in all blank spaces. Use-0- (Zero) or N.A. (Not Applicable) where appropriate. See “Design and
Control of Concrete Mixtures,” 13th Edition by Portland Cement Association, for assistance in completing this form.
D. REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS:
______________________Coarse aggregate gradation report and DOT certification
______________________ Fine aggregate gradation report and DOT certification
______________________ Concrete compressive strength data used for standard deviation calculations
______________________ Chloride ion data and related calculations
______________________ Rapid chloride permeability test report
______________________ Admixture compatibility certification letter
Submitted by
Ready-Mix
Supplier: Name ___________________________________________________________________
Address ___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
Phone Number__________________________________ Date_____________________________
Main Plant Location___________________________________ Miles from Project________________
Secondary Plant Location________________________________ Miles from Project________________
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 04 01 40 - STONE RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Localized stone masonry repair and stone replacement (where indicated).
2. Localized stone masonry repointing, reconstruction and repointing.
3. Cutting new stone reglets for flashings and step flashings,
4. Localized masonry cleaning.
5. Masonry anchors, attachments and accessories.
B. Related Section:
1. Section 04 42 00 “Dimensioned Stone.”
2. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal and Trim.”
3. Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealant.”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Mortar used to set and anchor masonry in a structure, distinct from pointing
mortar installed after masonry is set in place.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to repointing brick masonry including, but no t limited to,
the following:
a. Verify masonry repointing specialist's personnel, schedule, equipment, and facilities
needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances.
c. Quality-control program.
d. Coordination with building occupants and other trades.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including mortars, anchors and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show replacement and repair anchors, including drilled-in pins.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-2
April 24th, 2019
C. Samples for verification: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1. Pointing Mortar: Submit sets of mortar for pointing in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches
long by 1/4 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.
a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different mixes of
colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching existing, cleaned mortar when
cured and dry.
b. Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, gradations, and source of
colored sands from which each Sample was made.
2. Sand Type Used for Pointing Mortar: Minimum 8 oz. of each in plastic screw-top jars.
3. Stone Repair Mortar: Round mortar discs for color and texture samples.
D. Cleaning Materials & Methods: Product information and recommended application instructions.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For mortar types to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Stone Repair Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced stone repair firm to perform work of this
Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project with a record of 10 years of successful in-service performance. Experience in only installing
standard unit masonry or new stone masonry is insufficient experience for stone repair work.
B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of stone repair to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards
for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation.
1. Stone Repair: Cut out, prepare and install stone repair mortar in two separate areas, each
approximately 6 inches by 6 inches.
2. Repointing: Rake out joints in two separate areas, each approximately 24 inches high by
36 inches wide and repoint one of the areas leaving the other area un-pointed in order to
display the removed and properly prepared mortar joints.
3. Stone Cleaning: Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse
reactions. Do not test cleaners and methods known to have deleterious effect.
a. Clean a 2 square foot area to confirm type and acceptable dilution of cleaning detergents.
4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved (fully repointed) mockup may become part of
the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with
manufacturer's name and type of products.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-3
April 24th, 2019
B. Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if containers have
been damaged or have been opened for more than two days.
C. Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
avoided.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit stone restoration and cleaning work to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions and specified requirements.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for stone repair and mort ar-joint
pointing unless otherwise indicated:
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, repair materials, and existing
stone to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.
2. When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to maintain
temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 7 days after repair and pointing.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect stone repair and mortar -joint pointing when temperature and
humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials. Provide
artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required to minimize evaporation. Do not
apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above unless otherwise noted.
D. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is at least 40 deg F and above is predicted to remain so
for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. All masonry work above the roof line shall be substantially completed before roofing work.
B. Order replacement materials at earliest possible date to avoid delaying completion of the Work.
C. Order pointing mortar immediately after approval of mockups. Take delivery of and store at Project site a
sufficient quantity to complete Project.
D. Perform masonry restoration work i n the following sequence:
1. Remove all sealants from mortar joints and cap stone joints.
2. Rake out mortar from joints adjacent to masonry repairs along joints.
3. Where damaged, replace portions of existing masonry with new masonry. Notify Architect of
replacement locations.
4. Remove and carefully store capstones.
5. Install thru-wall flashings, anchors and reset cap stones.
6. Rake out mortar from joints to be repointed.
7. Point mortar joints.
8. After repairs and repointing have been comp leted and cured, perform a final cleaning to remove
residues from this work.
E. As scaffolding, if any, is removed, patch anchor holes in mortar joints
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-4
April 24th, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE MATERIALS
A. For Replacement Limestone - Match Existing Limestone Stone: Natural building stone of variety, color,
texture, grain, veining, finish, size, and shape that match existing stone; ASTM C568.
1. Physical Properties for Limestone:
a. Classification: Medium Density; 135-160 lbs/ cu.ft.
b. Compressive Strength: 4000psi according to ASTM C 170/C 170M.
c. Modulus of Rupture: 700psi according to ASTM C 99/C 99.
d. Absorption: 7.5 maximum percent according to ASTM C 97/C 97.
e. Bulk Specific Gravity: 135 pounds per cubic foot according to ASTM C 97/C 97.
f. Color: Match existing.
g. Grade: Standard
h. Finishes: Smooth
i. Thickness: 3” nominal unless noted otherwise.
B. For Granite Watertable and Ledge Stone:
a. Refer to 04 42 00 “Dimensioned Stone.”
b. Thickness: 2” nominal.
C. Cutting New Stone: Cut each new stone so that, when it is set in final position, the rift or natural bedding
planes will be in horizontal orientation.
1. Cut rabbet and drip legs in stone as shown on the drawings.
2.2 STONE REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Stone Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom color manufactured for
patching stone.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jahn M70 Limestone and Sandstone Repair Mortar.
b. Conproco Corporation; Matrix.
c. Edison Coatings, Inc.; Custom System 45.
2. Use formulation that is vapor and water permeable (equal to or more than the stone), exhibits low
shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than stone units being repaired, and develops high bond
strength to all types of stone.
3. Formulate patching compound in colors, textures, and grain to match stone being patched.
2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Natural Hydraulic Lime: Pure and natural hydraulic lime, for use on stone masonry.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-5
April 24th, 2019
D. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.
1. Mortar: Match size, texture, color, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible.
Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
2. Colored Mortar: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
E. Mortar Pigments: Compounded for use in mortar mixes, recommended by the mortar manufacturer and
having a record of compatible and satisfactory performance in stone mortars.
F. Water: Potable, chlorine free.
2.4 MORTAR MIXES
A. Pre-Mixed or Field Mixed Reporting Mortar Type N; ASTM C270 Proportion Method.
1. Mix Design: 1:1:6 Lime, Portland Cement & Sand.
2. Color: Matching color pigments as necessary to match the existing mortar: ASTM C270.
2.5 CLEANING MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
A. Non-acidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard gel formulation, with pH between 3 and 9, that contains
detergents with chelating agents and is specifically formulated for cleaning masonry and stone surfaces
without damage
1. Limestone Cleaning Material Manufacturer: SureKlean Limestone & Masonry by Prosoco Inc or
approved equivalent.
2. Stone Cleaning Material Manufacturer: SureKlean Restoration Cleaner by Prosoco Inc or
approved equivalent.
B. Water: Potable.
C. Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.
2.6 ACCESSORY VENEER ANCHORS
A. Materials: Unless noted otherwise all masonry and stone anchors are stainless steel ASTM A 240 or
ASTM A 666, Type 304/316.
B. Stainless Steel Dowels: 3/8” or ½” diameter, lengths as indicated on the drawings, smooth.
C. Stainless Steel Adjustable Masonry Ties: 3/16” diameter 12ga, adjustable masonry ties; Type
HB#345BT by Hohmann & Barnard Inc or approved equivalent.
D. Stainless Steel Rod Anchors for Limestone Veneer: 3/8” thick rod anchors, lengths as required; Type
HB#408 by Hohmann & Barnard Inc or approved equivalent.
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Stone Shims: Malleable lead shims.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-6
April 24th, 2019
B. Low VOC Zinc-Rich Primer: For concealed steel anchors and supporting angles; Tnemec or equivalent.
C. Epoxy Adhesive Resin: Single or two component epoxy adhesive resin suitable for exterior conditions
into multi-wythe stone masonry construction.
1. Accessories: Stainless steel screen tubes.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hilti, Inc USA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STONE REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
A. At locations indicated, remove stone that is to be reused and reinstalled. Carefully remove entire units
from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding stone, in a manner that permits reinstallation without
damage. Number and catalog all stones; photo document the stone positing and bedding.
B. Support and protect remaining stonework that surro unds removal area.
C. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.
D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose units in
existing stone or unit masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
E. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole stone units as possible.
1. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from stone by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and
water.
2. Remove sealants by cutting close to stone with utility knife and cleaning with solvents.
F. Clean stone surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for
stone replacement.
G. Replace removed damaged stone with other removed stone in good c ondition, where possible, matching
existing stone, including direction of rift or natural bedding planes. Do not use broken units unless they
can be cut to usable size.
H. Reinstall stone into bonding and coursing pattern of existing stone. If cutting is required, use a motor-
driven saw designed to cut stone with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Finish edges to blend with
appearance of edges of existing stone.
1. Maintain joint width for replacement stone to match existing joints.
I. Set stone with rebuilding (setting) mortar and with completely filled bed, head, and collar joi nts. Butter
vertical joints for full width before setting, and set units in full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.
Replace anchors with new anchors or provide new anchors of size and type indicated.
1. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing stonework.
J. Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours,
including weekends and holidays.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-7
April 24th, 2019
1. Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint i s unacceptable.
Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
3.2 STONE PATCHING
A. Remove deteriorated material and remove adjacent material that has begun to deteriorate. Carefully
remove additional material so patch does not have feathered edges but has square or slightly undercut
edges on area to be patched and is at least 1/4 inch thick, but not less than reco mmended in writing by
patching compound manufacturer.
B. Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch will extend to edge of stone unit.
C. Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each stone unit being patched. Combine one or
more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match.
D. Brush-coat stone surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Place patching compound in layers as recommended in writing by patchi ng compound manufacturer, but
not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more than 2 inches (50 mm) thick. Roughen surface of each layer to
provide a key for next layer.
1. Simple Details: Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surrounding surfa ce
plane or contour of the stone. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as determined by
testing, to best match existing stone.
2. Carved Details: Build patch up 1/4 inch (6 mm) above surrounding stone, and carve surface to
match adjoining stone after patching compound has hardened.
F. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching comp ound has set.
G. Remove and replace patches with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone at edges, and those
that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture.
3.3 REPOINTING STONEWORK
A. Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent:
1. All joints in areas indicated.
2. Joints indicated as sealant-filled joints. Seal joints according to Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
B. Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup:
1. Remove mortar from joints to depth of ¾ to 1 -1/2 inches, but not less than 3/4 inch or not less than
that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Do not remove unsound mortar more than 2
inches deep; consult Architect for direction.
2. Remove mortar from stone surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs
and to expose stone for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt
and loose debris.
3. Do not spall edges of stone units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged stone units as directed
by Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-8
April 24th, 2019
C. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose
stone, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
D. Pointing with Mortar:
1. Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar par ticles. Time rinsing application so, at
time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If rinse water dries, dampen
joint surfaces before pointing.
2. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths grea ter than
surrounding areas. Apply in multiple lifts/ layers not greater than 1/2 inch until a uniform depth is
formed. Fully compact each layer, and allow it to become thumb print hard before applying next
layer.
3. After deep areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point joints by placing mor tar
in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard
before applying next layer. Where existing stone has worn or rounded edges, slightly recess
finished mortar surface below face of stone to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread
mortar beyond joint edges onto exposed stone surfaces or to featheredge the mortar.
4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints a s demonstrated
in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.
5. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours,
including weekends and holidays.
6. Hairline cracking within mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely
remove such mortar and repoint.
E. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing stone, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before
beginning cleaning work.
3.4 STONE CLEANING
A. Cleaning Appearance Standard: Cleaned surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20
feet (6 m) away by Architect.
B. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom. Ensure that dirty residues and
rinse water do not wash over dry, cleaned surfaces.
C. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
1. Brushes: Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used.
2. Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and
pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning
methods do not damage surfaces, including joints.
a. Equip units with pressure gages.
b. For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable
for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with nozzle having a cone-shaped spray.
c. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses water at an angle of 25 to
50 degrees.
d. For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature
between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
D. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform cover age of all surfaces,
including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or
damaging masonry surfaces. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 01 40
Ithaca, New York STONE RESTORATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STONE RESTORATION 04 01 40-9
April 24th, 2019
E. Water-Spray Application Method: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from
masonry surface and apply water in horizontal back-and-forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous
strokes to produce uniform coverage.
F. Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces according to
chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application. Do not allow
chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
G. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each
stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area
to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed.
1. Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and
7.5.
3.5 FINAL CLEANING
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stone surfaces of excess mortar and foreign
matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied by low-pressure spray.
1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.
2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
END OF SECTION 04 01 40
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 42 00
Ithaca, New York DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE 04 42 00-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 04 42 00 – DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dimension stone treads and panels set on tread and panel supports.
2. Dimensioned capstones set on stone walls.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 04 01 40 “Stone Restoration.”
2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel" for stainless steel support plates.
3. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions contained in ASTM C 119 apply to this Section.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for dimension stone assembly, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units.
1. Show locations and details of joints. between dimension stone and other construction.
2. Include details of sealant joints and support shims.
3. Show locations and details of anchors.
4. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.
D. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each variety, color, and finish of stone required; not less than 12
inches square.
1. Sets shall consist of at least three Samples, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other
visual characteristics expected and will establish the standard b y which stone will be judged.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 42 00
Ithaca, New York DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE 04 42 00-2
April 24th, 2019
F. Material Test Reports:
1. Stone Test Reports: For stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing agency,
indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than ab rasion resistance, according
to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous five years.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate dimension stone
assemblies similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in -
service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing dimension stone assemblies similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in -
service performance.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate ae sthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups of typical stair tread.
a. Include typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation.
b. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint
Sealants."
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed
Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.
1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
2. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute
weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used o n Shop
Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side
up when units are installed.
C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product
name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 42 00
Ithaca, New York DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE 04 42 00-3
April 24th, 2019
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protect dimension stone during erection by doing the following:
1. Cover tops of dimension stone installation with nonstaining, waterproof sheeting at end of each
day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a
minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold securely in place.
2. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources. Immediately remove
such materials without damaging stone.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry, flashing reglets, and
similar items to be used by dimension stone Installer for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of dimension
stone assembly. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver
to Project site in time for installation.
B. Time delivery and installation of dimension stone to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate
with work adjacent to dimension stone.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRANITE
A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615.
B. Description: Uniform, medium-grained, black stone.
1. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. “Jet Mist” Stone; Granite Importers, 16 South Vine Street, Barre VT 05641.
2. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur.
3. Finish: Thermal.
4. Sizes: Type A, A1, B, C, D & E are indicated on the drawings.
a. Thickness: 3-1/2” thick unless noted otherwise.
b. Stair Tread Panels: Lengths as indicated by 13 inches wide; with nosing.
c. Stone Panels: Lengths as indicated by 12 inches wide.
d. East Terrace Walkway Edging: 52 inches long by 21 inches wide.
2.2 LIMESTONE
A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568.
B. Description: Uniform, medium-density, limestone capstone.
a. Refer to 04 01 40 “Stone Restoration” for material properties.
b. Thickness: 3” nominal with sloped top surface.
c. Capstone Size: Match existing capstones; 60 inches long by 20 inches wide.
d. Fascia Panel Size: Match existing fascia panel size.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 42 00
Ithaca, New York DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE 04 42 00-4
April 24th, 2019
2.3 STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Shims: Strips of vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70, nonstaining
to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors
without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.
2.4 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.
1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural
Granite."
B. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to
fit supports.
C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting devices as indicated
or needed to set stone securely in place.
D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match
approved samples and mockups.
E. Cut stone to produce uniform joints 3/8 inch wide and in locations indicated.
F. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as required to
accommodate contiguous work.
G. Fabricate molded work, including washes and drips, to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile
throughout entire unit length, with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and with
matching profile at joints between units.
H. Inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance,
material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations
in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance
characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive dimension stone and conditions under which dimension stone will be
installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of dimension stone .
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of dimension
stone.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 42 00
Ithaca, New York DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE 04 42 00-5
April 24th, 2019
3.2 SETTING DIMENSION STONE, GENERAL
A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign
materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water.
Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
B. Execute dimension stone installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at Project site
to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges
eased slightly to prevent snipping.
C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to accommodate co ntiguous work.
D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other
attachments indicated or necessary to secure dimension stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports,
and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated, and
with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
E. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
2. Keep expansion joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
3.3 SETTING STONE CAPS WITH OPEN JOINTS
A. Set stone caps as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated, with edges
and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to
secure units in place.
2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated
with uniform joints.
B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of stone units and backup
wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.
C. Set stone dry supported on lead or non-ferrous shims. Use material of thickness required to
maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal
to width of joint.
D. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from
joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and stone units are anchored. Do not begin
sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed.
1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not more than ¼ - 3/8 inch.
E. Prime cast-stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before
applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 04 42 00
Ithaca, New York DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DIMENSIONED EXTERIOR STONE 04 42 00-6
April 24th, 2019
1. Seal head joints only.
3.4 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable
requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Level: For treads and panels and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10
feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum.
B. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not
exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/8 inch or a
quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 60 inches of each other, do not vary
more than 1/8 inch or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less from one to the other.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Unit s (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch difference between
planes of adjacent units.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective joints, and
dimension stone that does not match approved sa mples. Damaged stone may be repaired if Architect
approves methods and results.
B. Replace damaged or defective work in a manner that results in dimension stone matching approved
samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean dimension stone as work progresses. Remove excess sealant and smears as
sealant is installed.
D. Final Cleaning: Clean dimension stone no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing,
using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents,
cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could
damage stone.
END OF SECTION 04 42 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 05 13
Ithaca, New York SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL 05 05 13-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 05 05 13 - SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes all high-performance powder coated finish on metal substrates.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel,” for related steel elements and galvanizing.
2. Section 05 73 00 “Decorative Metal Railings.
3. Section 08 91 19 “Fixed Louvers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Galvanizing: The act of coating steel with zinc in order to provide barrier and cathodic protection from
corrosion.
B. Duplex systems: Galvanized steel that has been coated with an additional corrosion-inhibiting product,
typically liquid or powder paint; the two separate coating systems work synergistically to provide enhanced
corrosion protection.
C. Passivation: Changing chemically active metal surfaces to a much less reactive state (see phosphating).
D. Phosphating: Forming an adherent phosphate coating on a metal by immersion in a suitable aqueous
phosphate solution, commonly used to promote better adhesion of paint or powder coating to galvanized
steel
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples:
1. Color Selection Sample: Submit 3 inch x 6 inch samples of factory applied coatings and color
options.
2. Final Color Selection Sample: Submit 3 inch x 6 inch samples of factory applied coatings and color.
C. Quality Assurance Submittal: Copies of certificates required under Quality Assurance Article.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals.
E. Sample warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 05 13
Ithaca, New York SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL 05 05 13-2
April 24th, 2019
1. American Galvanizers Association (AGA): Hot-Dip Galvanizing for Corrosion Protection: A
Specifier’s Guide (2006).
2. American Galvanizers Association, Inc. (AGA): Publication Entitled, “Inspection of Hot Dip
Galvanized Products (2008)”.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A 780-09 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
b. D 7803 – 12 Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and
Hardware Surfaces for Powder Coating.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate submittal and selection procedures for items to receive shop -applied coatings. Where items are
indicated to match coatings selected for other items, adjust formulations as required to achieve match.
Submit samples for verification indicating compliance with matching requirements.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Of type to prevent damage to galvanized and duplex coated surfaces and distortion of steel
materials and components.
B. Handling and Storage: Conform to ASTM A-123. Protect galvanized materials from damage to zinc
coating and duplex coating during handling. Space surfaces of galvanized and duplex coated materials to
permit free circulation of air, during storage.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Coating Warranty: Coating Applicator's warranty in which Applicator agrees to repair finish or replace
coated items that demonstrate deterioration of shop-applied finishes within warranty period indicated.
1. Provide 20 year warranty against rust and 5 year warranty against coating failures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWDER COATING OF GALVANIZED STEEL
A. Provide color coating of hot-dipped galvanized materials in the galvanizer’s own plant, within 36 hours of
galvanizing. Properties of Cured Coating shall meet the following specifications :
1. The minimum film thickness shall be 5.0 mils (120µm). The coating thickness for both the
galvanized and powder coated components shall be measured independently.
2. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: F, minimum.
3. Salt Spray Resistance, ASTM G 85: 2,000 hours.
4. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D 2247: 4,000 hours.
B. Powder Coat Application:
1. The surface shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM D7803, 5. Process for Newly Galvanized
Steel.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 05 13
Ithaca, New York SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL 05 05 13-3
April 24th, 2019
2. Apply all powder coat material in a suitably designed paint spray booth.
3. The surface shall be free of chromate conversion coating, oil and grease.
4. The surface shall be pretreated using a phosphate acid to provide the conversion coating or light
sweep blasting to remove zinc oxide or zinc hydroxide. Other methods of pre-treating may be used
as per ATM D7803 as approved by the agency.
5. The surface shall be thermally pretreated by prebaking (out gassing) for one hour after reaching
outgassing temperature defined as being 50° F (30° C) higher than the powder manufacturer’s
suggested curing temperature. The thermal pretreatment temperature shall not exceed 535°F
(280°C).
6. Cure coating in an oven according to powder manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Acceptable Powder Coating Products: Fluoroplymer; AAMA 2605 .
2.2 PAINTING OF GALVANIZED STEEL
A. Galvanized Steel shall be prepared for painting as per ASTM D6386 -10.
B. Provide color coating of hot-dipped galvanized materials in the galvanizer’s own plant, within 36 hours of
galvanizing apply pretreatment by an air less electrostatic spray to a dry thickness of .25 to .33 mils and a
top coat applied in a similar manner to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.5 mils.
C. The coating thickness for both the galvanized and powder coated components shall be measured
independently.
D. Apply all paint material in a suitably designed paint spray booth capable of controlling environmental
conditions. Do not apply when the air, steel or paint temperature is below 50 degrees F or when the
humidity exceeds 70 percent.
E. Color: As selected by the owner architect from the manufacturer full color selection. Provide initial color
samples for selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect installed galvanized materials, fabrications, and assemblies to conform to applicable requirements
of AGA “Inspection Manual for Hot Dip Galvanized Products”, consisting of visual inspection.
3.2 TOUCH UP AND REPAIR
A. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces by the following method:
1. Over wire brushed surface, apply 95 percent (by weight) organic zinc rich paint in accordance with
ASTM A 780 by brush or roller.
B. Repair of duplex coating:
1. Damage shall be defined as exposed galvanized coating.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 05 13
Ithaca, New York SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL 05 05 13-4
April 24th, 2019
2. Damaged coatings less than ½ of 1% of the surface area shall be acceptable for repair. Recoat
damage greater than this amount.
3. Repair of Painted Surfaces:
a. Dry film thickness of applied repair paint to be not less than galvanized coating thickness
required by ASTM A-123, A-153 or A-386 as applicable.
4. Repair of Powder Coating Surfaces:
a. Coatings to be repaired shall be touched up as recommended by the galvanizer and the
powder coating supplier. Touch up and/or field repair can be accomplished using either
powder coating material or paint. Use acrylic based paint as recommended by the powder
coating material manufacturer, applied either by spray or brushed on liquid for touch up and
repair of the powder coating.
3.3 SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS – SCHEDULE
A. Powder Coating Items:
1. Structural steel stringers.
a. Basis of Design Color: Custom Color match Sherman Williams Color SW7029 – Agreeable
Gray.
2. Steel Guard railing.
a. Basis of Design Color: Custom Color match Sherman Williams Color SW7065 – Argos.
b. Basis of Design Color
3. Stainless steel handrailing.
a. Basis of Design Color: Custom Color match Sherman Williams Color SW 6412 – Eminent
Bronze (match Olin Entry Doors).
4. Stainless steel tread plates and supports (exposed portions).
a. Basis of Design: Custom Color match Sherman Williams Color SW7029 – Agreeable Gray.
B. Final color approval shall be by the architect and campus architect.
END OF SECTION 05 05 13
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 12 00
Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section includes structural steel.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with latest editions of:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Manual of Steel Construction," including:
- ANSI/AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.”
- AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”
- Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC), “Specification for Structural Joints
Using High-Strength Bolts.”
2. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS)
a. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel.”
3. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC), Educational Bulletin No. 4, "Recommended
Erection and Field Inspection Procedures for High-Strength Bolts in Structural Steel Assemblies."
4. American Hot-Dip Galvanizers Association, Inc.; Zinc Institute Inc.
a. "Inspection Manual for Hot-Dip Galvanized Products."
5. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
a. "Surface Preparation Specifications."
B. Qualifications for Welding Work:
1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS standards.
2. Provide one of the following certifications for welders to be employed in work.
a. Certification of satisfactorily passing AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months to
perform type of welding in work.
b. Work record signed by supervisor showing regular employment within previous 12 months
to perform type of welding in work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 12 00
Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-2
April 24, 2019
C. Qualifications for Fabricator, Detailer, and Erector:
1. Fabricator, Detailer, and Erector of structural steel shall have minimum 3 years experience in
fabricating, detailing, and erecting structural steel.
a. Erector Qualifications: Erector shall be AISC Certified Erector, Category CSE.
b. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator shall be AISC Certified Fabricator, Category STD.
c. AISC Certification for Fabricators and Erectors may be waived at the discretion of Owner,
Architect, and Engineer provided acceptable written quality assurance and quality control
plan is submitted.
2. Submit written description of ability.
3. At completion of fabrication, Fabricator shall submit Certificate of Compliance to Special
Inspector and Code Enforcement Official stating work was performed in accordance with
approved Construction Documents in accordance with Chapter 17 of the International Building
Code (IBC) as referenced by the New York State Uniform Code.
1.4 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Refer to Specification Section 01 45 33.
1.5 MATERIAL EVALUATION/QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall employ testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer and Architect to perform material
evaluation tests.
B. Submit testing service qualifications demonstrating experience with similar types of projects.
C. The Registered Design Professionals (RDPs) for Structural Engineering and Architecture will visit
construction site at appropriate intervals to determine if work is in general conformance with Contract
Documents and specifications. Notify RDPs 48 hours before anticipated time of completion for a given
section of work so they may determine if site observations are required. If site observations are required,
do not conceal framing until RDPs have had opportunity to make observations.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Review of submittals will be for general conformance only. Compliance with requirements for
materials, fabrication, erection, and dimensioning of structural steel shall be Contractor's responsibility.
Resubmitted shop drawings shall have revisions identified and dated.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing:
1. Submit Shop Drawings showing details of each individual steel shipping piece.
2. Submit Erection Drawings showing location and attachment of individual steel shipping pieces.
Including field installation details in Erection Drawings.
3. Reference Contract Drawing number and addendum number in each shop and Erection drawing.
4. Shop and Erection drawings shall show:
a. Details including cuts, copes, camber, connections, holes, bolts, and other pertinent
information.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 12 00
Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-3
April 24, 2019
b. Material, including ASTM designations and grades or manufacturer’s data as appropriate.
c. Welds with size, length, and type.
5. Shop and Erection drawings shall be checked by detailer and noted as checked in drawings before
submitting. Failure to submit checked Shop and Erection drawings will be cause for their return
without review. If drawings are not prepared by detailer under direct control of Fabricator,
Fabricator shall stamp each drawing and initial or sign stamp to certify review and approval of
drawings and conformance with Fabricator’s shop practice and capability.
C. Material Data: Submit to Special Inspector and Engineer laboratory test reports and other data as required
to show compliance with specifications. Submit producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and
installation instructions for the following products:
1. Structural steel, including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical
properties.
2. High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.
3. Unfinished bolts and nuts.
4. Structural steel primer paint if used.
5. Welding electrodes.
6. Post-installed anchors (expansion, sleeve, or chemical adhesive) if used.
D. Bolt Certification: Submit to Special Inspector and Engineer certifications that bolts, nuts, and washers
furnished comply with specifications. Submit manufacturer's inspection certificates for mill tests. For
fasteners to be accepted, lot numbers on kegs, boxes, or bags must correlate with lot numbers shown in
accepted test certificates and identification numbers in mill test reports. Manufacturer's symbol and grade
markings must appear on bolts and nuts.
E. Field Modifications: Submit drawings showing field modifications required to conform to actual field
conditions or as required to correct errors in shop drawings, fabrication, or erection.
F. Erector’s Welding Procedure Specifications: Submit welding procedure specifications for joint types
detailed for field welding.
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Store material in horizontal position on supports above ground.
B. Protect from weather, and keep free of dirt and debris.
C. Handle material carefully so it is not bent or marred.
D. Store bolted fastener components in closed containers protected from moisture and contamination.
Remove from protective storage containers only number of fasteners required for one shift. Return
fasteners not installed at end of work day to protective storage.
E. Repair or replace damaged materials. Do not incorporate in work fastener components that accumulate
rust or dirt.
1.8 WORKMANSHIP
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 12 00
Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-4
April 24, 2019
A. Contractor shall be responsible for correction of work not conforming to specified requirements. Correct
deficient work as directed by Engineer.
B. Remove work found to be defective. Replace with new acceptable work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be new and free from rust.
B. Rolled-Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. Provide ASTM A 572, Grade 50
where indicated in the drawings.
C. Rolled-Steel Angles, C, MC, S, M, ST and MT Shapes: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. Provide
ASTM A 572, Grade 50 where indicated in the drawings.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.
E. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A 500, Grade B or C.
F. Stainless Steel Plates: ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316; smooth finish.
G. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316; or ASTM A 312, Grade TP304 or TP316; smooth
finish.
H. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325 or A 490, Type 1, plain.
I. High-Strength Bolts, Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 Condition CW.
J. High-Strength Bolts, Galvanized: ASTM A 325, Type 1.
K. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36 unless otherwise indicated in Drawings.
L. Nuts: ASTM A 563. Grade and finish to match bolt or rod type.
M. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 Condition CW.
N. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 844 for ASTM A 307 bolts, A 36 rods and F 1554 Grade 36 anchor
rods). Finish to match bolt or rod type.
O. Electrodes: E70 and in accordance with AWS.
1. E308 for Type 304 stainless steel.
2. E316 for Type 316 stainless steel.
P. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize after fabricating in accordance with ASTM A 123. Restraighten
members after galvanizing if necessary to be square and true. Items to be hot-dip galvanized are
identified in drawings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 12 00
Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-5
April 24, 2019
Q. Galvanizing Touch-up Compound: Zinc-rich, anti-corrosion paint complying with ASTM A780. “ZRC
Galvilite” by ZRC Worldwide; “Roval ZC Galvanizing Repair” by Roval Corporation; or accepted
equivalent. Use for field touch-up of hot-dip galvanized surfaces.
R. Expansion Anchors: “Kwik-Bolt 3” or “Kwik-Bolt-TZ” by Hilti; “Trubolt Wedge Anchors” by ITW
Ramset/Red Head; “Power-Stud” by Powers Fasteners; “Wedge-All” by Simpson/Strong-Tie; or accepted
equivalent.
S. Screw Anchors: “Kwik HUS-EZ Screw Anchor” by Hilti; “Large Diameter Tapcon (LDT) Anchor” by
ITW Ramset/Red Head; “Wedge-Bolt +” by Powers Fasteners; “Titen HD” by Simpson/Strong-Tie; or
accepted equivalent.
T. Chemical Adhesive Anchors:
1. Anchors to solid concrete:
a. Anchors for use when base material temperature is 0°F or greater: “HIT-Ice” by Hilti;
“Epcon A7” by ITW Ramset/Red Head; “AC 100 Plus” by Powers Fasteners; “AT Acrylic-
Tie” by Simpson/Strong-Tie; or accepted equivalent.
b. Anchors for use when base material temperature is 40°F or greater; “HIT-HY 200 Safe Set
System with HIT-Z Rod or Hollow Drill Bit System” or “HIT-RE 500-SD” by Hilti;
“Epcon C6” by ITW Ramset/Red Head; “T308 Plus” by Powers Fasteners; “ET Epoxy-Tie”
by Simpson/Strong-Tie; or accepted equivalent.
2. Anchors to hollow masonry (brick or hollow CMU), grouted CMU, solid brick, or stone:
a. Anchors for use when base material temperature is 0°F or greater: “Epcon A7” by ITW
Ramset/Red Head; “AC 100 Plus” by Powers Fasteners; “AT Acrylic-Tie” by
Simpson/Strong-Tie; or accepted equivalent.
b. Anchors for use when base material temperature is 40°F or greater: “HIT-HY 270” by Hilti;
“Epcon C6” by ITW Ramset/Red Head; “T308 Plus” by Powers Fasteners; “ET Epoxy-Tie”
by Simpson/Strong-Tie; or accepted equivalent.
c. Provide manufacturer’s standard screen tubes for use with anchors.
U. Powder Coat Finish: See Section 9. Prepare steel surfaces to be exposed to view in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate structural steel in strict accordance with reviewed shop drawings and referenced standards.
B. Fabricate and assemble structural material in shop to greatest extent possible.
C. Provide camber as indicated in drawings. Where no camber is indicated, fabricate steel with mill camber
up. Camber by mechanical means or by use of V-heat up to 1,200 degrees F maximum.
D. Remove extension bars or runoff plates upon completing and cooling groove welds. Grind ends of welds
smooth and flush with edges of abutting parts.
E. Provide holes for securing other work to structural steel framing. Comply with AISC Specification 360,
Section M2 for surface roughness for holes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 12 00
Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-6
April 24, 2019
F. For members to be hot-dip galvanized, comply with the American Galvanizer’s Association Design
Guide: The Design of Products to be Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrication.
2.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. For steel to be hot-dip galvanized, prepare steel by successive immersion in chemical baths of caustic
cleaning, pickling, and flux.
B. For galvanized or stainless steel to be powder coated, clean steel surfaces to remove bumps, runs, drips,
dirt, grease, rust, and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning" unless
recommended otherwise by paint manufacturer. Profile the steel surface in accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements of this section unless indicated otherwise in drawings.
B. Use connection dimensions and sizes complying with AISC-published recommendations and limitations
shown in drawings.
C. Connections shown in the Drawings are representative details. Detail connections to comply with the
requirements and limitations as shown in the Drawings.
D. Provide snug-tightened joints using bearing bolts with thread condition N for bolted connections unless
indicated otherwise.
E. Remove burrs that prevent solid seating of connected parts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine conditions under which work shall be erected. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members
forming part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.
B. Fit up connections to be field welded in compliance with AWS standard tolerances for review by the
Special Inspector or Testing Agency prior to field welding.
C. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact after
assembly.
D. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and
plumb individual members of structure within specified tolerances.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 12 00
Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-7
April 24, 2019
E. Maintain work in stable condition during erection.
F. Install field connections and framing as detailed in Contract Documents and accepted shop drawings. If
Contractor finds field modifications are necessary, submit documentation of proposed field modifications
to Architect and Engineer for review and acceptance before beginning.
1. Use of thermal cutting for field modifications is prohibited unless documented and accepted by
Engineer before beginning.
2. Use of thermal cutting for enlarging or cutting bolt holes in field is prohibited.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Tolerances shall be within limits in AISC "Code of Standard Practice.”
B. Fabrication and mill tolerance shall be within limits in AISC “Standard Mill Practice.”
3.4 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. Touch up paint damaged galvanized surfaces and welded areas with galvanizing touch-up compound
applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Prepare surfaces of hot-dip galvanized members where the galvanization was omitted, or damaged in
accordance with SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning.” Prepare field-welded galvanized members similarly.
3.5 TEMPORARY SHORING AND BRACING
A. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members as required with connections of sufficient strength to
bear imposed loads.
B. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final
connections are made.
C. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Do not use members for storage or work platforms until permanently secured.
B. Do not exceed load capacity of members with construction loads.
END OF SECTION 05 12 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 05 73 00 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel decorative guard railings.
2. Stainless steel illuminated and non-illuminated handrails.
3. Baseplates and anchorage of railings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 05 13 "Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.”
2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel” for galvanizing.
3. Section 26 “Illuminated Handrailing” for electrical requirements associated with the railings.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided roof areas
and for pedestrian and support.
1.3 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers, galvanizing and powercoating. Comply with paint and coating
manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including adjustments, sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in roofing systems, concrete or masonry. Coordinate installation
of electrical components, conduit wiring pathways and brackets required for illuminate handrail
components. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to co mpleted walls. Do not support railings
temporarily by any means that do not meet structural performance requirements.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-2
April 24th, 2019
2. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and touch-up paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
1. For illuminated railings, include wiring diagrams and roughing-in details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and
balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
3. Welded connections.
4. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail, post,
handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full
height.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic
effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and
anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches in length.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed
Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by
field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-3
April 24th, 2019
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relat e to sightlines, to one
another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods, including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing,
and in-service performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for
review.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Railings shall withstand structural loads indicated. Allowable design working stresses of railing
materials are based on the following:
1. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
2. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the
effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambie nt and surface temperature changes
acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure
of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.3 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide concealed stainless steel metal brackets with baseplate epoxy anchored bolted and/ or
welded to the structure and tapped for countersunk exposed fasteners on the bottom of the railing
posts.
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-4
April 24th, 2019
B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316.
C. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
D. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316.
2.5 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the follo wing:
1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to
produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated.
C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other
work unless noted on the drawings or exposed fasteners are unavoidable.
1. Provide hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide countersunk head machine screws for exposed heads, tamper resistant tip.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Stainless steel epoxy adhesive anchor bolt fastener systems suitable for
attachment into concrete, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
based on ICC-ES AC308 Adhesive Anchors.
1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-
steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2.7 METAL HANDRAIL SYSTEM
A. Illuminated & Non-Illuminated Decorative Handrail System:
1. Manufacturers: Refer to Section 26 50 00 “Lighting” for illuminated handrail systems. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Intense Lighting; V-Rail Illuminated Handrail (basis of design).
b. Wagner Companies; Lumenrail Handrail.
c. Custom Fabricated and Installed Systems upon prior review and approval of the architect.
2. Base Metal: Stainless Steel 1-1/2” diameter, 0.140” wall thickness.
3. Finish: PowderCoated; Bronze Finish.
B. Handrail Brackets: Formed stainless steel brackets, hollow as required for wiring.
1. Finish: Match Handrails.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-5
April 24th, 2019
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and are based
on the specific system indicated.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Railing Post Escutcheon Plates: 10ga stainless steel square guardrail slip on post plates; 5x5” outside
base size.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Wagner Companies or approved equivalent
2. Finish: Powder Coated Finish; Match Guardrails.
B. Electrical Components: Provide internal, LED light fixtures and electrical components, required as part of
illuminated railings, that comply with NFPA 70, are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency as
defined in NFPA 70, and are marked for intended location and application.
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible
with paints specified to be used over it.
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recomme nded by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes
and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes
where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with nonwelded field connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for
this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-6
April 24th, 2019
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish
Standards" for Type 1 welds; no evidence of a welded joint.
I. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate
members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structur al adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
J. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.
K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each confi guration required; maintain cross
section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings of the same railing
material.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns,
unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
O. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided
floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.10 ILLUMINATED RAILINGS
A. General: Comply with requirements in this Section for stainless steel handrails with welded connections.
B. Illuminated Units: Provide internal illumination using c oncealed, internally wired LED-strip fixture
system to illuminate walking surfaces adjacent to railings without light leaks. Make provisions for
servicing and for concealed connection to electric service. Coordinate electrical characteristics with those
of the power supply provided.
1. LED Fixtures: Provide number of tubes indicated or required by railing length.
2. Diffusers: UV-stabilized acrylic diffusers matching profile of railings.
2.11 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-7
April 24th, 2019
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of
approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.
2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Shop-Painted Finish: Powdecoated. Comply with to Section 050531 “Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.”
2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep
holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous
components unless noted otherwise.
C. Shop-Painted Finish: Powder-Coated. Comply with to Section 050531 “Shop Applied Coatings for
Metal.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after
fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further
cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parall el with rake
of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other
materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-8
April 24th, 2019
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction.
3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal
recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Field welded connections are permitted. Use fully welded joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication"
Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to
accommodate thermal movement.
3.3 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Where noted use stainless steel bar sleeve and baseplate anchored into the concrete for installing posts, or
shop or field weld stainless steel bar sleeve to steel plates in position. After the sleeves have been
installed, ensure proper detailing of the roof system. Slide the railing posts over the sleeves, pack tight
and fasten snug into position with stainless steel self-tapping countersunk screws.
1. For stainless-steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.
2. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.
B. Attach escutcheon plates to base of railings and fasten with countersunk stainless steel fastener.
3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Attach handrails to posts with brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of
handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to
support structural loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and
wiping dry.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05 73 00
Ithaca, New York DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00-9
April 24th, 2019
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings
approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations
and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05 73 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 06 10 00
Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: All rough carpentry work ordinarily performed by carpenters, including:
1. Roof related equipment bases and support curbs,
2. Roof related wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
3. Metal straps, brackets, clips, fasteners, attachments and anchors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 52 16 “Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.”
2. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim.”
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Foam Insulation.
B. Product Data: Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of
preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
C. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Power-driven fasteners.
3. Powder-actuated fasteners.
4. Expansion anchors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Grade Marks: Identify all plywood and lumber by official grade mark.
B. All lumber shall be kiln dried and well seasoned.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber
from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around
stacks and under coverings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 06 10 00
Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-2
April 24th, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by
the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of
Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or
chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is
warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of
Review.
D. Application: Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, treat the following items:
1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 or better grade.
1. Species:
a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
b. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
c. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
d. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of o ther
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 06 10 00
Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-3
April 24th, 2019
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the following
species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Northern species; NLGA.
2.5 PLYWOOD
A. Plywood Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less
than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
1. Primary Uses: Roof decking structural reinforcements, nailers, gussets and roof sheathing.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
article for material and manufacture.
1. Provide Series 300 stainless steel fasteners, unless noted below or on the drawings. All other
fastener shall have hot-dip zinc coating minimum complying with ASTM A153.
2. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or
in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
G. Mechanical Anchors for masonry and concrete: Stainless Steel masonry arnchors with countersunk heads
with 1.75” embedment minimum. removable type pin anchor drive screws; Tapcons by Powers Inc.
H. Mechanical Anchors for masonry and concrete: Stainless Steel removable type pin anchor drive screw;
Zamac Hammer-Screw by Powers Inc.
I. Epoxy Anchors: Stainless Steel anchor bolt/dowel, nut and stainless steel cylindrical mesh screen tube
and epoxy adhesive.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 06 10 00
Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-4
April 24th, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers,
blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty
items, and trim.
E. Use steel common nails unless other wise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate
members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not
countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as
required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible
flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-
1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 FASTENING SCHEDULE
A. Fasten in accordance with the drawings unless specified as below:
1. Attachment of blocking and nailers to concrete and masonry: Masonry screws.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 01 50.19
Ithaca, New York PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 07 01 50.19 - PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Full tear-off and removals of pavers and granite treads, stone ballast, PVC single-ply membrane,
insulation, and associated flashings.
2. Roof Survey and Layout survey of existing roof profile, deck and roof elevations, roof features,
steps and drains.
3. Temporary night-time termination roofing terminations.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 "Summary of Work.”
2. Division 01 "Temporary Facilities.”
3. Section 07 52 16 - “SBS Modified Bitumen Roof System
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
B. Roof Re-Cover Preparation: Existing roofing system is to remain and be prepared for new roof installed
over it.
C. Full Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing roofing system from deck.
D. Partial Roof Tear-Off: Removal of selected components and accessories from existing roofing system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Details of temporary roofing and daily and phased terminations.
B. Roof Survey: Survey drawing showing spot elevations of existing roof features; drawn at 1/8”=1’-0”.
C. Adhesion Uplift Test Reports: ANSI-SPRI Test Standard 1A/ FM Global Uplift Test to be performed by
the roof system manufacturer or representative at no cost to the owner.
D. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements,
including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by
reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 01 50.19
Ithaca, New York PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19-2
April 24th, 2019
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA & NYSDOL notification regulations before
beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency
representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer, including project
manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
reroofing, including installers of roof deck, roof accessories, and roof -mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear -off and replacement, including, but
not limited to, the following:
a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that are to
remain.
c. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and roof-drain
plugging and plug removal.
d. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and
facilities needed to avoid delays.
e. Existing roof deck conditions requiring no tification of Architect.
f. Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications.
g. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for reuse.
h. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing.
i. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and
condition of other construction that affect reroofing.
j. HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes.
k. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems.
l. Asbestos removal and discovery of asbestos-containing materials.
m. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
n. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding.
C. Water-tightness of temporary and completed work: The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials
for watertight daily terminations for the work, including emergency 24 hour/ 7 day – 1 hour response
service for roof leaks.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Existing Roofing System: Stone ballasted loose-laid PVC single-ply roof membrane and insulation.
B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's
operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may
affect Owner's operations.
1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can shut down HVAC and fire-alarm or -
detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below work area.
a. Contractor shall place protective dust and water-leakage covers over sensitive equipment
and furnishings that affect Owner equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 01 50.19
Ithaca, New York PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19-3
April 24th, 2019
2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from
below affected area. Verify that occupants below work area have been evacuated before
proceeding with work over impaired deck area.
C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and
landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.
a. See site/ phasing drawings and Division 01 “Temporary Facilities,” for extent of minimum
building and pedestrian protections.
D. Provide protective dust covers, tarps, temporary protections over equipment, intake louvers and exhausts.
Coordinate shutdown of HVAC equipment and associated fire alarms with the owner, minimum of 72
hours advance notice. The owner may evacuate occupants if necessary, coordinate with owner.
E. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building.
1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day.
G. Hazardous Materials: A report on the presence of hazardous materials is appended to the contract
documents. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except
according to procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
3. Coordinate reroofing preparation with hazardous material remediation to prevent water from
entering existing roofing system or building.
1.6 SURVEY AND LAYOUT DATA
A. Responsibility for Layout of the Work: Contractor shall be solely responsible for complete, timely and
accurate layout of the Work including, but not necessarily limited to, horizontal and vertical control and
dimensional coordination as necessary to construct the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall:
1. Employ a Land Surveyor or a Civil Engineer, registered in the State of New York, to perform
survey work.
2. Survey Reference Points: Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points are shown on the
Contract Documents, or location of control points will be furnished by the University
Representative. Contractor shall use the University Record of Survey, provided by the University
Representative, as the Basis of Bearings for survey horizontal control, and shall tie at least one
Project site control point to a point on the University Recor d of Survey. Contractor shall:
a. Locate and protect control points prior to star ting site work, and preserve all permanent
reference points during construction.
b. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Architect.
c. Require a surveyor to replace project control points which may be lost or destroyed.
Establish replacements based on original survey control.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 01 50.19
Ithaca, New York PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19-4
April 24th, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION MATERIALS
A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation: ASTM C 578.
B. Plywood: DOC PS1, Grade CD Exposure 1.
C. OSB: DOC PS2, Exposure 1.
2.2 TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. Design and selection of materials for temporary roofing are Contractor's responsibilities.
2.3 ROOF REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
A. Refer to applicable sections elsewhere in the Project Manual.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work.
B. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately notify Architect of
any blockages or restrictions.
C. Protect existing roofing systems that are not to be reroofed as part of the project phasing.
1. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing that have been protected.
2. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been completed.
Remove temporary protection on completion of reroofing.
D. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake
louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke
detectors in the ductwork.
E. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on -site to facilitate rapid installation of
temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.
3.2 ROOF SURVEY & LAYOUT
A. Use acceptable survey practices to establish a baseline datum elevation and collect spot elevations of the
roof and roof elements, including but not limited to the roof field high and low points, roof drain inlets,
roof perimeters, top of walls, stairs and steps, raised podiums and adjoining grades. Collect data in 10’-0”
grid spacing minimum.
1. Compile roof elevations on a roof plan in electronic and hard copy format.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 01 50.19
Ithaca, New York PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19-5
April 24th, 2019
2. Utilize spot elevations to confirm and establish new roof elevations based on the scope of the
project.
3.3 ROOF TEAR-OFF
A. Full Roof Tear-Off: Remove existing roofing and other roofing system components down to the deck,
unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
3.4 DECK PREPARATION
A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system.
B. Refasten and re-attach any loose or un-attached wood deck pieces. If broken or loose fasteners that secure
deck panels to one another or to structure are observed, or if d eck appears or feels inadequately attached,
immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.
C. If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is suspect,
immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.
3.5 ROOF REPLACEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to applicable sections elsewhere in the Project Manual.
3.6 TEMPORARY ROOFING
A. Install approved temporary roofing for night-time terminations and seasonal (phasing) terminations.
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not
allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on -site is not permitted.
B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 07 01 50.19
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 07 52 16 - (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Work:
1. Membrane roofing systems (flood-coat gravel surfaced modified bitumen membrane and liquid
applied membranes and flashings), in their entirety, shall consist of a complete watertight surface,
closed to perimeter walls, gravel stops and roof openings, coverboards, insulation, adhesives all
accessories indicated and required to achieve the above.
2. Pedestal Paver systems in their entirety shall consist of concrete pavers and adjustable plastic
pedestals and accessories to form a complete walking surface over the membrane roofing system.
The Pedestal Paver system shall be provided by the primary roofing manufacturer and
incorporated into the roofing system and warranty.
a. This section includes base bid concrete pavers and granite pavers described as Alternate #1.
B. Summary of Roof System:
1. Roof assembly consists of torch applied SBS Modified Bitumen membrane and flashing system
with an asphalt flood coat and gravel surface and/or liquid resin cap ply and membrane adhered to
a coverboard, insulation and torched asphaltic vapor re tarder over the existing vapor retarder and
concrete roof deck. The roof assembly shall be based on an FM Global approved roof assembly on
concrete and steel roof decks.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 06 10 00 “Rough Carpentry.”
2. Section 07 01 50 “Preparation for Re-Roofing.”
3. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.”
4. Section 07 72 00 “Roof Accessories.”
5. Section 07 76 16 “Roof Pedestals.”
6. Section 07 92 00 “Sealants.”
7. Section 26 41 00 “Lightning Protection System.”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to Work of this Section.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Prior to the beginning of the roofing work, a pre -roofing conference is to be held, attended by the
Consultant, the Contractor, the Roofing Contractor, a representative of the Roofing Manufacturer
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-2
April 24th, 2019
and the University. The purpose of this conference is to review the specifications, details,
application requirements, staging areas, crane set-up locations, storage areas, protection and safety
precautions, and what work is to be completed before the roofing operation begins.
2. Meet with Owner, Architect, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and
installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories
and roof-mounted equipment.
3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written
instructions.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
5. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including
flatness and fastening.
6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing .
7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: The following items shall be submitted and approved prior to the delivery of materials to the
job site. Submit all items, except contract closeout submittals at one time as a complete package. Partial
submittals will not be considered.
1. “Letter of Assembly” from the roofing manufacturer with a descriptive list of the materials and
methodologies proposed for use at each roof area and type. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer’s written approval or license of the applicator for installation of the herein
specified roofing system. Submit proof that applicator attended manufacturer training
sessions.
b. Evidence of manufacturer’s history of production for the system specified herein. A
minimum of five years (5) experience is required. Provide documentation of job lists,
project size, Architect of Record, installing applicator, telephone numbers and contact
names.
c. Copy of FM and UL material assembly listings and FM Roof Navfrom approved guide,
note any deviation of options selected. Submit fully completed FM Global Form 2688.
d. Written statement from the manufacturer that the selected assembly is compatible in all
respects.
e. Certification from the manufacture that materials meet the applicable ASTM and
specifications as herein specified.
B. Product Data: For each type of product.
C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, insulation and taper layouts, sections, details, and
attachments to other work for each condition.
D. Coordination Shop Drawings: For roofing system, pavers, pedestals and stone treads include survey and
layout elevations for coordination with the roofing elevations and walkway elevations.
E. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Samples of each sheet compo nent of the roofing and flashing membranes.
2. Samples of each liquid flashing component of the roofing and flashing membrane.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-3
April 24th, 2019
3. Cover board sample.
4. Protection boards.
5. Stone aggregate sample (quart size container).
F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer.
H. Field Test Reports:
1. Bonded Uplift Adhesion Pull Test Results.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall have a history of successfully producing specified products for a minimum of ten (10)
years, without change in formulation.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer (‘roofer’) shall perform the work of this section; and shall be a firm
with not less than ten (10) years of successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to
those required for this project and has been a nd currently is acceptable to, or licensed by, manufacturer of
primary roofing materials.
1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer of roofing system certifying
that installer is approved by manufacturer for installation of specified roofing system
2. Installer’s Field Supervisor: Installer must maintain full-time supervisor on job site during times
that work is in progress. Supervisor must have minimum of five (5) years experience in roofing
work similar to nature and scope of specified roofing.
3. All field installers shall receive training by the manufacturer.
C. Technical support (minimum 6 hours at one (1) week intervals) at the start of installation, during and
upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a Technical Representative of the
manufacturer to observe the application of the roofing system. A written site visit repor t shall be
submitted to the (Roofing) Contractor and the Architect after each visit.
D. Bonded Uplift Adhesion Pull Testing: Prior to the installation of the work, perform bonded uplift testing
of the existing vapor retarder adhesion to the existing concrete substrates in accordance with ANSI-SPRI
1A test standard and FM Global Datasheet 1-52 and report the findings to the Architect. Conduct a
minimum of 3 tests in the roof wind zones in the presence of the owner/ architect. The minimum uplift
resistance shall be based on a 1.25 factor of safety based on FM Global Datasheet 1-52.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Roofing shall not be applied during precipitation and shall not be started in the event there is a
probability of precipitation during application.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-4
April 24th, 2019
2. When application ambient air temperatures (70°F to 100°F) cannot be maintained, do not apply
roofing membrane without using cool weather application procedures.
3. When water in any form (i.e. rain, dew, ice, frost, snow, etc.) is present on the deck, d o not apply
roofing materials.
4. At low outdoor temperatures (below 50°F), the specified cold adhesive becomes more viscous,
making distribution more difficult. The optimal tempe rature of the adhesive at point of
application is 70°F. To facilitate application of the adhesive when ambient temperatures are
below 50°F, store the adhesive and roll goods in a warm place (heated trailer or other insulated,
heated storage area) immediately prior to use. Roll or broom the sheets to ensure contact with the
underlying adhesive. Suspend application in situations where the adhesives cannot be kept at
temperatures allowing for even distribution.
5. Cut warmed rolls into thirds and allow cut sheets to lay flat with the back surface of the sheet
facing up for at least fifteen (15) minutes. “Fly” the pre-cut sheets in by placing them into the cold
adhesive rather than rolling them into position.
B. Protection:
1. Protection against staining and mechanical damage shall be provided for adjacent surfaces during
application of roofing.
2. Torch Safety: Should torching of flashing membrane seams be used, designate one person on
each crew to perform a daily fire watch. The designated crew member shall watch for fires or
smoldering materials on all areas of roof construction. Continue to fire watch after roofing has
suspended for the day.
C. Ensure roof deck is structurally sound to support construction traffic.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 25 Year NDL non-prorated Full System Warranty, covering workmanship,
materials, and wind related damage from date of Substantial Completion.
a. The warranty shall include overburden removal of pedestals and pavers included in this
section.
b. The warranty shall include, but not be limited to, repair of leakage and the r epair and/or
replacement of the roofing system as necessary to correct defects or damage caused by;
materials, workmanship, or wind speeds less than 93 MPH (V3s) Exposure C as measured
from the nearest NOAA weather station.
B. Special Warranty: Contractor’s Guarantee: Provide a 2-year Contractor’s Guarantee.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures,
thermally induced movement, overburden components and loads and exposure to weather without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and
flashings shall remain watertight.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-5
April 24th, 2019
B. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind upli ft pressures when tested
according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:
1. Refer to sheet G-102 drawings for wind pressures.
C. FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in
FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Global's
"RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global
markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-60.
2. Hail-Resistance Rating: SH.
3. Basis of Design FM Global Assembly:
a. 370596-49238-0 as modified for gravel surfacing and concrete roof decks.
b. 22241-48824-0 as modified for gravel surfacing and steel roof decks.
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated;
testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
E. Bonded Uplift Testing: Refer to Quality Assurance Article.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follo wing:
1. Siplast, Inc.
2. Or approved equivalent system as determined by the Architect.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for roofing system from same
manufacturer as membrane roofing.
C. Basis of Design Roof Membrane System: Siplast Inc, Multiple-ply modified bitumen system.
1. System A – Typical Roof System (top down):
a. Flood coat & gravel surfacing,
b. Torch Grade Paradiene 20 PR TG,
c. Paradiene 20 EG TG.
d. Concrete and/or Coverboard & Insulation Substrates (see drawings).
e. Vapor Retarder Torch Grade Paradiene 20 PR TG (where indicated),
f. Catalyzed PMMA Resin Perimeter Flashing Membrane.
2. System B – Pavers & Stairs (top down):
a. Protection Board,
b. Catalyzed PMMA Resin Cap Membrane,
c. ProBase Tg (Formally Paradiene 20 TG P).
d. Concrete and/or Coverboard & Insulation Substrates (see drawings).
e. Vapor Retarder Torch Grade Paradiene 20 PR TG (where indicated),
f. Catalyzed PMMA Resin Perimeter Flashing Membrane.
3. System C - Ramp:
a. Protection Board,
b. Paradiene 20 PR TG,
c. Paradiene 20 EG TG,
d. Nailed Parabase FS.
e. Lightweight Concrete Substrates (see drawings).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-6
April 24th, 2019
f. Catalyzed PMMA Resin Perimeter Flashing Membrane.
2.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
A. Roofing Membrane Assembly: A roof membrane assembly consisting of two plies of a prefabricated,
reinforced, homogeneous Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) block copolymer modified asphalt
membrane, applied over a prepared substrate torched to the cover board substrate. The double membrane
assembly shall pass 500 cycles of ASTM D 5849 Resistance to Cyclic Joint Displacement (fatigue) at
14°F (-10°C). Passing results shall show no signs of membrane cracking o r interply delamination after
500 cycles. The double membrane assembly shall pass 200 cycles of ASTM D 5849 after heat
conditioning performed in accordance with ASTM D 5147. The assembly shall possess waterproofing
capability, such that a phased roof application, with only one modified bitumen base ply in place, can be
achieved for prolonged periods of time without detriment to the watertight integrity of the entire roof
system. The roof membrane assembly shall also conform to the following physical and mechanical
property requirements.
1. Modified Bitumen Base and Stripping Plies
a. Approximate Nominal Thickness: 134 mils
b. Low temperature flexibility @ -15ºF (-26ºC): PASS (ASTM D 5147)
c. Peak Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23ºC): 80 lbf/inch (14.1 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
d. Peak Load (avg) @ 0ºF (-18ºC): 150 lbf/inch (26.5 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
e. Ultimate Elongation @ 73ºF (23ºC): 50% (ASTM D 514 7)
f. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.1% (ASTM D 5147)
g. Compound Stability (min): 250ºF (121ºC) (ASTM D 5147)
h. Approvals: UL Class listed, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval)
i. Reinforcement: fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance and dimensional stability
criteria.
j. Surfacing: Silica parting agent.
2. Modified Bitumen Cap Ply
a. Approximate Nominal Thickness: 134 mils/ 154 mils at sloped surfaces.
b. Low temperature flexibility @ -15ºF (-26ºC): PASS (ASTM D 5147)
c. Peak Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23ºC): 30 lbf/inch (5.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
d. Peak Load (avg) @ 0ºF (-18ºC): 75 lbf/inch (13.2 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
e. Ultimate Elongation @ 73ºF (23ºC): 50% (ASTM D 5147)
f. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.1% (ASTM D 5147)
g. Compound Stability (min): 250ºF (121ºC) (ASTM D 5147)
h. Approvals: UL Class listed, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval)
i. Reinforcement: fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance and dimensional stability
criteria.
j. Surfacing: Smooth.
B. Flashing Membrane Assembly: A flashing membrane assembly consisting of a prefabricated, reinforced,
Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) block copolymer modified asphalt membrane and catalyzed acrylic
resin flashing system. The flashing membrane assembly shall be adhered in accordance with the
requirements of the system manufacturer and conform to the following physical and mechanical property
requirements.
1. Cant Backing Sheet and Flashing Reinforcing Ply
a. Approximate Nominal Thickness: 110 mils (2.6 mm)
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-7
April 24th, 2019
b. Low temperature flexibility @ -15ºF (-26ºC): PASS (ASTM D 5147)
c. Peak Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23ºC): 30 lbf/inch (5.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
d. Peak Load (avg) @ 0ºF (-18ºC): 75 lbf/inch (13.2 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
e. Ultimate Elongation @ 73ºF (23ºC): 50% (ASTM D 5147)
f. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.1% (ASTM D 5147)
g. Compound Stability (min - sheet): 250ºF (121ºC) (ASTM D 5147)
h. Approvals: UL Class listed, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval)
i. Reinforcement: fiberglass ma t or other meeting the performance and dimensional stability
criteria
2. Modified Bitumen Flashing Sheet
a. Approximate Nominal Thickness: 150 mils (3.8 mm)
b. Coating/Finish Thickness – back surface (min): 40 mils (1 mm) (ASTM D 5147)
c. Low temperature flexibility @ 0º F (-18º C): PASS (ASTM D 5147)
d. Peak Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23ºC): 85 lbf/inch (15 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
e. Peak Load (avg) @ 0ºF (-18ºC): 180 lbf/inch (31.7 kN/m) (ASTM D 5147)
f. Tear-Strength (avg): 120 lbf (0.54 kN) (ASTM D 5147)
g. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.2% (ASTM D 5147)
h. Compound Stability (min): 225ºF (107ºC) (ASTM D 5147)
i. Approvals: UL Approved, FM Approved (products shall bear seals of approval)
j. Reinforcement: fiberglass scrim mat or other meeting the performance and dimensional
stability criteria
k. Surfacing: Smooth.
C. Catalyzed Acrylic Resin Flashing System: A specialty flashing system consisting of a liquid-applied,
fully reinforced, multi-component acrylic membrane installed over a prepared or primed substrate. The
flashing system shall consist of a catalyzed primer, basecoat and topcoat, combined with a non-woven
polyester fleece. The use of the specialty flashi ng system shall be specifically approved in advance by
the membrane manufacturer and architect for each application.
2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-part,
asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with roofing
membrane and base flashings.
C. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system
manufacturer for application.
D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plates complying with corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to substrate; tested by
manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptabl e to roofing system manufacturer.
E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with stainless steel anchors.
F. Other Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-8
April 24th, 2019
2.5 PROTECTION MAT
A. Manufacturer standard two-part prefabricated sheet drainage and protection board consisting of a formed
polypropylene core covered on one side with a woven polypropylene filter fabric.
1. Thickness: ½ inch nominal.
2. Compressive Strength: 21,000 psf.
2.6 COVER BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1325, fiber-mat, water-resistant cement roof board, 1/2 inch thick, factory
primed, fully adhered.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. United States Gypsum Company; Securock Cement Roof Board.
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer
on both major surfaces.
1. Compressive Strength: 25 psi.
2. Size: 48 by 48 inches.
3. Thickness:
a. Base Layer: 2.5” & 2” nominal and where noted on the drawings.
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated or
required for sloping to drain and receiving overburden layers. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof
insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.
B. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C728, perlite insulation board.
C. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C728, perlite insulation board.
2.9 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Smooth surfaced, torch grade SBS asphalt elastomer sheet reinforced with a combination of polyester
fabric/fiberglass scrim composite ASTM 6162 Type II, a fiberglass scrim ASTM D 6163 Type I, or a
polyester fabric ASTM D 6164 Type I.
1. Grade S.
2. Type: Torch grade.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-9
April 24th, 2019
2.10 STONE AGGREGGATE
A. Aggregate Ballast: Washed, crushed stone or smooth stone set in manufacturer cold asphalt adhesive that
withstands weather exposure without significant deterioration and does not contribute to membrane
degradation; of the following size:
1. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 5 rounded, ranging in size from 1/2 to 1 inch. Color to be selected by the
architect.
B. Asphalt Flood Coat: Manufacturer recommended hot or cold asphaltic flood coating.
2.11 ARCHITECTURAL PAVERS
A. Heavyweight Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed concrete units, square edged, factory cast
for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum
1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hanover Architectural
Products; “Prest Pavers.”
a. Size: As indicated on the drawings. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus
or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in length, height, and thickness.
b. Thickness: 2 inches nominal.
c. Weight: 23 lb/sq. ft.
d. Compressive Strength: 7500 psi, minimum.
e. Colors and Textures: “Super Black” and “Matrix Finish”, Tudor Finish.
f. Paver Pedestal Supports: Refer to Section 07 76 16 Roof Pedestals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Set elevations for finished roof elevations based on coordinated roof survey and layout elevations and
approved submittals.
B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof de ck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
2. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has
passed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Remove only as much existing roofing as can be made fully watertight by the end of the day. The
Contractor assumes all responsibility for water infiltration and damage inside building caused by roofing
operation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing metal edges and parapet caps as shown on drawings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-10
April 24th, 2019
B. Inspect roof deck surface, all perimeters and all roof projections. Notify Architect of any unsatisfactory
conditions prior to proceeding.
C. All surfaces shall be swept or vacuumed prior to commencement of ro ofing.
D. Existing and new Wood Blocking and Plywood surfaces shall be smooth, free of protruding nails,
depressions or raised edges.
E. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove sharp projections.
F. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating
onto surfaces of other construction.
1. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing s ystem manufacturer's written instructions, FM Approvals'
RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings, and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering
completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Membrane Vapor Retarder: Torch apply the vapor retarder to the existing asphaltic vapor retarder lapping
each ply 4-inches over the preceding layer. Unroll roofing sheets and allow them to relax for minimum
time period required by manufacturer.
B. Laps: Accurately align roofing sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps.
Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.
1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
C. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement
into roofing system.
D. Conduct Bonded Uplift Testing in accordance with the Quality Assurance Article and report the findings
to the architect before proceeding.
3.5 INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry.
B. Fully Adhere the bottom layer of insulation board to the existing vapor retarder and new vapor retarder
where indicated on the drawings. Use manufacturer approved adhesive ribbons spacing and patterns to
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-11
April 24th, 2019
attach the insulation board, minimum of 12 inch spacing unless additional are required by the
manufacture to meet wind uplift requirements.
C. Embed each layer of flat or tapered roof board insulation int o strips of cold applied insulation adhesive, in
accordance with insulation and/or adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: As shown and noted on drawings.
E. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forci ng. Cut insulation to fit neatly to
perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. Stagger all roof insulation joints between each
layer of insulation.
F. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in the same day.
G. Discard all insulation with broken edges or similar defects.
3.6 TAPER & CRICKETS
A. Install taper insulation and pre-manufactured crickets as shown on drawings to provide positive water
flow.
3.7 COVER BOARD/ THERMAL BARRIER BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Fully adhere Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof
slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof
assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and FM Global Property
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows:
a. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and
maintaining insulation in place.
B. Mechanically attach thermal barrier boards with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to
roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. Install
minimum number of fasteners and plates per board .
1. Mechanically attach thermal barrier board to top flanges of steel deck according to
recommendations in FM Global's "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
3.8 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. General: Application shall be in accordance with roofing system manufacturer’s instructions and the
following requirements. Application of roofing shall immediately follow application of ins ulation as a
continuous operation.
B. General: Contractor shall detail all laps and seams with heat welding device or torch.
C. Phased application: Not permitted. All plies shall be completed each day unless otherwise recommended
by the roofing manufacturer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-12
April 24th, 2019
D. Traffic and equipment: Kept off completed ply until cold applied adhesive has cured in accordance with
membrane manufacturer’s instructions.
E. All flanges shall be set in a smooth, even, continuous coa ting of plastic flashing cement.
F. Priming: Prime metal and concrete and masonry surfaces with a uniform coating of the specifie d asphalt
primer.
G. Bitumen Consistency: Cutting or alterations of bitumen, primer, and sealants will not be permitted.
H. Roofing Application: Apply all layers of roofing free of wrinkles, cr eases or fishmouths. Exert sufficient
pressure on the roll during application to ensure prevention of air pockets.
1. Apply all layers of roofing perpendicular to the slope of the deck.
2. Fully bond the base ply to the prepared substrate, utilizing minimum 3 inch side and end laps.
Apply each sheet directly behind the torch applicator. Cut a dog ear angle at the end laps on
overlapping selvage edges. Using a clean trowel, apply top pressure to top seal T -laps
immediately following sheet application. Stagger end laps a minimum of 3 feet.
3. Fully bond the finish ply to the base ply, utilizing minimum 3 inch side and end laps. Apply each
sheet directly behind the torch applicator. Stagger end laps of the finish ply a minimum 3 feet.
Cut a dog ear angle at the end laps on overlapping selvage edges. Using a clean trowel, apply top
pressure to top seal T-laps immediately following sheet application. Stagger side laps of the finish
ply a minimum 12 inches from side laps in the underlying base ply. Stagger en d laps of the finish
ply a minimum 3 feet from end laps in the underlying base ply.
4. All layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths and shall be laid at right
angles (perpendicular) to the slope of the deck. Sheets shall be laid directly behind the cold
adhesive applicator. Sufficient pressure shall be exerted on the roll during application to ensure
prevention of air pockets.
5. When ambient air temperature below 50°F, install roofing plies in accordance with cool weather
procedures.
6. On roof deck slopes over 1/2" in 12", install roofing membrane plies saddle fashion and back nail
end of sheet. At top to wood blocking with nine, 1" diameter cap nails in double row stagger the
rows of nails.
3.9 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and
secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
2. Backer-Sheet Application: Adhere backer sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.
3. Flashing-Sheet Application: Torch apply flashing sheet to substrate.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches
onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
1. Seal top termination of base flashing.
D. Install roofing cap -sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on roofing according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-13
April 24th, 2019
E. Catalyzed Acrylic Resin Flashing System: Install the liquid-applied primer and flashing system in
accordance with the membrane system manufacturer’s printed installer’s g uidelines and other applicable
written recommendations as provided by the manufacturer.
F. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch- 4-pound lead flashing in bed of asphaltic adhesive on completed roofing
membrane. Alternately, apply reinforced liquid resin flashing target inter-lapped into the roof plies and
into the roof drain bowl.
1. Cover lead flashing with roofing cap-sheet stripping, and extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond
edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane.
2. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
3. Install stripping according to roofing s ystem manufacturer's written instructions.
3.10 ROOF SYSTEM INSTALLATION INTERFACE WITH RELATED COMPONENTS
A. Edge Metal: Completely prime metal flanges and allow to dry prior to installation. Turn the base ply
down 2 inches past the roof edge and over the nailer, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. After the
base ply and continuous cleat (if applicable) have been installed, set the flange in mastic and stagger nail
every 3 inches on center. Strip-in the flange using the liquid flashing material, extending a minimum of 4
inches beyond the edge of the flange. Terminate the finish liquid flashing ply at the gravel-stop rise of
the edge metal and embed gravel surfacing.
B. Sealant: Apply a smooth continuous bead of the specified sealant at the exposed finish ply edge
transition to metal flashings incorporated into the roof system.
3.11 PROTECTION BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Inspect roof membrane and address installation defects prior to installation of the coverboard.
B. Loose lay and lap protection boards below overburden and paver areas not receiving gravel surfacing, in
accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
3.12 GRAVEL SURFACING INSTALLATION
A. To roofed area, apply aggregate and flood coat of asphalt adhesive uniformly, but not less than the
following, carefully spreading aggregate to not damage roofing and base flashings.
1. Ballast: 10 lb/sq. ft..
2. Adhesive Rate: 3-5 gallons per square.
3.13 ROOF-PAVER INSTALLATION
A. Install roof pavers on pedestals over membrane protection boards set according to pedestal manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed by roofing manufacturer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 52 16
Ithaca, New York (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL (SBS) MOD-BIT MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16-14
April 24th, 2019
B. Correct identified defects or irregularities.
C. Site attendance of roofing materials manufacturer representative during installation of the work shall be
required as per manufacturer’s req uirements for warranty validation, but no less than once at the
beginning of membrane installation and once each week during roof installation.
D. Notification of Completion: Notify the manufacturer by means o f manufacturer’s printed Notification of
Completion form of job completion in order to schedule a final inspection date.
3.15 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for
cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
3.16 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces with minimum ½” plywood.
END OF SECTION 07 52 16
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 07 62 00 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Section Includes:
1.Flashings and counter flashing fabrications,
2.Two-Piece Counter Flashings,
3.Through Wall Flashings,
4.Through Wall Fabric Flashings,
5.Wall Panels,
6.Light Pole Base Detail
7.Roof Drain Gravel Guard,
8.Sheet metal attachments and accessories,
B.Related Requirements:
1.Section 06 10 00 “Wood Nailers and Blocking.”
2.Section 07 52 16 “SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.”
3.Section 07 92 00 “Sealants.”
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: For each type of product.
1.Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for
each manufactured product and accessory.
B.Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Submit full size fabrication drawings
showing method of anchoring, types and sizes and spacing of fasteners, finish and shop coats of
protective sealers, locations and details of joint required for thermal movement. Prepare shop
drawings of the following items:
a.Perimeter Edge Metal Flashing
b.One-Piece & Two-Piece Counterflashing
c.Building Column Cover Counterflashings & Window Flashings,
d.Through Wall Flashings,
e.Include other special conditions.
C.Samples:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-2
April 24th, 2019
1. 8 inch long sample of each flashing fabrication assembly. Include lap joint fabrication of
counterflashing and perimeter drip edge.
2. 2 each of exposed fastener types, labeled by type and location.
D. Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer.
E. Product Certificates and Project Specific Testing: For each type of roof edge flashing that is
ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.
F. Quality Assurance Soldering Samples: Submit 2 soldering samples of mechanic(s) anticipated to be on
the jobsite. Only mechanic(s) who’s soldering work has been accepted may undertake soldering work on
this project.
1. 12 inches long stainless steel locked and soldered, lapped, riveted and soldered seams samples.
Label the sample date and mechanic on the backside.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: The standards of quality for the design and fabricatio n of sheet metal shall be as
described in the following:
1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (SMACNA).
2. Copper & Common Sense
B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and recognized
roofing/ sheet metal contractors, with a minimum of 5 years of previous experience in installations of this
type.
1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirement s and the methods
needed for proper performance of the work.
2. Custom fabricate to proper dimensions all metal roof sheets and flashings. Flashing and trim to be
custom fabricated for required conditions that develop. Prefabricated flashings in bulk are not
permitted. Custom fabricated for the proper fit and installation as indicated on the archite ctural
drawings and detailed on the approved shop drawings.
C. Custom fabricated Perimeter Edge Flashings shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-
1 to meet the wind pressures indicated on the drawings, and installed in accordance with the approved
system documentation.
1. Testing costs to achieve the approvals in accordance with the design shall be borne by the
contractor.
D. Solder Qualifications: All soldering and soldering mechanics shall be qualified in accordance with AWS
B2.3 – 2018 Specification for Soldering Procedure and Performance Qualifications.
1. Soldering Installer Qualifications: Mechanics who are thoroughly trained and experienced and
pre-qualified to solder shall submit evidence prior to the start of construction on site. Mechanics
whose seams are rejected will not be permitted to undertake soldering work on this project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-3
April 24th, 2019
Periodic, unannounced testing of pre-qualified mechanics throughout the course of the project may
be implemented, at the discretion of the Architect and Owner.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause
staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from
uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate sheet metal work with other work to insure delivery to project of built-in items and materials
in sufficient time to avoid details.
1. Provide sufficient information to others of locations of blocking, nailers and backing required for
sheet metal work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Contractor’s Guarantee: Provide a 2-year Contractor’s Guarantee.
B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof special ties that
show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture,
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall
not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to
dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings tested in accordance with
ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-4
April 24th, 2019
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
E. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals'
"RoofNav" and approved for windstor m classification, Class 1-60. Identify materials with name of
fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to
prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; 2D (dull, cold rolled)
finish.
B. Zinc-Tin Coated Copper Sheet: Cold rolled copper, H00 or H01 Temper, ASTM B 370. Fifty percent
Zinc, 50 percent Tin coating; ASTM B 350, Type 1 0.5 mils thick per sq ft applied to both sides.
a. Product & Manufacturer: FreedomGray, Revere Copper Products, Rome, NY
www.reverecopper.com
b. Thickness: 16oz.
c. Finish: Standard Satin Finish
C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as
required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Flexible Stainless Steel Pan Flashings: Series 304 Stainless steel core with an integrated fleece fabric
laminated to one stainless steel face with non-asphalt adhesive. Pans formed into one piece thru-wall
flashing pans with side and end dams.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: York Manufacturing, Inc.; FlashVent SS
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashings, use na ils make from the same material as
flashings. Use stainless steel for dissimilar metals.
2. Pop rivets are not acceptable unless noted otherwise. Shop form one-piece inside and
outside corners.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-5
April 24th, 2019
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended b y manufacturer of primary
sheet metal.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or passivated Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. Use low profile pancake heads
where overlapping metal occurs.
C. Exposed Roofing Fasteners:
1. Through Attachments: Stainless Steel Series 300 Threaded Round Head Machine Screws with
Nylon Hex Nuts and gasketed sealing washer.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless Steel Series 300 Wood Drill Point Philips Head Screws with
gasketed sealing washer.
D. Solder & Flux: For Zinc-Coated Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or
Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene
plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
F. Joint Sealants: See Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants.”
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal
thickness, and other characteristics of item required.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance
requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
3. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces
exposed to view, unless noted otherwise.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Hemmed Edges: Unless noted otherwise, all exposed raw metal edges shall have ¾” hemmed edges.
D. Hold Down Cleats: Unless noted otherwise, all two-piece counterflashing shall also contain hold-down
cleats fastened to the substrate every 2’-0” and loosely hooked on the counterflashings.
E. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
F. Typical Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,
and solder.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-6
April 24th, 2019
G. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 -inch-long, but not exceeding 12-
foot-long, sections.
1. Fabricate in accordance with the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual recommendations for
expansion and contraction of sheet metal work in continuous runs in profiles as shown.
2. Dress and turn down exposed edges of flashings and drip edges adjacent to public areas where
sharp edges and protrusions could be a hazard.
H. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper
installation of elastomeric sealant and lap joints and/or underplate joints according to cited sheet metal
standard.
I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cite d sheet metal standard and by
FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.5 FABRICATION SCHEDULE
A. Where practicable, form and fabricate sheet metal Work in the factory or shop. Produce bends and
profiles accurately to the indicated shapes. Where not indicated or specified, follow the applicable
requirements of the reference standards listed in PART 1.
B. Perimeter Edge Flashings: Shop fabricate in 10’-0” lengths maximum with prefabricated 1-piece
inside/outside corners. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. 0.050” Prefinished Aluminum Edge Flashing (minimum thickness).
a. Color: Sandstone (or similar color as selected by the architect to match the substrate).
2. Underplates: Match exposed metal (minimum).
3. Cleats: Match exposed metal; continuous.
4. Profile: As indicated on the drawings and approved ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 test result.
Provide prefabricated inside/ outside corners.
C. Perimeter Metal Edge Fascia (weep/ drainable): Shop fabricate in custom lengths indicated on the
drawings with prefabricated 1-piece inside/outside corners. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. 16oz Zinc-Tin Coated Copper.
a. Finish: Mill Finish
2. Underplates: Match exposed metal (minimum).
3. Cleats: 20ga stainless steel; continuous.
4. Profile: As indicated on the drawings. Provide prefabricated inside/ outside corners.
D. Coping Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate 4’-0” long pans with locked and flattened seams with
expansion drive lock joints every 30’-0” maximum. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. 16oz Zinc-Tin Coated Copper.
a. Finish: Mill Finish
2. Cleats: Match exposed metal.
Profile: One-piece through-wall flashings with integrated drip edge. Lock and solder including
thimble flashings at dowel locations. Profiles as indicated on the drawings.
E. Masonry Wall Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous through-wall flashing pan, side and end
dams and receiver with separate counterflashing pieces. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. 16oz Zinc-Tin Coated Copper.
a. Finish: Mill Finish
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-7
April 24th, 2019
2. Cleats & Underplates: Match exposed metal.
Profile: One-piece through-wall flashings with integrated receiver piece and button punched
counterflashing. Lap, rivet and fully solder each section and end damn to form a watertight
flashing. Profiles as indicated on the drawings.
F. Two-Piece Counterflashing: Shop fabricated interior and exterior corners. Lock two-piece flashings into
receivers with button punches and hold down cleats. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. 16oz Zinc-Tin Coated Copper.
a. Finish: Mill Finish
2. Cleats & Underplates: Match exposed metal.
Profile: 2-piece receiver with button punched counterflashing. Lock and solder each section and
end damns to form a watertight flashi ng. Profiles as indicated on the drawings.
G. Through-Wall Fabric Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. 0.020” Flexible Stainless Steel Fabric with Fleece
H. Wall Panels: Custom fabricated wall panels. Lock, lap and solder all interior and exterior corners to the
configuration shown (lap joints alone are not acceptable). Fabricate from the following materials:
1. 16oz Zinc-Tin Coated Copper.
a. Finish: Mill Finish
2. Cleats & Underplates: Match exposed metal.
3. Vertical Panel Profile: 16” wide “s-lock” type panel with concealed fastener flanges.
4. Horizonal Panel Profile: Face fastened 4’-4” panel exposure with hemmed drip edge.
I. Column Covers
1. 16oz Zinc-Tin Coated Copper.
a. Finish: Mill Finish
2. Underplates: 20ga stainless steel.
3. Cleats: Match exposed metal.
4. Profile: As indicated on the drawings.
J. Light-Pole Base Flashings
1. 26ga Stainless Steel base cap flashing.
a. Finish: Mill Finish
2. Profile. As indicated on the drawings.
K. Gravel Guard
1. 26ga Stainless Steel.
a. Finish: Mill Finish.
2. Profile. One piece stiffened ribbed gravel guard as indicated on the drawings.
L. Miscellaneous Furring & Hat Channels
1. 20ga Stainless Steel
a. Finish: Mill Finish.
2. Profiles: 7/8” nominal unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
M. Miscellaneous Flashings (if not noted on the drawings):
1. Provide 16oz Zinc-Tin Coated Copper for flashing fabrications unless noted otherwise.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-8
April 24th, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners , solder, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams
with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight p erformance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs
over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and
tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated
wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal
manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating
where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement
joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, and drive cleats not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize
possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-9
April 24th, 2019
F. Seal lap joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not
less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature
at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement
each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not
install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint
Sealants."
G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets
with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in
completed Work.
1. Do not solder aluminum sheet.
2. Do not use torches for soldering.
3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely
remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid
flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with
solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.
5. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper.
H. Rivets: Lock and solder laps and joints typical. No exposed rivets or rivets that obstruct thermal
movements are permitted, unless noted otherwise on approved shop drawings.
3.3 PERIMETER ROOF EDGE FLASHINGS
A. Perimeter Roof Edge Flashing:
1. Install roof edge flashings in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 approved test results.
2. At minimum, attach continuous cleat to supporting steel anchorage plate with fasteners staggered
3-inches on center, and the exposed perimeter flashing fastened every 8-inches on center.
3. Install 8-inch wide underplates at each splice joint with two rows of embedded sealant on each
side.
B. Perimeter Roof Edge Fascia:
1. Install horizontal and vertical furring channels at 16-inches on center maximum space, 8-inch
spaces at corners anchored to the concrete substrate with masonry fasteners. Allow the roof to
drain; do not block water flow off the roof edge.
2. Fabricate continuous stainless steel backer plate with top and bottom stiffener rib and hems and
fastened to the furring channels at 8-inch spacing.
3. Hook in zinc-tin coated copper fascia to backer plate top and bottom for a secure fit. Install 4-inch
wide underplates at each splice joint.
3.4 COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Counterflashings & Receivers: Two piece interlocking type, formed with hook spring and locking button
punch for secure attachment into receiver set into horizontal and vertical masonry reglets.
1. Counterflashing to be 4" height minimum, with 3” minimum overlap. Fabricate with bayonets
style interlocking laps for thermal expansion. Do not pop rivet.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-10
April 24th, 2019
2. Solder 1 inch wide hold down cleats to concealed flashing pieces and hook bottom edge of
exposed counterflashings, every 12 inches on center.
3. Fabricate with ½-inch lower hem on bottom edge of all counterflashings and flashings, typical.
4. Punch buttons into the counterflashing every 8 inches on center and firmly secure into the
receiever.
5. Where indicated, fabricate heave ga uge backer stiffener plates for anchorage.
B. Installation of Reglet Joints:
1. Extend the built in portion of the flashing a minimum of 3/4 inch into the cut brick reglet. Form
the edge of the built in portion with a 1/4 inch hook dam.
2. Secure the cap with lead wedges 8 inches oc. Fill joint completely with sealant and tool to a
slightly concave surface.
3.5 THROUGH-WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Coping Through-Wall Flashing: Form flashing to shed water away from parapet walls and with the ability
to allow building movement. Install the flashing in continuous lengths with the minimum number of
joints.
1. Apply a continuous smooth and nominally sloped mortar wash on the parapet wall prior to
flashing installation.
2. Form through-wall flashings in 4’-0” long maximum panels, lock and solder all seams. Offset
seams from the stone coping head joints.
3. Form s-lock drive cleat expansion joints every 30’-0” maximum and fill the joints with sealant.
4. Form 3/4-inch long vertical drip legs with dressed seams and corners. Solder joints.
5. Solder copper thimble covers over stone dowels.
6. Place stone coping on lead wedges. Shim as required for a level and plumb installation without
damaging the coping.
7. Do not fill the stone bedding joints with mortar or sealant.
B. Two -Piece Through-Wall Flashing: Form flashing with to shed water away from the interior and with the
ability to allow building movement. Install the flashing in continuous lengths with the minimum number
of joints.
1. Install throughwall flashing on solid firm substrates, with nominal slope away from the wall.
2. Form through wall flashings with upturned side and end panels to direct water to the roof. Rivet
and solder seams.
3. Securely embed flashing into the backup with new cut bedding reglet joints. See above for the
installation of reglet joints.
4. Fabricate thermal expansion joints at through-wall flashings spaced at 30’-0” maximum and form
expansion joints with drive cleats. Apply sealant.
C. Fabric Through-Wall Flashing:
1. Fabricate thru-wall flashing pans as one piece with integrated side and end dams folded and
formed into the required shape. Side dams shall be cut flush to the brick face.
2. Step flashing pans such that cavity wall drainage is captured in the flashing pans in successi ve
shingle style. Slope pans so that water weeps to the exterior without ponding inside the cavity
wall.
3. Attach the back dam of the flashing pan to the backup wall with a bead of sealant and termination
bar.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 62 00
Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-11
April 24th, 2019
3.6 WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture in accordance with cited
sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installa tion of wall flashing with installation
of opening components.
1. Install horizontal and vertical furring channels at 16-inches on center maximum space, 8-inch
spaces at corners anchored to the concrete substrate with masonry fasteners. Allow the roof to
drain behind the panels; do not block water flow off the roof edge.
2. Fabricate interlocking s-lock type flat panels with fastener flanges. Fasten to furring channels
every 4-inches with low profile pancake head fasteners. Interlock each panel together to for m a
snug and secure wall panel.
3. Fabricate s-lock type outside corners and reverse hook inside corner backer plates.
4. Where indicated to receive exposed fasteners, install gasketed fasteners every 12-inches on center.
3.7 SOLDERING
A. General: Tinning & Soldering
1. Tin all surfaces of uncoated metal in contact with solder.
2. Wire brush all surfaces of coated metals in contact with solder. Produce a clean bright surface.
3. Apply flux as required.
4. Sweat solder thoroughly into seams, completely filling the full width of th e seam.
5. Upon completion of soldering, removal traces of flux residue. If required, apply a neutralizing
washing followed by a clean water wash.
6. Any sheet metal fabrications that become wet or are not soldered the same day as assembled shall
not disassembled, cleaned, re-tinned with new flux prior to reinstallation.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess sealants.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet
metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as
recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in
clean condition during construction.
C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or tha t have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 72 00
Ithaca, New York ROOF ACCESSORIES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Work: The work of this section includes all labor, materials, plant, tools, equipment, trucking,
insurance and all related and incidental items to furnish and install all work of this section as shown by the
drawings and specifications.
1. Roof Drain Hardware Replacement.
2. Raised Podium Benches.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 07 52 16 “SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing.”
2. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim.”
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp or other markings of specified testing agency.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRAIN REPLACEMENT HARDWARE
A. Roof Drain Membrane Clamping Collar: Universal cast iron membrane clamping collar and stainless steel
mounting hardware.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. Universal Membrane Clamping Collar Model No. 1002 by Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., P.O. Box
3237, Montgomery, AL 36109, 334-277-8520, www.jrsmith.com
b. Universal clamping ring, By Marathon Roofing Products Inc. 367 Nagel Drive, Buffalo, NY,
14225-4732, (800) 828-8424, www.marathondrains.com
B. Cast Iron Promenade Drain: Replacement clamping collar and promenade top.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. Small Area Roof Drain RD200CP, By Marathon Roofing Products Inc. 367 Nagel Drive,
Buffalo, NY, 14225-4732, (800) 828-8424, www.marathondrains.com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 72 00
Ithaca, New York ROOF ACCESSORIES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00-2
April 24th, 2019
2.2 BENCH FURNITURE
A. Manufacturer: Landscape Forms, Inc., 7800 E. Michigan Ave, Kalamazoo, Michigan 49048.
Phone: (800) 521-2546. Fax (269) 381-3455. Website www.landscapeforms.com.
1. Levit Bench: Straight Profile; 158"w X 28"d X 18" h
2. Material: Reinforced cast stone (concrete): Manufacturer’s proprietary blend of portland cement,
sand, aggregate, and color admixture.
3. Finish Color: Beige
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROOF DRAINS
A. Install roof drain hardware in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.2 BENCH INSTALLATION
A. Install benches in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Install benches level and plumb.
END OF SECTION 07 72 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 76 16
Ithaca, New York PEDESTAL SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07 76 16-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 07 76 16 - PEDESTAL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Adjustable Pedestal Deck Support System
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 0442000 “Dimensioned Exterior Stone.”
2. Section 070150.19 “Preparation for ReRoofing.”
3. Section 075216 “SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing System.”
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation instructions. Include manufacturer's literature completely describing all
components of the paver pedestal system with detailed installation recommendations and
instructions.
4. Cleaning and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings showing all components required for the paver and pedestal
requirements. Include plan drawings showing layout of all paver areas and detail drawings
showing how the various components of the system fit together. Show deck materials used,
pattern, grid layout, starting point, and finished elevation.
C. Structural Analysis: Provide confirmation of the structural capability and adequacy of the
structure to carry the dead and live load weight(s) required, and that the density of any insulation
is satisfactory to resist crushing and damaging the waterproofing membrane.
D. Verification Samples: For each product.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 76 16
Ithaca, New York PEDESTAL SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07 76 16-2
April 24th, 2019
B. Extra Materials: Ten (10) extra adjustment keys and five (5) pedestals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 10 years experience manufacturing deck supports and
tile systems.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer must have a minimum of 2 years proven construction experience
for projects of a similar type and scale. All Work must comply with the manufacturer's installation
instructions and procedures for deck support work specified herein.
C. Generate shop drawings based on roofing survey spot elevations required in Section 070150 for
layout and roof surveys of the work.
D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and installation
workmanship.
1. Complete a 10 foot x 10 foot mockup of the pedestals and paver system.
2. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
3. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact and legible. Inspect all
delivered materials to insure they are undamaged and in good condition.
B. Store products under cover in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace paver system that
fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three (3) year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. System specified shall be used with pedestrian traffic only designed to restrain and contain
the decking panels with perimeter blocking or walls. Decking panels shall not be allowed
to move laterally.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 76 16
Ithaca, New York PEDESTAL SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07 76 16-3
April 24th, 2019
2. All membrane waterproofing and protection board surfaces to receive pedestals sha ll be
broom clean, frost free, and free of dirt, oil or any rough foreign matter, which may impair
the waterproofing / roofing manufacturers guarantee or protection requirements.
3. The substrate that is to receive pedestals shall have slope and provide positive and adequate
drainage in accordance with good building practice and applicable building codes.
4. Decks over Roofing and Waterproofing;
a. Do not use pedestals over any insulation or coverboard less than 60 psi (414 kPa) or
with low density polystyrene (bead board) insulation.
5. Installation or anticipated installation of additional items on top of the deck such as
planters, hot tubs, sculptures, or industrial equipment shall be supported directly by
additional pedestals that are in addition to the main deck paver/tile pedestal system. Failure
to adequately support the additional weight of any such features or items may cause
significant damage to the deck, underlying structure, or waterproofing.
2.2 PEDESTAL DECK SUPPORTS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Marathon Roofing Products Inc.,; Eterno SE Self-Leveling Adjustable Support Deck
Pedestals from ½ inch – 2 inch adjustable heights.
2. Or approved equivalent.
B. Properties:
1. Weight Bearing Design Capacity: 2505 lbs per pedestal.
2. Supporting Base: Surface Area: 49.6 square inches.
3. Self-Leveling Head: 5/32 inch thick plate and compensates gradients of up to 5 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Substrate must be clean and free of projections and debris that could impair the performance of
the pedestals or the total deck system.
C. Verify all elevations, required pedestal heights and deck dimensions before commencing work.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 76 16
Ithaca, New York PEDESTAL SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07 76 16-4
April 24th, 2019
B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
C. Establish accurate lines, levels and patterns.
D. Verify that substrate to receive the deck supports is structurally capable of carrying the dead and
live loads anticipated.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Grid Lay-out and Elevations:
1. Once the starting point and the finished elevation of the deck surface have been determined,
the "Top of Pedestal Elevation" (finished elevation less decking paver or tile thickness )
shall established and marked around the perimeter using a transit water level or laser
leveling device.
2. Precise measurements shall be taken and deck area should be accurately defined. Mark off
and square up all outside edges with control lines using snapped chalk lines. Mark two
lines that are perpendicular to each other across the deck area. Continue to mark a grid of
lines in both directions marking the location of each pedestal. Use the control lines as
references to periodically check and assure a square layout during installation.
3. Pedestals shall be placed where each measured grid line meets the perimeter. Remove two
spacer tabs in line with one another atop each pedestal system placed around the perimeter.
Remove all four spacer tabs at corners.
4. Adjust each pedestal height to the top of pedestal elevation marked on the perimeter.
Position the pedestal as close to the edge of the perimeter as possible, with the two
remaining spacer tabs aligned with the grid line. Using the elevation marked on the
perimeter, stretch a mason's line along and slightly ahead of the second row of pedestals.
A laser leveling device may also be used for this purpose.
5. On larger decks, it is recommended that pedestal system be pre-assembled and pre-set to
the proper elevation and placed in position prior to the installation of decking paver or tile.
6. As the pedestals located along the grid lines are loaded with pavers or tiles, fine vertical
height adjustment can be made by inserting and rotating, from the top, a T-handle hex key
in to the Insert of the pedestal assembly. Clockwise rotation of the Insert will raise the
bearing surface and the deck. Counter-clockwise rotation will lower the top bearing surface
and deck.
7. Maintain adequate thread engagement. Pedestal inserts contain a Screw Block System that
indicates when units have safely reached their maximum height adjustment. If the height
required goes beyond the insert limit select the appropriate pedestal configuration to
facilitate height adjustment within safety limits.
8. Slight irregularities in decking paver or tile thickness shall be compensated for by using
one to two shim segments. Place on top of the pedestal, under the corners of the decking
paver or tile. Use no more than two shims on top of the pedestal and always adhe re
quartered wedges with construction adhesive.
9. Stackable pedestals may be used for limited and or fixed height requirements up to 1.25
inch. Complete deck and grid layout as specified. Stack no more than two fixed height
stackable pedestals together and place in lieu of adjustable pedestals where needed. Spacer
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 76 16
Ithaca, New York PEDESTAL SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PEDESTAL SYSTEM 07 76 16-5
April 24th, 2019
tabs can be removed or pedestals can be segmented to accommodate perimeter and corner
support locations.
C. Slope and Height Compensation:
1. Stackable pedestals can be used to provide limited slope and height compensation to
maintain a level decking surface over sloping substrates using a combination of pedestals
and shims.
2. Self-leveling pedestals can provide both slope and height compensation from 0 to 5 percent
to maintain a level decking surface over sloping substrates by selecting the appropriate
pedestal combination of base, extension and self-leveling head to meet general height
requirements.
3. Pedestals shall be designed to be rotated for final precise adjustment when they are fully
loaded. Pedestals shall be leveled in each succeeding row as the installation proceeds. Final
height adjustment or maintenance is easily made by using a T -handle hex key that allows
adjustment of the pedestals without removing the pavers. Insert T-handle hex key between
the four paver corners to engage Insert portion and is adjusted clockwise or counter
clockwise to level as needed.
4. Use shims in multiples, whole or quarters, and placed under the pedestal base or on top the
pedestal cap to level pedestals. Use a small amount of construction adhesive to adhere
sections of shims and/or whole shims to each other or to the pedestal. Do not use
construction adhesive to adhere pedestal or shims to insulation, roofing or waterproofing
membrane. Additional sections of shims may be used and should be available for regular
maintenance.
3.4 PERIMETER CONTAINMENT
A. Areas of the pedestal deck that is not restrained by a parapet or foundation wall shall be boxed-in
and contained to prevent movement. Install perimeter framing and edging boards at t he outside
of the deck perimeter to provide restraint. Movement at the perimeter of the deck system greater
than one tab width is not allowed.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect often during installation to assure that grid spacer lines are being maintained in a straight
and consistent pattern and that deck pavers or tiles are level and not rocking. Unless otherwise
specified in writing to allow for expansion, inspect to assure that all paver spacing between tiles
and at perimeter walls does not exceed a tab width.
B. Assure that all pedestrian entry or access points to the deck are level and that the deck surface
tiles are not randomly raised or uneven creating a tripping or safety hazard.
END OF SECTION 07 76 16
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 92 00
Ithaca, New York JOINT SEALANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone non-traffic joint sealants.
2. Silicone & urethane traffic and non-traffic joint sealants.
3. Pre-compressed Expanding Joint Sealants
4. Firestopping/ Firecaulk.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sealant systems to include in maintenance manuals.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint
sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Firestopping: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Firestopping Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations .
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
1. Firestopping/ Firecaulking installers shall be FM Global approved to install products.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 92 00
Ithaca, New York JOINT SEALANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-2
April 24th, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -
sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement
capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SCS2000 SilPruf.
c. Pecora Corporation; PCS.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement
capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50,
Uses T and NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning CCS.
b. Sika Sikaflex-1CSL
c. Pecora 300-SL.
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), and of size and density to
control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.5 PRECOMPRESSED EXPANDING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Exterior traffic grade, pre-compressed joint sealant shall be silicone pre-coated, preformed, pre-
compressed, self-expanding, sealant system. Expanding foam to be cellular foam impregnated with a
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 92 00
Ithaca, New York JOINT SEALANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-3
April 24th, 2019
water-based, non-drying, 100% acrylic dispersion. Seal shall combine factory-applied, low-modulus
silicone and a backing of acrylic-impregnated expanding foam into a unified hybrid sealant system.
1. Material shall be capable of movements of +50%, -50% (100% total) of nominal material size.
2. Acceptable Products & Manufacturers include: DSM System product as manufactured by: (USA
& International) EMSEAL JOINT SYSTEMS, LTD 25 Bridle Lane, Westborough, MA 01581 -
2603, Toll Free: 800-526-8365.
3. Sizes: ½-3/4” x 1-3/4” nominal.
2.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire, resist passage of
smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
1. Listed Products: FM Global & UL.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration
firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping
indicated.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to
joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the follo wing requirements:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 92 00
Ithaca, New York JOINT SEALANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-4
April 24th, 2019
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushin g, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum
bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the
following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated
by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-
sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position requ ired to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet befor e sealant application, and replace
them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs
of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at t he same time backings are
installed:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07 92 00
Ithaca, New York JOINT SEALANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-5
April 24th, 2019
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut
out, remove, and repair damaged or d eteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: All exterior roof, wall and window joints, non-traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: Approximate color of adjoining material to be selected and approved by the
architect from the full manufacture color selection.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: All exterior roof, wall and window joints, non-traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: Approximate color of adjoining material to be selected and approved by the
architect from the full manufacture color selection.
C. Pre-Compressed Joint Sealant: Where indicated on the drawings.
D. Firecaulking: New penetrations through the structural roof deck.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 08 91 19
Ithaca, New York FIXED LOUVERS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FIXED LOUVERS 08 91 19-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 08 91 19 - FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fixed extruded-aluminum louver mechanical screens.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 05 05 31 “ Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
D. Sample warranties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication Tolerances shall be in accordance with ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531-09 Metal Bar Grating
Manual.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 08 91 19
Ithaca, New York FIXED LOUVERS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FIXED LOUVERS 08 91 19-2
April 24th, 2019
components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to
fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.
2.2 FIXED FORMED-METAL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver System:
1. Aluminum Pressure Lock Louver Mechanical Screen, with extruded aluminum louver profile bars
punched to receive 5/16” sq. cross rods and hydraulically pressed to permanently lock the bars in
place.
2. Louver Profile Bar Spacing: 1-1/2-inches on center.
3. Cross Bar Spacing: 4-inches on center.
4. Deflection Criteria: L/180 maximum.
5. Frame: Welded Exterior Framed
6. Finish: Refer to Powder Coating, Section 05 05 31 “ Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
7. Acceptable Product: LGli80 Louver by Ohio Gratings, Inc. 5299 Southway St. SW, Canton, Ohio
44706, 800.321.9800 www.ohiogratings.com , or approved equal.
a. Free Area: Not less than 50% free area.
2.3 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening.
B. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:
1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise
recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. Use Phillips hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and
installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 08 91 19
Ithaca, New York FIXED LOUVERS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FIXED LOUVERS 08 91 19-3
April 24th, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required
to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
D. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action b y applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint
or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work.
If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace
with new units.
END OF SECTION 08 91 19
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS 23 05 00-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 23 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 23 sections, in addition to Division 1
- General Requirements.
1.2 CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Materials furnished and installations made under this specification shall conform with applicable
requirements of the codes, regulations and standards described herein, unless specifically described
otherwise.
B. If any codes, standards or regulations conflict, the most stringent shall apply.
C. All materials and equipment installations shall comply with standards of:
1. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).
2. Local Utilities
3. Owner's Insurance Underwriters.
4. Applicable Government Agencies and Departments.
5. Underwriters Laboratory (UL).
6. Federal and State Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
7. Local Municipality.
8. Local Fire Department.
9. American Gas Association (AGA).
10. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
11. ASTM Regulations and Standards for pipe, fittings, pressure vessels, testing and insulation.
12. Conformance with the applicable codes, rules and regulations of the State of New York, NYCRR,
Code Rule 4 and Code Rule 14, pertaining to boilers, gas and oil burners, controls and protective
devices.
13. AWWA American Water Works Association.
14. New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code.
15. Electrically powered equipment shall comply with the National Electric Code (NEC) and shall be
UL listed for the intended usage.
16. The American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
17. The Mechanical Code of New York State.
1.3 MATERIALS FOR REVIEW
A. Consistent with the project schedule, the Division 23 Contractor shall submit for review the complete list
including descriptive dimensions and rating data of equipment and materials.
B. All materials and equipment furnished shall be in accordance with manufacturer's catalog numbers listed
herein.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS 23 05 00-2 April 24th, 2019
C. Submittals for these materials shall be made as soon as practical for purpose of dimension verification
and record.
D. The Division 23 Contractor shall submit the quantity of equipment catalog cuts or descriptive literature as
required by Division 1.
E. For the items so listed, cuts or literature shall be clearly marked to indicate the following:
1. Function of the equipment to be furnished.
2. Picture of the unit.
3. Ratings, dimensions and service clearances.
4. Arrangement to be furnished.
5. Electrical or other power characteristics.
6. Data sheets of accessories to be furnished.
7. Operating weight of each equipment unit.
8. Designation of item as shown on the drawings.
F. In addition, the submittal shall bear the project name, the contractor's name, the date reviewed by the
contractor, the contractor's control number (if applicable), and a stamp with the contractor's signature
certifying that the item has been reviewed and it complies with the requirements of the contract
documents.
G. Any submittals not clearly marked as indicated above will be returned to the Division 23 Contractor for
resubmission.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submittal of substitute equipment performance data shall be made in strict adherence to the requirements
set forth in division 1 specifications.
1.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Division with minimum five years
documented experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1.
C. Protect units from physical damage by storing in protected areas and leaving factory covers in place.
D. Cover units stored outdoors in dark colored poly covers for complete protection from rain, snow and sun.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence work under the provisions of Division 1.
B. Schedule work under the provisions of Division 1
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS 23 05 00-3 April 24th, 2019
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Furnish all new equipment and materials as described herein. Any material, operation, method or device
mentioned, listed or noted within this specification shall be furnished and installed by the Division 23
Contractor, unless specifically mentioned as being furnished or installed by others.
B. When equipment other than design make manufacturer is used the Contractor accepts full responsibility
for any or all dimensional, performance or electrical differences and associated changes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. All work shall be performed in cooperation with the Owner, Architect and all other contractors. The
Division 23 Contractor shall coordinate all work with the construction schedule established by the Owner
and Architect, and shall immediately report any delays in materials receipt including circumstances
causing the delays.
3.2 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend
grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
E. Layout of equipment, ductwork, piping, etc. is diagrammatic. Check project drawings prior to making
installations for interferences with other trades. Should the contractor find such interferences, he shall be
responsible for coordinating his work with the other responsible trades. Owner reserves the right to make
reasonable changes prior to "roughing-in" without added expense. Dimensions shown are subject to
verification of exact site conditions. Do not scale the drawings.
F. If larger access openings are required to install new equipment, it is this contractor’s responsibility to
make access (cut) in the building and repair/replace (patch) access to match existing. Packaged
equipment disassembly and reassembly for same is also the responsibility of this contractor
1. Minimum pipe size for all piping systems is ¾”. ½” piping will not be accepted.
G. If mechanical contractor engages a subcontractor to perform any work, the mechanical contractor shall be
present on-site at all times with the subcontractor. The mechanical contractor shall provide direction and
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS 23 05 00-4 April 24th, 2019
coordination, approve equipment and material purchases, and answer any RFI’s that the subcontractor
has.
3.3 REMOVALS/DEMOLITION
A. Equipment shall remain unless indicated for removal on the drawings; if in question do not remove until
verified by Architect/Engineer.
B. Equipment indicated to be removed shall be offered to the owner prior to disposal. The equipment shall
be relocated to the location designated by the owner when required. All removals include associated
brackets, hangers and supports whether specifically mentioned or not.
C. If larger access openings are required to remove existing equipment, it is this contractor’s responsibility
to make access (cut) in the building and repair/replace (patch) access to match existing..
3.4 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. Furnish and install all brackets, supports and/or reinforcements for installation of mechanical equipment
in excess of building structure and applicable structural design where required or as shown on drawings,
including equipment hung from steel joists (reinforce at panel points). Where detail is not shown, submit
drawings of intended construction for approval.
B. In renovation projects where existing structural steel cross-bridging interferes with duct removal or new
duct installation, the Division 23 Contractor is responsible for removal and re-installation. Notify the
Architect/Engineer prior to removal for review and approval.
3.5 FIRE AND SMOKE STOPPING
A. Division 23 Contractor is responsible for fire and smoke stopping for all pipe and duct penetrations of
fire and smoke rated partitions. Refer to division 1 for additional information.
3.6 SYSTEMS
A. The Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible to provide complete and operable systems, including
operational properties to the extent necessary to link multiple components of a system together and to
interface with other systems.
3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall maintain a set of record documents clearly indicating all changes from the contract
drawings to be use in creating as-built drawings.
3.8 CLOSE OUT REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to any or all requirements listed in Division 1 specifications, the following are required to be
submitted to the Architect/Engineer:
1. As-built drawing markup.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS 23 05 00-5 April 24th, 2019
2. Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3. Manufacturer’s one-year parts warranty
3.9 INSPECTIONS
A. The Division 23 Contractor shall have:
1. Required local or municipal inspection processed and presented to the Owner with certificate
indicating approval of such governing bodies.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 12
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS 23 05 12-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 23 05 12 – SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.A list of the minimum required submittals and shop drawings to be provided by the contractor for
review. In general, submittals must:
a.Be in electronic (pdf) format.
b.Be clear and readable.
c.Include product data.
d.Include deviations from Contract Document requirements.
e.Be clearly marked by specification section, number and title.
f.Include Transmittals, including Architect and/or Construction Manager if applicable.
g.Include Installation and Operation manuals.
h.Be in accordance with all Division 1 requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS/SHOP DRAWINGS
A.SPECIFICATION SECTION REQUIREMENTS
1.233113- Ductwork
a.Submit in sheet size equal to design drawings. Shop drawings shall incorporate the
dimensions of the actual equipment used, duct sizes and duct transition dimensions, duct
material, method of joint fitting, building walls and obstructions.
b.Drawings shall be based on dimensions from architectural & structural drawings and/or
field measurements and field verification indicating actual conditions. All devices to be
installed in the ductwork shall be indicated including but not limited to balancing dampers,
fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, access doors, flexible duct
connectors, humidification dispersion tubes and duct smoke detectors.
c.Electronic (CAD] floor plans (no duct design) will be provided upon request to assist in
preparation of the drawings. Scanned design drawings submitted with pencil notes shall
not be acceptable. Drawings must be created in a computer aided design program and
submitted in PDF.
d.Indicate section views, elevations and plan views as necessary to facilitate installation of
various ductwork systems and corresponding equipment. Include all ductwork and
systems.
e.Indicate top of duct and bottom of duct dimensions. Dimensions to include duct flanges
and/or external insulation to represent total clear dimensions.
f.Indicate ceiling heights, structural members and any or all conflicts with clearances,
obstructions, etc. and proposed solutions if necessary.
2.230910 - Fans
a.Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
b.Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.
c.Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.230593 - Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 12
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS 23 05 12-2 April 24th, 2019
a. Certified Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by test and balance firm.
b. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
c. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC’s “National Standards for Testing
and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” or NEBB’s
“Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 93
Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. This Section includes testing and balancing to produce design objectives for air and hydronic systems.
B. Submittals:
1. Certified TAB reports.
2. Documentation of work performed per ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
3. Documentation of work performed per ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System
Balancing."
C. TAB Firm Qualifications: AABC or NEBB certified.
D. TAB Report Forms: Standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.
E. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these
balancing devices are accessible.
D. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and
adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
E. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,
and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
F. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible, and their
controls are connected and functioning.
G. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 93
Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93-2 April 24th, 2019
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of dampers and valves for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and
fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-
volume terminals.
4. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
5. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
6. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
H. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of test and balance procedures.
3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in
AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111, NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent
necessary for TAB procedures. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same
material and thickness as used to construct ducts. Install and join new insulation that matches removed
materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish.
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators,
fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
B. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
E. Check for airflow blockages.
F. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
G. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
H. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 05 93
Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93-3 April 24th, 2019
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 09 10
Ithaca, New York FANS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FANS 23 09 10-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 23 09 10 - FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. In-line exhaust fans
B. Accessories.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 230500.
B. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
C. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1 and Section 230500.
1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis: Greenheck or approved equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IN-LINE EXHAUST FANS
A. Downblast Roof Exhaust Fan: Adjustable belt drive centrifugal blower; non-overloading backward
inclined wheel, statically and dynamically balanced; solid steel drive shaft with self-aligning bearings;
roof curb mounted, with hinged sub-base; heavy gauge spun aluminum fan housing; motor completely
out of the exhaust air stream and mounted on vibration isolators; integral disconnect switch; PVC coated
bird screen; AMCA certified fan ratings; 115 volt single phase electrically actuated automatic damper
factory wired and requiring no additional power wiring in the field; air handling capacities and electrical
data as listed in schedule on drawings. Design selection based on model GB.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 09 10
Ithaca, New York FANS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL FANS 23 09 10-2 April 24th, 2019
B. Speed Controller: Solid state;
C. 7 day time clock, occupied/unoccupied schedule
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for
Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and
efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mount electronic variable speed control inside fan cabinet or adjacent to fan unless noted otherwise;
coordinate installation of speed controller with EC.
C. Automatic Damper Control:
1. Constant Volume Fans - Contractor is to provide and install a control relay for 115 volt-1 phase
damper actuator control and required actuator control wiring (115 volt-1 phase) at fan, for fans
requiring automatic dampers (refer to fan schedule). Power can be taken from main power to fan
motor starter. Coordinate with Division 16 contractor.
D. Refer to Division 1 for coordination requirements.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 31 13
Ithaca, New York DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DUCTS AND ACCESORIES 23 31 13-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 23 31 13 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals:
1. Refer to Specification Section 230500 for additional requirements.
2. Documentation indicating that duct systems and accessories comply with ASHRAE 62.1,
Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
3. Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 -
"Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning." and Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction
and Insulation."
4. Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.4 -
"Ventilation System Start-up."
5. For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible.
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -
"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
F. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
2.2 DUCTS
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip galvanized coating.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
B. Joint and Seam Tape, and Sealant: Comply with UL 181A.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 31 13
Ithaca, New York DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DUCTS AND ACCESORIES 23 31 13-2 April 24th, 2019
C. Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Volume Dampers and Control Dampers: Single-blade and multiple opposed-blade dampers, standard
leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications; factory fabricated and complete with
required hardware and accessories. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting
brackets, bases, or adapters.
B. Automatic Dampers: Multi-blade, low leakage type, opposed blade volume damper, extruded aluminum
blades maximum 6" wide, linkage concealed in frame with control shaft protruding 6" beyond frame,
molded synthetic bearings, heavy gauge frame with compression type jamb seals, extruded vinyl blade
seals, size as shown on drawings. Design based on Ruskin, Model CD 50 low leakage damper; or
approved equal.
C. Backdraft Dampers: Heavy-duty extruded aluminum frame and blades, vinyl edge seals on blades; zytel
bearings; aluminum linkage; adjustable counterbalance; equipped for horizontal or vertical mounting;
mill finish; size as required. Design selection based on Ruskin Mfg. Co., Model CBD4; or approved
equal.
D. Air Turning Devices: Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel
or aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap, long removable key operator; Model Acousti
Turn manufactured by AirSan or approved equal.
E. Flexible Connectors: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with
UL 181, Class 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible":
1. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
C. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces.
D. Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
E. Support ducts to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Ch. 4, "Hangers and Supports."
F. Install volume and control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid
erosion of duct liner.
G. Remove all construction dust and debris from new duct systems before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 31 13
Ithaca, New York DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL DUCTS AND ACCESORIES 23 31 13-3 April 24th, 2019
3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to indicated
quantities.
1. Refer to Section 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 00 10
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 10-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 260010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of this Contract, including the bidding and Contract requirements, Division 0,
Division 1, schedules, addenda, and modifications apply to the work of this Division.
B. Electrical work is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and
place in operation all conduits, cables, and all other material needed for the complete lighting, power, and
other electrical systems shown or indicated in the Contract Documents.
C. Drawings and Specifications are supplementing each other. Work shown but not specified, or specified
but not shown, shall be performed or furnished as though present in both Drawing and Specifications.
D. Related specifications
1. General construction work
2. HVAC work (Division 23)
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Project Manual to assure
efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions
for accommodating items installed later.
B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building
utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,
connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate premises wiring with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers.
D. Follow routing shown for pipe and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of
building. Coordinate space requirements and utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. Resolve conflicts with other trades before proceeding. If
conflicts cannot be resolved, notify Owner's Representative.
E. Coordinate electrical requirements with Division 23 Contractor. Provide power wiring for all HVAC
equipment, controls, and transformers unless indicated otherwise.
F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal conduit and wiring within the construction.
Coordinate location of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
G. Coordinate completion and cleanup of Work of separate sections in preparation for Completion and for
portions of Work designated for Owner's occupancy.
H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and
Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 00 10
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 10-2 April 24th, 2019
1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Provide cutting and patching for work of this Division.
B. Patch openings left by abandoned equipment, conduit, and pipes.
C. Patch shall match existing finishes.
1.4 PAINTING
A. Paint all exposed conduit, color to be selected by owner. Apply one coat of appropriate etching primer
and two coats of paint suitable for metal surfaces and exterior use.
1.5 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
A. All material indicated for removal, or required to be removed to complete the work, shall be disposed of
in accordance with Federal, state, and local regulations.
B. Where removals occur on services that are to remain in operation, cap or otherwise terminate the
remaining services beneath finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUALS
A. Submit complete set of manuals for all work of this Division in accordance with Division 1, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS. Manual shall include:
1. Installation, maintenance, operating instructions and full catalog description including exploded
parts drawings of all equipment.
2. Emergency phone numbers for servicing for all equipment.
3. List of all Suppliers and Subcontractors including addresses and phone numbers of contact
persons.
4. All receipts, submittals, test reports, warranties
5. Wiring and control diagrams
6. Maintenance schedule.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain and pay for all permits, testing, and inspections required for the work of this Division in
accordance with Section 01060, REGULATORY REQUIRMENTS.
3.2 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION
A. After completion of Work, provide complete training to Owner’s representative, including operation and
maintenance, emergency procedures, seasonal provisions, review of manuals, and product warranty
information.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 00 10
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 10-3 April 24th, 2019
END OF SECTION 230010
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals:
1. Product Data: For sleeve seals.
B. Related sections:
1. 26 00 10 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.2 RACEWAYS
A. Raceways:
1. EMT: ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
2. FMC: UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
3. IMC: ANSI C80.6, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings.
4. GRC: ANSI C80.1 and UL 6, hot-dip galvanized.
5. LFMC: UL 360, zinc-coated, flexible steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic
jacket.
6. RNC: UL 621 and NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings.
7. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type used in Project.
B. Wireways: Sheet metal sized and shaped, with screw covers.
C. Handholes and Boxes for Exterior Underground Wiring:
1. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a
combination of the two.
2. Comply with SCTE 77.
3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load
rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC".
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-2 April 24th, 2019
2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conductors:
1. Comply with NEMA WC70.
2. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
3. Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper.
4. Insulation: Thermoplastic, Type THHN-THWN or XHHW.
5. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for
service indicated.
B. Multiconductor Cable: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
2.4 GROUNDING MATERIALS
A. Conductors: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller, and stranded for No. 6 AWG and larger unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B 3.
3. Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B 8.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least
two bolts with clamp-type pipe connectors sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials
being joined and installation conditions.
2.5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Raceway Identification Materials: Self-adhesive, color-coding vinyl tape; flexible, preprinted, self-
adhesive vinyl.
B. Conductor Identification Materials: Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape 1 to 2
inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
C. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape with
continuous metallic strip or core.
D. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
E. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
F. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label; punched or drilled for
screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background; red letters for emergency systems.
G. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and
lock washers.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-3 April 24th, 2019
2.6 SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly, and provide finish suitable for the environment in which installed.
1. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and fittings.
D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted-support-system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength; complying with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.7 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized-steel sheet.
D. Sleeve Seals: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include
type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing
elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.8 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,
noncorrosive, nonstaining.
2.9 PAINTING
A. Paint all exposed conduit. Refer to 26 00 10 – General Electrical Requirements.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-4 April 24th, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install electrical equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that
reduce headroom are indicated.
B. Install electrical equipment to provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum
interference to other installations.
C. Install electrical equipment to allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
D. Install electrical equipment to ensure that connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and
busways are clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
E. Install required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other
structural components as they are constructed.
F. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or
otherwise concealed. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."
G. Install sleeve and sleeve seals of type and number required for sealing electrical service penetrations of
exterior walls.
H. Comply with NECA 1.
I. Electrical services shall be grounded in compliance with NEC 250.
3.2 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Outdoor Raceways Applications:
1. Exposed or Concealed: IMC.
2. Underground, Single Run: RGS.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: Metallic, NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
B. Indoor Raceways Applications:
1. Exposed or Concealed: EMT.
2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; in wet or damp locations, use LFMC.
3. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: Metallic, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
D. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-5 April 24th, 2019
E. Install raceways embedded in slabs in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1-
inch- (25-mm-) thick concrete cover.
1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.
2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3. Install conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel to or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
4. Transition from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, or
IMC before rising above floor.
F. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
G. Install pull wires in empty raceways.
H. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a 72-inch
(1830-mm) maximum length of flexible conduit.
I. Install raceways and cables conceal within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
J. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
K. Installation of Hangers and Supports:
1. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements, except as specified in this
article.
2. Separate dissimilar metals and metal products from contact with wood or cementitious materials,
by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation.
3. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT IMC and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
4. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install on trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted
channel.
5. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be
weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
6. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods, unless
otherwise indicated or required by Code:
a. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
b. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
c. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
d. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
e. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
f. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-6 April 24th, 2019
g. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount on slotted-
channel racks attached to substrate.
7. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders, Branch Circuits, and Class 1 Control Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-
THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Metal Clad
cable, Type MC.
D. Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and underground:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Grounding Electrode Systems shall comply with NEC 250.50.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at
least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
C. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted.
D. Underground Connections: Welded.
E. Connections to Structural Steel: Bolted.
F. Install grounding conductors routed along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be
subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
G. Install bonding straps and jumpers in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where
routed through short lengths of conduit.
H. Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
I. Bond to equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports so vibration is not transmitted to
rigidly mounted equipment.
J. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified,
at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.
1. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without
soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical
treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
2. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-7 April 24th, 2019
3. Report measured ground resistances that exceeds 10 ohms.
4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For No. 3 AWG conductors and larger, at each location where
observable, identify phase using color-coding conductor tape.
B. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring.
C. Warning Labels for Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145; identify system
voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
D. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Provide
a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high
label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for screw
attachment.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate for viewing
from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
c. Transformers.
d. Disconnect switches.
e. Enclosed circuit breakers.
f. Contactors.
E. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
F. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference
with operation and maintenance of equipment.
G. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the
location and substrate.
H. Install system identification color banding for raceways and cables at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals
in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
I. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Ungrounded service feeder
and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 00
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-8 April 24th, 2019
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
2. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance
of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points.
J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to
8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEALS INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
C. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
D. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless
sleeve seal is to be installed.
E. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
F. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable,
using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
G. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units
applied in coordination with roofing work.
H. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
I. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original
fire-resistance rating of assembly. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
END OF SECTION 260500
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 09 23
Ithaca, New York LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 DEVICES
A. Outdoor Photoelectric Switches: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1000-VA inductive, to
operate connected relay, contactor coils, and microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics.
b. Intermatic, Inc.
c. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
d. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.
e. TORK.
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels
within that range.
3. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and
IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.
B. Outdoor, Weatherproof Motion Sensors:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Lighting.
b. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
c. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.
d. TORK.
e. Watt Stopper (The).
2. Type: Passive infrared.
3. Switch Rating:
a. Separately Mounted Sensor: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac,
for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac..
4. Voltage: 120/277 V.
5. Time Delay: Adjustable up to 15 minutes.
6. Detection Coverage: 180-degree field of view and 110-foot detection range.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 09 23
Ithaca, New York LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23-2 April 24th, 2019
C. Lighting Contactors: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination type with nonfused
disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not
exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A locations
that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.
C. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
D. Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays.
END OF SECTION 260923
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 27 26
Ithaca, New York WIRING DEVICES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Wall-box motion sensors.
3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
4. Solid-state fan speed controls.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of produce indicated.
B. List of legends and description of materials and process used for labeling wall plates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers'
names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
2.3 COMMERCIAL-GRADE DEVICES
A. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the
following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranded building wire.
2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
B. Device Color:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 27 26
Ithaca, New York WIRING DEVICES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-2 April 24th, 2019
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise
indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6,
UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Hubbell; GFRST20
c. Leviton; GFNT2
d. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B. Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard
device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
C. Mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom
unless otherwise indicated. Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates.
END OF SECTION 262726
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 41 00
Ithaca, New York LIGHTENING PROTECTION SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTENING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 41 00-1
April 24th, 2019
SECTION 26 41 00 - LIGHTENING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.Section includes air terminals, conductors, grounding rods, clips, brackets, clamps and other required
accessories required for a complete UL Masterlabel lightning protection system.
B.The system shall be designed and installed to capture a lightning strike, safely convey the energy to the
ground, dissipate the energy into the grounding system and bond all ground points together.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.Lightning Protection Institute: LPI 175 – Standard of Practice for the Design, Installation and Inspection
of Lightning Protection Systems.
B.National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 780 – Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection
Systems.
C.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
1.UL 96 – Lightning Protection Components.
2.UL 96A – Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems.
3.UL 497 – Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits.
4.UL 1449 – Surge Protective Devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: For each type of product and new component.
B.Shop Drawings:
1.Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment details.
2.Bill of Materials.
C.Delegated-Design Submittal: Submit installation drawings, product data and other information sufficient
to describe lightning protection system and coordination with related work. Submittal shall be signed by
Lightning Protection System Designer and state that design complies with the Quality Assurance
Requirements.
D.Designer Qualifications.
E.Manufacturer Qualifications.
F.Installer Qualifications.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 41 00
Ithaca, New York LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 41 00-2 April 24th, 2019
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. UL Masterlable report.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Certification: Provide written certification from the manufacturer that the proposed
products are compatible for use with all other equipment proposed for use for this system and meet all
contract requirements.
B. System Designer: An Individual certified as Designer/ Inspector or Master Installer by Lightning
Protection Institute.
C. Installer Qualifications: The system shall be installed by a firm actively engaged in the installation of
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems. The persons performing
the Work of this section and their supervisor shall be personally experienced in lightning protection
systems and shall have been regularly employed by a Company engaged in the installation of this type
system for a minimum of ten years.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inspection:
1. Send completed Master Label Application Form to Chicago Office of Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.
2. After completion of UL inspection and acceptance, install Master Label at appropriate location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Erico International Corporation
2. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co., Inc., Springville, NY.
3. Independent Protection Co., Inc., Goshen, IN.
4. East Coast Lightning Equipment, Inc
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All materials for this installation shall be Class I as defined by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use on
structures less than 75 feet in height.
B. Copper shall be of the grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work, generally designated as
being 98 percent conductivity when annealed.
C. Air Terminals:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 41 00
Ithaca, New York LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 41 00-3 April 24th, 2019
1. Roof Air Terminals bases: Solid bronze or copper with mechanical cable holder, suitable for use
with existing air terminals.
D. Conductors:
1. Main Conductors - Cable:
a. Copper weighing not less than 187-1/2 lbs per 1000 feet.
b. The size of any wire in the conductor not less than No. 17 AWG.
c. Minimum cross-sectional area of 59,500 cir. mil.
E. Connections and Splices: Connectors and splices shall be of suitable configuration and type for the
intended application and of the same material as the conductor.
F. Cable Holders:
1. Cable Holders: Adhesive-type copper or bronze crimp or mechanical connection type.
G. Guard Pipes: Copper, 3/4 inch O.D. x 8’-0” long with bonding wedge.
H. Adhesive: High performance, UV resistant, moisture curing polyether sealant, acceptable for use with
roofing material.
I. Fasteners: Series 300 Stainless Steel screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the Lightning Protection System as required to obtain UL Master Label.
B. Unless noted otherwise, aluminum lightning protection components shall only be used in contact with
stainless steel or zinc/tin coated copper roofing materials. Copper lightning protection components shall
only be used in contact with copper roofing materials.
C. Flat Roofing: Securely attach lightning protection components to roof with clamps and accessories. Any
penetrations to roofing material shall be properly flashed and confirmed to be electrically isolated from
building electrical systems.
3.3 TESTING
A. Complete functional testing of the lightning protection system at the completion of the work. Correct any
deficiencies.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 41 00
Ithaca, New York LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 41 00-4 April 24th, 2019
3.4 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide to the owner (2) copies of the UL Masterlable report after system testing.
END OF SECTION 26 41 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 50 00
Ithaca, New York LIGHTING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTING 26 50 00-1 April 24th, 2019
SECTION 265000 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals: Product Data for each luminaire, including lamps; shop drawings for Type C light fixture.
1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATONS
A. DECORATIVE RAILINGS – 057300
B. SHOP APPLIED FINSHES - 050531
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598 and listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
C. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV
radiation.
2.3 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION
A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and
supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.
D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied
as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 50 00
Ithaca, New York LIGHTING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTING 26 50 00-2 April 24th, 2019
1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph
a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0
b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years
c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0
2.4 ALUMINUM POLES
A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6 with access
handhole in pole wall.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish.
C. Height: Refer to Drawings.
2.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Type A and B fixture:
1. Basis-of-design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
drawings.
B. Type C fixture:
1. Lighting system basis of design is an illuminated handrail system with an LED light integrated
into a custom handrail. At contractor’s option, provided all requirements below are met, contractor
may choose an alternate product.
2. Basis-of-design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
drawings or equivalent product as approved by architect or engineer.
3. Light distribution: Fixture shall be capable of providing asymmetric light distribution, with a
minimum illumination level of 3 foot-candles at any location on stair tread and average of at least
10 foot-candles over entire stair.
4. Light source: LED.
5. Color temperature: 3000K
6. Voltage: 120VAC.
7. Any submitted equivalents shall work with electrical distribution as designed on sheet E101.
8. Rail finish shall match specification 05 73 00.
9. Manufacturer’s warranty of light fixture must be minimum 5 years.
10. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years of experience.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture
where necessary.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 50 00
Ithaca, New York LIGHTING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL LIGHTING 26 50 00-3 April 24th, 2019
3.2 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
B. Ground metal poles. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 265000
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.
2. Preparing subgrades for pavements, turf and grasses, and plants.
3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete pavements.
5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and
beneath the slab-on-grade.
2. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling] topsoil,
and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.
3. Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including preparing
and placing planting soil for turf areas.
4. Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit excavation and
planting.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-2
April 24, 2019
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions
indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement
material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock
material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that
cannot be removed by rock-excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance
ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below
subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within
buildings.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service.
c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and plant-
protection zones.
d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade.
e. Field quality control.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-3
April 24, 2019
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:
1. Geotextiles.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.
C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth-moving
operations. Submit before earth moving begins.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for
testing indicated.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during earth-moving operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property
adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Dig Safely New York at 1-800-962-7962 for area where Project is located
before earth moving operations.
D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-
control measures specified in Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" are in place.
E. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Section 01 56 39
"Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-4
April 24, 2019
F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.
G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from
excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to
ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according
to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; NYSDOT Item 304.12
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; NYSDOT Item 304.15
F. Select Structure Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; NYSDOT Item 203.21.
Sieve Size Designation Percent Passing by Weight
2 in. 100
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-5
April 24, 2019
1/4 in. 25-60
No. 40 5-40
No. 200 0-10
G. Select Granular Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; NYSDOT Item 203.07.
Sieve Size Designation Percent Passing by Weight
4 in. 100
No. 40 0-70
No. 200 0-15
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; #2 clean
crushed stone Meeting NYSDOT 703-0201.
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand;
NYSDOT Item 605.0901.
J. Mortar Sand: Shall be Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand Meeting NYSDOT 703-03, mortar sand.
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
No. 4 100
No. 8 95-100
No. 50 10-40
No. 100 0-15
K. Cushion Sand: Shall be Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand Meeting NYSDOT 703-06, cushion sand.
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
1/4 in 100
No. 50 0-35
No. 100 0-10
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-6
April 24, 2019
2.2 GEOTEXTILES
A. Filter fabric: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications,
made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than or equal to 50 percent; complying with
AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 3; AASHTO M 288.
2. Survivability: As follows:
a. Grab Tensile Strength: 120 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
b. Sewn Seam Strength: 101 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
c. Tear Strength: 50 lbf; ASTM D 4533.
d. CBR Puncture Strength: 300 lbf; ASTM D 6241.
3. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
4. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
5. UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 435
6. Manufacturer: Mirafi 140N or equal.
B. Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or
polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following,
measured per test methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
2. Survivability: As follows:
a. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
b. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
c. Tear Strength: 75 lbf; ASTM D 4533.
d. CBR Puncture Strength: 700 lbf; ASTM D 4833.
3. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
4. Permittivity: 0.05 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
5. UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
6. Manufacturer: Mirafi 500X or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-7
April 24, 2019
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary
protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades,
and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in
excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials,
and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock
excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,
replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction
without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or
exterior waterproofing treatments.
e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
3. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground
structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; and soil, boulders, and other
materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not
classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
4. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade
elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the
following dimensions:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-8
April 24, 2019
a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or
exterior waterproofing treatments.
e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches
wide.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel,
tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess
yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined
by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill,
with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.
3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-9
April 24, 2019
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining
trees.
3.9 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.10 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material
will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use select structure fill.
4. Under building slabs, use select structure fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-10
April 24, 2019
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of
existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade
tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot
straightedge.
3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:
1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions,
overlapping sides and ends.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-11
April 24, 2019
2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.
3. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
5. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness,
with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
6. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and
thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as
follows:
1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness,
with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than
95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.
2. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements.
3. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in-place density of compacted fill complies
with requirements.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests
and inspections.
C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent
earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based
on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 20 00
Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-12
April 24, 2019
E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2937, and ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and
frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least
one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab but in no case fewer than three
tests.
F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact
and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations
or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread
soil as directed by Architect.
1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of
them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 12 16
Ithaca, New York ASPHALT PAVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of existing asphalt pavement.
2. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-aggregate
subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.
2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
3. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each paving material. Include statement that mixes containing recycled
materials will perform equal to mixes produced from all new materials.
C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 12 16
Ithaca, New York ASPHALT PAVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-2
April 24, 2019
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain
is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not
met:
1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910.
4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement.
5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Meeting NYSDOT 703-0201, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, Or cured,
crushed blast-furnace slag.
C. Fine Aggregate: Meeting NYSDOT 703-01, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone,
gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total
aggregate mass.
D. Mineral Filler: Meeting NYSDOT 703-08, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.
E. Stone for penetration macadam surface course: NYSDOT 703-0201 Crushed stone with size designations
No. 3, No. 1 & No. 1A in gradations indicated in NYSDOT Table 703-4.
F. Stone for double surface treatment pavement: NYSDOT 703-0201 Crushed stone with size designations
No. 1 & No. 1A in gradations indicated in NYSDOT Table 703-4.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt top course: Meeting NYSDOT 9.5 F1 Top Course HMA, 80 series compaction.
B. Asphalt Binder: Meeting NYSDOT 19 F9 Binder Course HMA, 80 series compaction.
C. Asphalt base course: Meeting NYSDOT 37.5 F9 Base Course HMA, 80 series compaction
D. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: Meeting NYSDOT 702-3102 rapid setting emulsified asphalt.
E. Tack Coat: Meeting NYSDOT 702-3601, grade SS-1h.
F. Water: Potable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 12 16
Ithaca, New York ASPHALT PAVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-3
April 24, 2019
2.3 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes [approved by authorities having
jurisdiction] [; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete
and Other Hot-Mix Types";] and complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is
located.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons.
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined
by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from
substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written
application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before
applying paving materials.
1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
C. Cutback Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a
rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow
prime coat to cure.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to
blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by
sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
D. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base
course at a rate of 0.10 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd. per inch depth. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal,
but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 12 16
Ithaca, New York ASPHALT PAVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-4
April 24, 2019
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to
blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by
sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
E. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.3 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix
by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each
course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
3. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F.
4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way
slopes unless otherwise indicated.
5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in
asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are
required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap
previous strips. Overlap mix placement about 1 to 1-1/2 inches from strip to strip to ensure proper
compaction of mix along longitudinal joints.
2. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove
excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix;
use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of
depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.
3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.
4. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.
5. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 12 16
Ithaca, New York ASPHALT PAVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-5
April 24, 2019
3.5 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in
areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside
edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness.
Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix
asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has
been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927, but not
less than 94 percent or greater than 100 percent.
2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper
alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with
fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally
to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch.
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum
allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 12 16
Ithaca, New York ASPHALT PAVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-6
April 24, 2019
C. Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices: Compact and form asphalt to produce the contour indicated and within
a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch of height indicated above pavement surface.
3.7 SURFACE TREATMENTS
A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. to existing asphalt pavement and allow to
cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.
B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.
1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to
ASTM D 3549.
C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with
smoothness tolerances.
D. Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices: Finished height of traffic-calming devices above pavement will be
measured for compliance with tolerances.
E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted
pavement according to ASTM D 979.
1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples
of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041,
and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to
ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no
fewer than three cores taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method
according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
F. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that
it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.9 WASTE HANDLING
A. General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan required in
Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 12 16
Ithaca, New York ASPHALT PAVING
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-7
April 24, 2019
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 32 91 13 - SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.Section includes planting soils specified by composition of the mixes.
B.Related Requirements:
1.Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for placing planting soil for turf and grasses.
2.Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.
B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or
unamended soil as indicated.
C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.
D.Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has
been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant
growth.
E.Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.
F.Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other
materials in a manufacturing facility, to produce planting soil.
G.NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-, and
water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and statistical evaluation of
analytical data.
H.Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues,
their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil organic matter."
I.Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as
specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
J.RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and Recovery
Act.
K.SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-2
April 24, 2019
L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a
fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
M. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil
profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.
N. Topsoil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile.
O. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include recommendations for application and use.
2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.
4. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment and fertilizer before
delivery to the site, according to the following:
a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products.
b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to AAPFCO methods
for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's SUIP #25.
c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according to SSSA
methods, where applicable.
B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material listed below, 1-quart volume of each in sealed containers
labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be
furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture.
1. Compost
2. Sand
3. Amendments
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory;
experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct
the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.
1. Laboratories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide testing by an approved laboratory.
2. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among qualified testing
laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing, and fertility testing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-3
April 24, 2019
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction soil
analyses on existing, on-site soil.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory samples will be
taken.
B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on soil samples and furnish
soil analysis and a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a
qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing
Requirements" articles.
1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to sample collection and
labeling requirements.
1.8 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.
B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor under the direction of the
testing agency.
1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of one representative soil samples from varied
locations Insert requirement for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.
2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for Describing and
Sampling Soils."
3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two, equal parts. Send half to the testing agency and
half to Owner for its records.
4. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system,
visible soil condition, and sampling depth.
1.9 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.
B. Physical Testing:
1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following methods according to
SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods":
a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse, medium, fine,
and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel) percentages for fine, medium, and
coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes.
b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.
2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's "Methods of
Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."
3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and
Mineralogical Methods."
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-4
April 24, 2019
4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-
Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction according to ASTM D 698 (Standard
Proctor).
C. Chemical Testing:
1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis -
Part 3- Chemical Methods."
2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using CEC by
ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1- Physical
and Mineralogical Methods."
3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals including
aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If
RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective action.
4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including aluminum,
arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel,
selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc.
D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA NAPT NCR-
13, including the following:
1. Percentage of organic matter.
2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.
3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).
4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.
5. Nitrogen ppm.
6. Phosphorous ppm.
7. Potassium ppm.
8. Manganese ppm.
9. Manganese-availability ppm.
10. Zinc ppm.
11. Zinc availability ppm.
12. Copper ppm.
13. Sodium ppm.
14. Soluble-salts ppm.
15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the Standard
protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective
action.
16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.
E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil
Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."
F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil
amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants
indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium
fertilization, and for micronutrients.
1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-
inch depth of soil.
2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for lowering pH
according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-inchdepth of
soil.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-5
April 24, 2019
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight,
certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and Federal laws if
applicable.
B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on
existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge
of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance
systems, or walkways.
3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen.
4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED ACCORDING TO PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Topsoil:
1. Natural, friable soil, containing not less than 3% or more than 20% organic material with a pH
between 5.8 and 7.0.
2. Sandy loam gradation as follows:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
Designation By Weight
2 inch 100
1 inch 85 to 100
1/4 inch 65 to 100
No. 200 mesh 20 to 80
3. Uniform in composition and texture, clean, free from frost, subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other
objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, trash, and other objectionable or
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
4. Obtain imported topsoil from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches
deep. Topsoil is not acceptable from a bog or marsh area.
B. Planting soil: Composed of three (3) parts screened, imported topsoil, one (1) part sand, and one (1) part
compost. Thoroughly mix all components on the site. As an alternative, on-site, in-place existing topsoil
may be amended as follows:
1. Remove existing turf or vegetation.
2. Loosen subgrade to 6” depth
3. Add 3” depth compost to entire planting bed or planting pit area and incorporate my mechanical or
hand methods into soil.
2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate
equivalent and as follows:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-6
April 24, 2019
1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75
percent passing through a No. 60 sieve.
2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent
passing through a No. 60 sieve.
3. Form: Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone.
B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental sulfur, with a
minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through a
No. 40 sieve.
C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.
D. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and according to
ASTM C 33/C 33M.
2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and
bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows:
1. Feedstock: Limited to leaves.
2. Reaction: pH of 5.5 to 8.
3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 4 dS/m.
4. Moisture Content: 35 to 55 percent by weight.
5. Organic-Matter Content: 30 to 40 percent of dry weight.
6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 2-inch sieve.
B. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular
texture with 100 percent passing through a 1/2-inch sieve, a pH of 6 to 7.5, a soluble-salt content
measured by electrical conductivity of maximum 5 dS/m, having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to
2000 percent, and containing no sand.
C. Wood Derivatives: Shredded and composted, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of
uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
1. Partially Decomposed Wood Derivatives: In lieu of shredded and composted wood derivatives,
mix shredded and partially decomposed wood derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum
rate of 0.15 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum
rate of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark.
2.4 FERTILIZERS
A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of [20] [33] [50] percent available
phosphoric acid.
B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and
slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde,
phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium,
by weight.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-7
April 24, 2019
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports
from a qualified testing agency.
C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,
phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports
from a qualified testing agency.
D. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial-grade
FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.
B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry,
concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing
compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.
C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING
A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of 6 inches and stockpile until amended.
B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building
debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other
extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.
C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants,
sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand.
D. Screening: Pass unamended soil through a 2-inch sieve to remove large materials.
3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE
A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting soil. Do
not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2
inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of
them off Owner's property.
1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of unamended soil over
prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing" Paragraph below. Mix thoroughly into top 4
inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-8
April 24, 2019
C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth of 6 inches, but not less than required to meet finish grades
after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy,
or excessively wet.
1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments, except compost, and fertilizer, if required, evenly on
surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil.
a. Mix lime and sulfur with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.
b. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.
2. Lifts: Apply and mix unamended soil and amendments in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose
depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth
for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor
density according to ASTM D 698 and tested in-place.
E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture.
Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
3.4 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL
A. Application: Apply 4 inches of compost to surface of in-place planting soil. Do not apply materials or till
if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll
and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Compaction: Test planting-soil compaction after placing each lift and at completion using a
densitometer or soil-compaction meter calibrated to a reference test value based on laboratory
testing according to ASTM D 698. Space tests at no less than one for each of in-place soil or part
thereof.
2. Performance Testing: For each amended planting-soil type, demonstrating compliance with
specified performance requirements. Perform testing according to "Soil-Sampling Requirements"
and "Testing Requirements" articles.
C. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system,
visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling depth.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL PREPARATION
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 13-9
April 24, 2019
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the
following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Vehicle traffic.
4. Foot traffic.
5. Erection of sheds or structures.
6. Impoundment of water.
7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
B. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious
materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by
Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new planting soil.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from contamination. Keep
adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris
and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.
1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.Section Includes:
1.Seeding.
B.Related Requirements:
1.Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for trees, shrubs, ground covers, and other plants as well as border
edgings and mow strips.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest.
Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They
also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
C.Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or
people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and
mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
D.Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil
amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 32 91 13
"Soil Preparation" and drawing designations for planting soils.
E.Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface
of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.
B.Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture, stating the
botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity,
germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-2
April 24, 2019
C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.
D. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during
a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf
establishment.
1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the New York
State Nursery and Landscape Association (NSNLA) or the American Nursery and Landscape
Association.
2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."
3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on
Project site when work is in progress.
4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers
showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with
state and Federal laws, as applicable.
B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass
Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's
"Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time
for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
C. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on
existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge
of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance
systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-3
April 24, 2019
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial
maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion.
1. Spring Planting: April 1 – May 30.
2. Fall Planting: August 16 – October 15.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit
planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during
favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for
purity and germination tolerances.
B. Seed Species:
1. Quality: All seeds shall have performed in the top statistical grouping from the most recent NTEP
trials conducted for the species.
2. Cornell University Standard: Type 1 – Cornell Turfgrass Seed Blend:
a. Proportioned by weight as follow:
1) 46 percent of a minimum 2 varieties of endophyte enhanced perennial rye.
2) 49 percent of a minimum 2 varieties of improved turf type tall fescue
3) 5 percent of either Midnight-type or Mid-Atlantic-type Kentucky bluegrass.
4) This blend is on file at Banfield-Baker, Lakeside Sod, Winfield and Crosman Seeds,
or blend can be reviewed by Owner’s Representative and mixed by a seed dealer of
choice.
2.2 FERTILIZERS
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and
slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde,
phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium,
by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports
from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,
phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-4
April 24, 2019
1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports
from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
2.3 MULCHES
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats,
or barley.
B. Sphagnum Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture,
and with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
C. Muck Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of
granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000
percent, and containing no sand.
D. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture
content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to
5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings;
and as follows:
1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.
2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-
separated or compostable mixed solid waste.
E. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or
germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.
F. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry
application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.
G. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination
inhibitors.
2.4 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions
and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth
of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has
already germinated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-5
April 24, 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation
and performance of the Work.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.
2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content
reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area,
remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from
damage caused by planting operations.
1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray.
2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing
water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 32 91 13
"Soil Preparation."
B. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in place over exposed subgrade.
1. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before
planting. Do not create muddy soil.
D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or
otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-6
April 24, 2019
3.4 SEEDING
A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5
mph.
1. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.
2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
3. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
B. Sow seed at a total rate of 2 lb/1000 sq. ft. 5 to 8 lb/1000 sq. ft..
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D. Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where indicated on Drawings; install and anchor according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch or planting soil
within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness
of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.
3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE
A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and
performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or
eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same
as those used in the original installation.
1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace
materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and
anchor as required to prevent displacement.
3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use
integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and
reduce hazards.
B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water
from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.
1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay
out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.
2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is
adequate.
C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without
cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass-leaf growth in initial
or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not
mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-7
April 24, 2019
D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply commercial fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that provides actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area.
3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass
has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent
over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.
2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored,
viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.
3. Satisfactory Plugged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs has been
established as well-rooted, viable patches of grass, and areas between plugs are free of weeds and
other undesirable vegetation.
4. Satisfactory Sprigged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs has been
established as well-rooted, viable plants, and areas between sprigs are free of weeds and other
undesirable vegetation.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
3.7 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with
Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is
performed.
B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-
germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before
leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from
traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings
are established.
D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-8
April 24, 2019
3.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer.
Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is
planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods:
1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion.
a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is
not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-1
April 24, 2019
SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn), topsoil, soil amendments and seeding.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with a
ball size not less than the diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant
required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare
visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
C. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-
established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from
container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be
sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest.
Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They
also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some
sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.
F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or
people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and
mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
G. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-2
April 24, 2019
H. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers
to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
I. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines,
ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
J. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or
trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.
K. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of woody plants below the soil surface.
L. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface
of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established
and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.
1. When planting shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly
repair damage caused by planting operations.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.
B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:
1. Mulch: 1-gallon volume of each mulch required; labeled, in sealed plastic bags.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer
demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year
completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the
following:
1. Topsoil: Laboratory analysis of on-site topsoil.
2. Topsoil amendment procedure if testing confirms amendment is required.
3. Compost: Manufacturer’s information, laboratory nutrient and nutrient analysis.
4. Fertilizer: Manufacturer's certified analysis and recommended application rate.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-3
April 24, 2019
C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants
during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of plants.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on
Project site when work is in progress.
2. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements in ANSI Z60.1. Substitutions or changes in the plant species will not be permitted without
prior written approval by the Owner’s Representative.
C. Plant Material Observation: Owner’s Representative may observe plant material either at place of growth
or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and
quality. Owner’s Representative may also observe shrubs further for size and condition of root systems,
pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at
any time during progress of work. Remove rejected shrubs immediately from Project site.
1. Notify Owner’s Representative of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery
to site.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight,
certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal
laws if applicable.
B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on
existing turf areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge
of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance
systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
C. Do not prune shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying,
wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie shrubs in
such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and
delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-4
April 24, 2019
D. Handle planting stock by root ball.
E. Apply antidesiccant to shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before
wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.
1. If deciduous shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and
again two weeks after planting.
F. Wrap shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and
other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.
G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is
delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or
shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable
material.
2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as
often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet condition.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system
components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field
measurements before proceeding with planting work.
B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with
maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
1. Spring Planting: April 15 – May 30.
2. Fall Planting: August 15 – October 15.
C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit
planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during
favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and
other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and
complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning.
Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of
disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
1. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an
established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-5
April 24, 2019
B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and
form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Owner’s Representative, with
a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare
according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species.
Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant.
E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for uniform
height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.Retain "(Annuals) (and)
(Biennials)" Paragraph below for annuals or biennials. ANSI Z60.1 does not include them. Revise to suit
Project; insert sizes of pots or containers if required.
2.2 SOIL AND AMENDMENTS
A. Topsoil: As specified in Section 32 92 00 “Turf and Grasses”.
B. Compost: As specified in Section 32 92 00 “Turf and Grasses”.
C. Coarse sand for planting soil: NYSDOT 703-07, Concrete Sand.
D. Planting soil: Composed of three (3) parts topsoil, one (1) part sand, and one (1) part compost.
Thoroughly mix all components on the site.
2.3 FERTILIZERS
A. Fertilizer: Commercial grade granular 3-3-3 fertilizer of organic ingredients with endo- and
ectomycchoriza. Novozymes Biological, Inc., M-Roots 3-3-3, or equal.
1. Application rate per manufacturer’s instructions.
2.4 MULCHES
A. Mulch: Double-ground, shredded wood bark not exceeding 3 inches in length and free from all disease,
debris and green leaf matter. Color: dark brown.
2.5 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions
and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth
of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-6
April 24, 2019
C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has
already germinated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Hydrogel: Commercial, non-toxic, non-phytotoxic, organic polymer particles, capable of absorbing and
desorbing at least 500 times its weight in distilled water, and 150 times its weight in a standard fertilizer
solution. It shall be capable of releasing a minimum of 95% of absorbed liquid and have a physical
composition analysis of no less than 99.5% copolymers, Amereq Inc., Gelscape Professional and Root-
Dip, or equal.
1. Application rate per manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for shrubs. Deliver
in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions
affecting installation and performance of the Work.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.
2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate
overhead clearance.
3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content
reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area,
remove the soil and contamination as directed by Owner’s Representative and replace with new planting
soil.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants
from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing
water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-7
April 24, 2019
3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
A. Mow existing lawn in shrub planting area to a height of two inches.
B. Apply herbicide to mowed lawn in shrub planting areas at least seven days in advance of planting
operations.
C. Only remove killed lawn to dig individual planting pits. Killed lawn between individual plants remains
for slope stabilization.
D. Stake out the locations of the individual plants and the outlines of the plant beds for review by the
Owner’s Representative prior to installation.
1. Layout all plant beds and individual plants on finished grade in the locations indicated on plan for
review in the field by the Owner’s Representative prior to installation. Provide adequate advanced
notification for timely review.
2. Upon notification, the Owner’s Representative shall review in the field the layout of planting beds
and individual plant locations before installation is permitted, and reserves the right to interchange
the plants and to shift the plant locations and bed configuration if it is possible in their judgment to
achieve a better effect by the changes.
E. Before planting, obtain Owner’s Representative acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if
eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
F. Hydrogel & Fertilizer: Add dry hydrogel and fertilizer product to planting pit after backfill and prior to
mulching at application rate specified and incorporate into the top four inches of soil. Thoroughly water
entire planting pit.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR SHRUBS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.
1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical
sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to
support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that
root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared
or smoothed during excavation.
2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped, and
container-grown stock.
3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots
for bare-root stock.
4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of
the root ball.
5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and
thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.
6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of
adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.
7. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.
8. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected overnight, or after working hours.
9. If drain tile is indicated on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of porous
backfill over tile.
A. Backfill Soil: Planting soil.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-8
April 24, 2019
B. Obstructions: Notify Owner’s Representative if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to shrubs are
encountered in excavations.
C. Drainage: Notify Owner’s Representative if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or
retention in shrub planting pits.
D. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning shrubs.
3.5 SHRUB PLANTING
A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to
ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-
most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still
meets size requirements.
B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare
level with adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Planting soil.
2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap,
rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root
balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or
broken before or during planting operation.
3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of
backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
5. Apply hydrogel and fertilizer at rate specified.
D. Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare level
with adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Planting soil.
2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of
backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
5. Apply hydrogel and fertilizer at rate specified.
E. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the
surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding
soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
3.6 SHRUB PRUNING
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-9
April 24, 2019
3.7 PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting pits and over killed lawn in shrub planting beds. Apply 3-inch
average thickness of organic mulch and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch
within 3 inches of woody shrub stem.
3.8 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, resetting to proper
grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable
plantings.
B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch
materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens
or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and
reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such
as traps, and biological control agents.
3.9 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities
having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's
operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to shrub, and ground-cover areas
according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.
C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-
germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials,
workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate
maintenance, or neglect by Owner.
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a. Shrubs and Perennials: 12 months.
3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-10
April 24, 2019
a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding
planting season.
b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of
warranty period.
c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or replacements due
to failure to comply with requirements.
d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant
material.
3.11 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. Maintenance for plantings: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as
required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and
continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance
period below:
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. Maintenance period
coincides with the warranty period.
B. Plant maintenance becomes the Owner’s responsibility upon final acceptance of plantings at the end of
the warranty period.
3.12 INSPECTION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Inspection by Contractor during the warranty period:
1. The Contractor shall make inspections of all plant materials after substantial completion at periods
not over 30 days during the growing season or not over 90 days during the warranty period.
2. The Contractor shall report to the Owner in writing any deficiencies and cases where changes in
the Owner's watering, spraying and other maintenance procedures are desirable.
3. The reports shall be sent to the Owner’s Representative within ten (10) days following each
inspection.
B. Final inspection by the Owner’s Representative will be performed at the end of the warranty period.
3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.
Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades.
Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged
plantings.
D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels,
wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 93 00
Ithaca, New York PLANTS
OLIN LIBRARY
TERRACE RENEWAL PLANTS 32 93 00-11
April 24, 2019
END OF SECTION